jI, •••

J.. lt., List of Documents

Maintenance Manual
KKS power station Item I Designation Document no. Rev
Identification code or cross reference Info

C Instrumentation and Control Equipment

C.01 Data Sheets C&I Equipment GKWU197594

Procontrol Modules
•

Plant RAF"B" Book code: 6000

Contract no. 80359 Tab C.01

GMD1 096506 Rev. : B Page no.

 c

Instrumentation and Control Equipment

Data Sheets C&I Equipment GKWU197594

Procontrol Modules

.:.0;0;0; ••
 ·'1 -::
:1 .l

l~~ ZEICHNUNGS-NR./DRAWING NO. ANLAGEN-/ORTSKENNZEICHEN PLANKENNZ.

iii HERSTELLER/MANUFACT. BUSH. BETREIBER/CUSTOMER

g~ ~ 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - 1 - - -
BENENNUNG/DESIGNATION
PLANTt LOCATION CODE DWG. CODE

C g-;- DKWL 633294 PROCONTROL P CONTROL MODULE FOR ANALOG CONTROL FUNCTION 83SR07 E/R121 800
~~<C
tbn;r
o 0 ~ DKWL 630492 20 PRDCONTROL P CONTROL MODULE 83SRO 7 E/R 121 0 800
""
0.-"-
~~.~ DKWL 632594 PROCONTROL P RELAY UNIT 89AR301R0100 800
s: 0. a. DKWL 633894 PROCONTROL P UNIVERSAL INPUT MODULE 81EUOl E!R121O 800
~ ~§ DKWL 632394 24
o:!!·3 PRDCONTROL P CONTROL MODULE 83SR04 E/R1310 800
-"'"
"" " DKWL 632893 16 PROCONTROL P REDUNDANCY CONTROL MODULE 88TR011R1210 800
~ ~
-g "- DKWL 633 494 16 PROCONTROL P STATION BUS COUPLING MODUl.E 88TK05-E/R1220 800
"rn" DKWL 632994 12 PROCONTROL P OUTPUT MODULE FOR ANALOG SIGNALS 81AA03·E!R1210 800

n
D""
DKWL 631 492 12 PROC P OUTPUT MOD FOR BINARY SIGNALS 16 FOLD.24V.100MA.81AB03 EIR1210 800

~g DKWL 630792 24 PROC P UNIVERSAL INPUT MODULE 81EUOI EIR1210 800

"'-
~~ DKWL 630692 20 PROCONTROL P CONTROL MODULE 83SR04 EIR 121 0 800
>"
ru~
O)~ DKWL 630990 12 PROCONTROL P COUPLING MODULE 87TSOI E/R22 .IR23 IR25 800
>"
We
m- DKWL 632 192 PROCONTROL P COUPLING MODULE TIME MASTER 87TSOl -E/R2313 800
>""
(!)g
:IJ-< DKWL 631 792 PROCONTROL P COUPLING MODULE 87TSOl E/R2340 800
0-
::;~ DATl 71088 10 PROCONTROL P CONTROL ROOM COUPLING MODULE 87WFOl E/R1515 800
Zo<
0)0
O~ DKWL 631 592 12 PRDCONTROL P COUPLING MODULE FOR REMOTE BUS 88FT05/R 1200 800
<-
mo DKWL 632493 PROCONTROL P BUS TERMINATION 880803 E/R0100 800
~a­
~a.:
(Da. DKWL 632293 20 PROCONTR P BUS COUPLING MODULE TO INPUT/OUTPUT STATION 880T03 EIR2111 800
~
<--n DKWL 631 693 20 PROCONTR P STA TlON BUS COUPLING MUlJULE 88TK05 EIR 121 0 800
Q ~ S;
<GOa.
~~ ~
-
'" '" '"
0 ~
~S~
~~E
",,,,,,,
00-3
,,"0
OJ \)l , ...
Itl'::;-C:
,,"'0
"oa.
o~a.

£~ ~
""0.
"~,,
tb(V :::
OJ =::1
" '" 0.
O:IJ"
---.ro((3
aoro
ro ~(f)
ro~

~roR
D"'""
'< e
to"~0.<
ro
;:r~. ~
>,,'"
(D:::-.:l.
co9-§
>"''''
ru3~1~~~~~~~-L~~--~~~~~~~~-L~~1-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--~~~~~~~~--~~~~~~J
[J)N~
me'"
1>Vl::;

~3::J
~~< ~ ~
AS BUILT 21.08.96
~~ !:?
~g&
e:>ij"g.
<D ~ !,fJDJR£V
~
A J1....
,,'-.... DAT IDATE RAS ABU FONTAS B INHALTSVERZ. / LIST OF DRAWINGS IliHALTSVERZEICHNIS/INDEX
GKWU197607 .KSNL~O __
= 800 I ~101

,
ABT IDrPT DATA SHEETS C&I EQUIPMENT
~ KWUA13 Power and Desalination Stallon PROCONTROL MODULES Z.EICHNUNGS-NR./DRAWING NO. INS !TOTA- . • ElLTN-R I-NO-
GI5'I{VU 197594 iSH I 1

1.---
Module- and
Application Description
Supplement for Applications
with Redundant Design
Publication No.
D KWL 633294 E, Edition 06/94
Application
This module can be used to implement input and processing
module redundancy in the PROCONTROL system. As a
supplement to the updated module description (Publication
No. D KWL 6304 92 E) for the module B3SR07 - E/R121 0, this
document focusses on the module's redundancy-related
features.
Features
Processing is performed in parallel in the on-line and standby
units. When a redundancy switchover is effected, this results in
a bumpless transfer of the processing functions to the standby
unit. This bumpless changeover is ensured by synchronizing
the standby unit with the on-line unit by means of synchroniz-
ing telegrams.
Both on-line and standby units are self-monitoring. Any dis-
turbances within the modules are signalled to the appropriate
redundancy control module BBTR01 via the SSG line.
All process connections (connectors X21) of the individual
modules belonging to a redundant pair are connected in paral-
lel by appropriate wiring in the station.
The input resistors (burdens) are connected in the on-line unit
and disconnected in the standby unit. This is also true for the
process outputs and for the transducer and contact supplies
from the module.
For diagnostic purposes, standby units transmit a sign-of-life
telegram on the bus.
Addressing
Sign-ot-lite telegram
On -line units transmit all telegrams as structured in the
address list. Standby units transmit a sign -of-life telegram
for diagnostic purposes. This is always register O. If register 0
has been structured in the address list, the process telegram is
transmitted with the appropriate data type. If register 0 has not
been structured, a default telegram with data type 0 is trans-
mitted. The sign-of-life telegram is transmitted cyclically.
PROCONTROl P
Analog Control
Control Module
for Analog Control Function with
Continuous Output, 1- and 2-fold
83SR07 - E/R121 0
Diagnosis
The module's hardware and software functions are monitored.
The signalling and monitoring concept is shown in Fig. 1.
All annunciations are signalled via the SST line and indicated
by the ST lamp on the module's front panel.
When a module's SSG line is activated, this is interpreted as a
module disturbance by the redundancy control module
BBTR01 and indicated by the SG lamp on the module's front
panel.
Operating states of the module
Structure, address, parameter and limit value lists
For redundant operation, all of the lists contained in the mod-
ules (structure, address, parameter and limit value lists) must
be identical in the two redundant units. This can be ensured
by the user with the aid of the PDDS.
Simulation
When simulating redundant operation, the module signals
simulated for the two redundant units must be identical. This is
ensured by the PDDS.
Checksum
A checksum for all active lists (structure, address, parameter
and limit value lists) in the EEPROM or RAM as well as the
module firmware is formed in the module. This checksum can
be used to verify that the contents of the lists in the on-line
and the standby units are identical. The checksums can be
displayed by the PDDS.
83SR07/R1210

Module configuration Function blocks

Redundant operation Synchronism

No special configuration is needed for redundant operation.
However, the structuring of the two redundant units must
always be identical. This must be ensured using the PDDS.
Plug-In Jumpers
The user has to make sure that the jumper settings (X200,
X201, X202, X203) are identical in the on-line and the standby
unit.
Function blocks with memory functions are synchronized by
means of synchronizing telegrams transmitted from the on-
line unit to the standby unit. The contents of the telegrams
depends on the function block concerned. In the event mode,
synchronizing telegrams are transmitted whenever a change
occurs. All synchronizing telegrams are single-destination
telegrams with data type 27. They do not have to be config-
ured.
The synchronizing telegrams are also transmitted cyclically (in
each remote bus cycle, all synchronizing telegrams of one sta-
tion are transmitted) in the background for the purpose of
monitoring the transmission path of the synchronizing func-
tion. If the monitor is activated, this is indicated by the annun-
ciation "synchro-monitoring responded".

Synchronization after module restart following connection

of supply voltage, Insertion of the module, or reloading of
user lists

After each restart, the on-line module is put in an operational

state and immediately starts performing its processing func-
tions and transmitting synchronizing telegrams to the standby
unit.
When a standby unit is restarted, it is put in an operational
state. The unit's disturbance lamp ST will light and the annun-
ciation "synchro - monitoring responded" will be present in the
diagnostic register until the unit has received the required syn-
chronizing telegrams. When all synchronizing telegrams have
been received, this means that the processing statusses of the
on-line and standby units are identical.

2
 83SR07/R1210

....-.-.....

Module running

Diagnostic
register 246
Bit Type CDS annunciations *)
15 S - Parameter fault • 6615
14 S I- Pro cess channel fault 6600
13 S I- Pro cessing fault 6601
12 S - Che cksum error detected 6602
11 0
10 S - Tim er defective 6604
9 D - Mod ule restart executed 6605
8 S - Bus deactivation defective 6606
7 0
6 0
5 0
,
4 S ,
, - Sin k monitoring responded 6610
3 0 I
- Eve nt mode fault 6612
2 S
••-:-.0;0;-,
- i 6613
1 S Syn chro-monitoring (D) responded
I
0 0 I I -,
I ~

I I

ST

fr
Module out of order ,---
I
Incorrect firmware PRO M
Hardware defect, proc ess section
T
EEPROM not valid
>1 >1
Processing initializatio n active
"------

Module cannot be ace ~:2:2~d via th~ Q!.!:2

Module transmitter sw itched off
by bus control module
Module address not 0 - 58
Hardware defect, bus adapter
~

SG
I II
~i
f
I

ss G
>1
I
'---

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after transmission of the diagnostic register

S = Static annunciations disappear automatically on deactivation
o = not assigned

Figure 1: Diagnostic signals of 83SR07

*) The control diagnostic system (CDS) provides a description

for each annunciation number. The description includes:
- Explanation of the cause and effect of the disturbance
- Recommendations for correction.
This makes for fast elimination of disturbances.

3
.j>. tu -l n ." OJ

" station bus '" ::J :r

0.. ro
0
:J c W
(f)
/ ::J ::D
~-g" n.-+
:::I
(D o
~::J
2- .::::J.
o
--
USB USA Z
- Z
- ZD ZD ZD SRA
- - SS
-- - - - - - - CD o ::J
::D
~

I
0..
:::I N
Xl1 d30 d32 b32 z32 b02 b14 d2E d18
Q" a. 0.. ~

83SR07 - E/R121 0 oC (D ~"

o
- ::+c5
(/I

+: 0- :J
.., (Q

o III III
tu
~
:= 3
0
user user 0.. :::I
shared parallel/serial operating standard iii" (/I
processor functions functions
memory conversion functions functions "0
EEPROM RAM

I ~
11
::::

I
-
;:
:r
ro
a
o
::J
:::I
ro
a
oCi1
x
~
I

l \l
J
monitoring

• • • • • •
I S"::J 0
co ~ 0
<_:::l
o 0 :::l
_~ro
SG ST S13 S23 !iix a
co ~-
CD --"" Q
process interface 1 process interface 2 en S" X
caN
(f)C~
actuator process actuator process l> 0.. S"
setpoint variable setpoint variable III~ Q.
:::l_C
o..:ro..
roro
C en en
fgg~
0"'0
::J ~
0
0-
C a
en ~
a en
o:::l :::l
-"
::J'O
X21Ib08IZ~6IZ08Ib06IbO~lb04 IZ02IZ~4 Ib19z1~ ~ ro c
-t-_+lb~IZ221z24Ib2~b18Ib20 IZ!.81 z20 1-
a_en-
0" til
::J :::l
UKl AFl STAl TSl EZl E01 AYl Z11 S11 S13 Z12 E12 Ell Z14 E14 E13 UK2 AF2 STA2 TS2 EZ2 E02 AY2 Z21 S21 S23 Z22 E22 E21 Z24 E24 E23 tu 0..
::J 0
o..c
::r-o
ro C
o en
"0"
roO
~ 0
~:::l
, ,

";;
 83SR07/R1210

Basic connection diagram

Redundancy group A
X21
z02

I
z04 83SR07-E/R1210
z06

I
···
•• -:-"':0.

I
b32

Redund ancy group B

Process ~ X21
z02
I
z04 83SR07 - E/R121 0
z06

···
I

" b32

....•.•...

............................................................................................. ...
~~~~~
83SR07/R1210

Connection diagram

83SR07 -E/R121 0

Module in standby mode from / to the process Module in on-line mode

e. g. process interface 1 e. g, process interface 1

I
- t--
k UK1
AF1
t UK1
AF1
......~
k 811 811
*'--- I 813 I
L -_ _ _ _. -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
1813
~--------,,~---~
'--- *

STA1
TS1
I STA1
TS1
EZ1 EZ1
E01 E01

.~
~~
OJ
c I

B
'c
0

.$
E
'0
C
ctI
'5 I
a.
'5
0

I
~
::J
a. E11 E11
,S
cti
c I
OJ
i:i5
,9
@ I E12 I E12

~oo~
I I

Z12
~~+-----------~----~.=-~~
! I Z12 ~ X200

I
I I

I
AY2
!
~ I
I

Z11 I Z11

* electronic switch

6
 83SR07/R1210

Technical data

Power dissipation

On-line status Pv = 5 ... 8.4 W

Standby status Pv = 2.3 ... 3.5 W
depending or, operating voltage and configuration

Redundancy switchover
Enable time for process outputs :s 10 ms
Disable time for process outputs :s 10 ms

Technical data subject to change without notice!

.. ~.

.....................................................................
~.~~~~
 83SR07/R1210

ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH

PO. Box 100351, D-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462 411 107 ab d

Pnnled in Germany (KWLJE69 894 0.3 BID)

...=...=...~
~.= ...=
...~ ...=...~.~~====~~==~~~w=~==~~~==~----~~~.~~~~
................................................................................... ........................... =~~~~~~====
:":":" ....... . __~=~~~~~~
 Module and PROCONTROl P
Application Description Analog Control

Control Module
for Analog Control Function with
Continuous Output, 1- and 2-fold
Publication No.
D KWL 6304 92 E, Edition 04/96
Replacing D KWL 6304 92 E, Edition 06/94 83SR07-E/R1210

Application Features

The module is used for stored-program analog control of one The module address is set automatically by plugging the mod-
or two process variables. The module is provided with two ule into the PROCONTROL station.
continuous outputs for output of the correcting variables. The
following types of actuators can be controlled: The telegrams received via the bus are checked by the mod-
ule for error-free transfer by means of their parity bits.
- electro hydraulic actuators The telegrams sent by the module to the bus are provided with
- electropneumatic actuators parity bits to ensure error-free transfer.
- electric-motor-powered drives
The user program is stored in a non-volatile memory
The drives are positioned either locally at the transducer or in (EEPROM). It can be loaded and changed from the PDDS via
case of electric-motor-powered actuators, in a continuously the bus.
operating power electronics system. It is also possible to sup- The module is ready for operation as soon as a valid user list
plement the single variable analog controls by a higher-level is loaded.
master control system.
For communication with the process and the switchgear, the
The module is intended for use in connection with the process module requires the following voltage:
operator station.
USNUSB operating voltage +24 V
The module incorporates the function blocks for implementing
continuous single variable controllers. Additional function internally branched into the voltages:
blocks are available for signal conditioning. UK1 supply of contacts of process interface 1
UK2 supply of contacts of process interface 2
In the analog control mode, the module is used with fixed
cycle times. This is 100 ms for one actuator and 200 ms for 811/813 supply of transducer of process interface 1
two actuators. 821/823 supply of transducer of process interface 2
The cycle time is specified by means of function block KON, These voltages are short-circuit-proof and designed to pre-
..-.-..••... which is the first block to appear in the structure. vent any interaction .
The module incorporates 2 hardware interfaces to the power The operating voltages and the external logic signals are
units and the process. related to reference conductor Z.
The following annunciations are indicated on the front panel of
the module by LEDs:
8T disturbance
SG module disturbance
The LED 8T signals any disturbance in the module and in data
communication with the module.
The LED 8G signals module disturbances only .

................................................................................ ............................................. m
.. ... =...=
= ...=... ... ... .. =... =...=........
~~~ ~ ~~=~M
••• .. ... =...=
= ...=...=...
~.~====~~~==~.~~ __ ~_
83SR07/R1210

Module design The operating program enables the microprocessor to perform

the operations of the module.

The module comprises: The function block memory contains the software modules
needed to implement the various functions.
- Process interfaces
- Station bus interface All function blocks together with their inputs and outputs can
- Processing section be called by the user via the Programming, Diagnostic and
Display System (PODS).

Process Interface The user program memory contains the foliowin~1 information:

In the process interfaces the process signals are adapted to - how the function blocks are interconnected,
the internal signal level of the module.
- which module inputs and outputs are allocated to the inputs
and outputs of the function blocks,
Station bus Interface
- which constant5 are specified to the individual inputs of the
In the station bus interface the module signals are adapted to function blocks,
the bus. This essentially involves a parallel/serial conversion. - which parametl3rs are specified to the individual inputs of
the function blocks,
Processing section - which plant sig lals are allocated to the module inputs and
outputs,
In order to process the signals coming from the process and
the bus, the module is provided with a microprocessor which - which function blocks serve the process interfaces,
co-operates with the following memory areas via an internal - which limit values are allocated to the analog values,
bus of the module:
- which calculated function results, module input and output
signals are simulated.
i Contents Type of
memory This information is specified by the user according to the plant
: Operating program EPROM involved.
i Function blocks EPROM
The complete user program is filed in an EEPROM for normal
I User program EEPROM operation. For optimizing purposes, it is possible to work with
I,(structure, address, parameter, limit value a modified copy of the user program in RAM, which must be
• and simulation lists) taken over into the EEPROM upon completion of optimization.
i User program RAM
! (structure, address, parameter, limit value Settings can be either preset by the user dil'ectly at the
'. and simulation lists) appropriate function block inputs or specified in a separate
Hlstonc values : RAM parameter list.
Current module input and output- . RAM
When limit signal~ are generated by means of function block
! signals (shared memory) I GRE, the limit values (4 per GRE) are specified in a limit values
list.

Parameter and limit value lists can be changed (on-line) at

anytime during operation. In this case they are stored in the
RAM or EEPROM, depending on whether they are assigned to
the RAM or EEPROM mode.

Data exchange of the module with the bus system is

performed via the memory for the module input and output
signals. It buffers the signals.

2
 83SR07/R1210

......-..,...
Structuring Address list for module Inputs

During structuring module inputs and outputs are allocated to In the address list for module inputs, the send location address
the neutral inputs and outputs of the function blocks or or the process interface associated with the signal to be
constants and parameters or output from other function blocks received is allocated to each module input.
(calculated function results) are specified to the function block
In case of mcdule inputs receiving their signal via the bus,
inputs. Structuring is performed on the basis of data supplied
addressing is done by allocating the send location address to
by the user in the form of a so- called structure list.
EGn, e.g.:
The following limit values of the module shall be observed for
Input )~ddress
structuring:
EG1 1, 32, 24, 8, 7
- max. number of module inputs 287 I
- max. number of simulated calculated function results, bit no. (0 - 15)
I register no. (0 - 255)
module inputs and outputs 32
- max. number of module outputs 223 I module no. (0 - 58)
I'----~~~~- PROCmJTROL
- max. number of calculated function results 255 station no. (1 - 249)
- max. number of timers 136 system no. (0 - 3)
- max. number of parameters 80
- max. number of limit value sets 16 In case of module inputs receiving their signal via the process
interface addr'3ssing is done by allocating the process inter-
- max. number of drive control functions ASP 2
face to EGn. Contact inputs (VPn) and analog inputs (VAn)
- max. number of lines in the structure list 2823 must be distinguished, e.g.:
-length of historic values list (bytes) 1024
- design of shared memory (see "Addressing") Input )\ddress
EG1 VP2
A line is an entry on the PODS.
1_ _ _ __
process interface 2
For the proper procedure to be followed for the structuring of (1 - 2)
the function blocks refer to the function block descriptions.
EG2 VA2
1_ _ _ _-
process interface 2
(1 - 4)

Allocation VAn:
VA1: analog input E11 of process interface 1
VA2: analog input E21 of process interface 2
VA3: analog input E13 of process interface 1
VA4: analog input E23 of process interface 2

Module inputs receiving their signals from the process opera-

tor station are addressed by allocating L to EGn, e.g.:

Input Address
EG1 L
Addressing
1_ _ __ destination telegram
from POS
General
The signal exchange between the module and the bus system The address list for inputs is translated by the PODS into two
is performed via a shared memory. Incoming telegrams to be module-internal lists, the "bus address list" and the "alloca-
received by the module and calculated function results in- tion list module inputs".
tended to leave the module are buffered in the shared The bus addrl3ss list contains the send -location addresses
memory.
and the receive register numbers for all telegl'ams to be used
The shared memory has send registers for telegrams to be by the module.
transmitted and receive registers for telegrams to be received.
Incoming tele~lrams whose addresses are included in the bus
The register numbers 0 to 63 are defined as send registers
address list, are written to the receive registers of the shared
and the register numbers 64 to 199 as receive registers.
memory. Incoming telegrams whose addresses are not in-
The module input and output signals are allocated to the cluded in the ::lUS address list are ignored by the module.
shared memory registers as specified by the user via the
PODS. The allocation list module inputs includes the receive register
number of each module input and in case of binary values the
The user data are contained in address lists. bit position.

................................................................. ......... .... .... ....,...=...

~~~~~~ ======~.~=~
83SR07/R1210
Address list for module outputs to the bus
In the address list for module outputs, a send register is
defined for each signal to be output from the module and
additionally a send bit for binary signals, e.g.:
Output Address
AG1 1, 5 Simulation list
bit no. (1 - 15)
I register no. (0 - 63)
Addressing of the process Interface for the outputs
Module outputs supplying their Signal to the process interface
are addressed in the structure list by the allocation AAn (ana-
log outputs) and APn (release of drives) with n denoting the
number of the process interface, e.g.:
Signal Output
RM2 AA1
I process interface 1
(1 - 2)
I checkback signal
RM3 AP1
process interface 1
I (1 - 2)
check back signal
Address formation
The system and station addresses are set on the station bus
control module and transmitted by this module to all modules
served by a PROCONTROL station.
The module addresses are defined by connections on the
backplane so that each module is set automatically to the
associated address when plugged into a slot.
Limit value list
The limit value list contains a set of 4 limit values for max. 16
function blocks GRE (limit signal formation of an analog
value). It is stored in the EEPROM and - in case of RAM
operation - in the RAM.
Parameter lists can be changed at any time from the PODS by
way of a "job memory" (RAM). In the EEPROM mode these
changes are stored in the EEPROM and in the RAM mode in
RAM. When the user lists are transferred from the RAM to the
EEPROM and vice versa the limit value list is transferred, too.
4
Parameter list
The parameter lis': contains up to 80 values for parameters of
the function blocks. This list is handled and stored in the same
way as the limit value list.
Using the PODS, it is possible to "simulate" up to 32 module
signals (calculated function results, module inputs and out-
puts) by overwritir g them with constant values. This simulation
list is handled and stored in the same way as the limit value
list.
Formation of events
The module is requested once per cycle by the PROCON-
TROL system to transmit the information stored in the send
registers of the shared memory.
If values change this is treated like an event.
The module recognizes the following occurrences as an event:
- Change of a binary value
- Change of an analog value by a permanently set threshold
value of 0.39 % and elapse of the time delay of 200 ms
since the last transmission (cyclic or per event).
If an event occurs cyclic operation is interrupted and the new
values are transmitted to the bus with priority.
Disturbance bit evaluation, reception monitor-
ing
The telegrams received via the bus may be provided with a
fault flag on bit position O. This fault flag is generated by the
send module on tle basis of plausibility checks and is set to
"1" if specific distjrbances occur (see Module and Function
Block Description:;).
In order to be able to recognize errors in signal transfer the
module also incorporates a feature that monitors the input tele-
grams for cyclic renewal. If a telegram has not bElen updated
for a particular pnriod of time (e.g. since the send module
failed) the bit of position 0 is set to "1" in the allocated receive
register of the shc.red memory. Moreover all binary values in
binary value telegrams are set to "0". In case of analog values
the preV;Jus valUE is retained.
A set disturbance Jit does not automatically triggm a reaction
in the module. If the disturbance bit of a telegram is to be eva-
luated provision must be made for this during structuring.
The disturbance bits of received telegrams can be used within
the module only. They are not included in telegrams to be
transmitted.

Diagnosis and annunciation functions
Disturbance annunciations on the module
The following annunciations are signalled on the front panel of
the module:
Designation of lED
- Disturbance ST
- Module disturbance SG
The lED ST annunciates all disturbances in the module and
disturbances in data communication with the module.
The lED SG annunciates module disturbances only.
Disturbances at the process Interface
"'~'.
Monitoring is limited to structured process inputs and outputs.
Disturbances are signalled by the light-emitting diode ST and
by the diagnostic register message 'process channel fault'. In
addition, the disturbance bit is set in the appropriate receive
register.
Disturbance annunciations to the alarm annunciation sys-
tem
The alarm annunciation system and/or the control diagnosis
system CDS receive disturbance messages from the control
module via the bus.
....•.•.....
83SR07/R1210
Diagnosis
The incominq telegrams, the generation of tile telegrams to be
transmitted, and internal signal processing are monitored for
errors in the processing section of the module (self-diagno-
sis).
If a disturbance occurs the type of disturbance is filed in the
diagnosis reqister and, at the same time, a disturbance signal
is transmitted to the PROCONTROl system.
When reque:;ted, the module transmits a telegram containing
the data sto-ed in the diagnosis register (register 246) (see
Fig. 1).
Fig. 1 shows the contents of the diagnosis register, the signals
of the general disturbance lines, the annunciations on the
CDS, and the ST and SG annunciations.
If the annunc iation 'process channel fault' appears in the diag-
nosis register this may be due to any of the following causes:
- Short-circuit at the outputs UK1, UK2, }\F1, AF2, S11/S13
or S21/S23.
- Analog input values not plausible, i.e. the values are smaller
than - 625 % or bigger than 150 %.
- Open circuit at the analog outputs AY1 or AY2 in the config-
uration 4 ... 20 mA.
If the annunciation 'processing fault' appears in the diagnosis
register, this may be due to any of the following causes:
- Invalid structuring
- Relay drivl3r for the analog inputs or outputs of function unit
1 (E11/E12, E13/E14, AY1) or function unit 2 (E21/E22,
E23/E24, AY2) defective.
- Analog section for analog output AY1 or AY2 defective.
- Internal module voltages disturbed.
- Internal reference values of the analog inputs and outputs
disturbed .
5
83SR07/R1210

Module ooeratinQ

Diagnosis
register 246
Bit Type CDS messages *)
15 S r-- Parameter fault 6615
14 S r-- P rocess channel fault 6600
13 S r-- Processing fault 6601
!
12 S - C hecksum error detected 6602
11 0
10 S ~

Ti mer defective 6604

t ~
9 D '-- M odule restart executed 6605
8 S r-- Bus deactivation defective 6606
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
S
o
f--
I
Receive monitoring responded

S f-- Event mode fault

I
C 6610

6612
1 0
0 0 ,----
~

I
1, ST
I
I
Module not operatin Q ,---- I
Wrong firmware PRO M
Hardware defect of processing section
EEPROM not valid
>1 >1 Cf SST
>---C::J

Processing initialization active

~

Module not accessib IS] frQm Q!'!1.2

I
Module transmitter switched off
by bus control modu Ie I
Module address not within 0 - 58
Hardware defect of bus adapter I
I
,
LJ SG
-
I
~==
I

I
I
I
-~

~>1
Cf SSG

-~ I
I

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after the contents of the diagnosis register has been transmitted ~
S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation
o = Not used

Fig. 1: 83SR07 diagnosis messages

*) The control diagnosis system (CDS) provides a description

for every annunciation number. The description provides,
among other data:
- Information on cause and effect of the disturbance
- Recommendations for its elimination.
This makes for fast elimination of disturbances.

6

.....;.;•...
Operating states of the module
Initialization and bootstrapping of user lists
Initialization is accomplished either by plugging the module
into its slot or after connection of the voltage.
The initialization process causes the module to assume a de-
fined initial state. The light-emitting diodes ST and SG light
during initialization.
No user program is available when the module is started up
for the first time. The module signals "Processing fault" and
the disturbance LEOs ST and SG are activated.
As a first step, it is necessary to transfer the user program from
the PODS via the bus to the RAM of the module. If this opera-
tion is started with the structure list, the PODS will call all the
other lists automatically. To avoid the transmission of incorrect
lists, the PODS checks the place of installation and the
address before each transmission job. The module checks
each incoming list for plausibility.
Now, the complete user program can be transferred to the
EEPROM by command from the PODS.
Following this, the module is ready for operation, and the
LEOs ST and SG are deenergized.
Normal operation
The module processes the user program stored on the
EEPROM.
In normal operation, the signals received via the bus and the
process interfaces are processed in accordance with the
instructions contained in the structure list.
In line with these instructions, commands are output to the
power unit, and checkback signals indicating the process
status are transmitted via the bus.
Modifications of the parameter and limit value lists
The parameters and limit values can be changed from the
PODS (see "Limit value list" and "Parameter list").
83SR07/R1210
Modification of the structure and address list
The structure and address lists can be transferred to the
PODS, modified, and retransferred to the module. The follow-
ing procedul"8 should be followed:
- The modL Ie should be in the EEPROM mode
- Copy the ist to be modified from the EEPROM (or RAM) to
the PODS and modify list
- Retransfer the modified list into the RAM of the module.
- Switch the module from EEPROM mode to RAM mode,
using the PODS command "UMS" and t13st new lists.
- Switch tc EEPROM operation again to make further
changes. Repeat steps.
Upon succe~;sful completion of the test the complete user pro-
gram can b'3 transferred from the RAM to the non-volatile
EEPROM, u:;ing the following commands:
- PODS cornmand "Save" (SAV) or
- PODS cornmands "Copy from RAM to EEPROM" (KOP)
and
"Switch over from RAM to EEPROM"
(UMS)
"Save" copies the lists and switches automatically to the
EEPROM without impairing processing on the module and
command OJtput.
Following the switchover operation with the command UMS
(from RAM to EEPROM and EEPROM to RAM) the user lists in
the RAM and EEPROM are compared. Should any difference
occur the ccntrollers are switched to the "manual" mode, the
memories and timers are reset, and the commands present at
the process interface are deactivated. The module transmits
no send -location telegrams. The entries in the shared
memory bel::mging to changed addresses of module inputs
(EGn) are set to zero until new data are received for the first
time after switch over. If the lists are identical processing will
not be interrupted.
Simulation
The PODS permits constant values to be specified to max. 32
individual module signals. These simulation data are stored on
the EEPROM in the EEPROM mode and in the RAM in the
RAM mode.
When the user lists are transferred from RAM to EEPROM and
vice versa the simulation data are copied, too.
The simulation lists concerned are preserved in any change-
over between RAM and EEPROM.
When the simulation process is cancelled via the PODS the
simulation d 3.ta are erased from the active memory (EEPROM/
RAM) and the module continues to operate with the data
received via the bus or the generated values.
7
83SR07/R1210

Command functions The cycle time of the module is determined by the number
and type of the function blocks entered in the structure list.
The cycle times indicated as "fixed" are minimum times. They
Actuation from the control room apply whenever the times resulting from the structure list are
shorter.
The module has no hard-wired control room interfaces. The The time actually required is filed in register 205 and can be
module is actuated via the bus. read out via the PDDS.
The following set of functions can be implemented for each
Actuation by higher-level automatic system
module:
A higher-level automatic system actuates the module via the - 2 drive control functions ASP
bus.
The module cycle time should be considered.
Protective commands The 2 process interfaces of the module are assigned to drive
control functions ,/l,SP.
The logic operations for the protective commands are speci-
fied as required for the plant. The module is connected to the control room through the pro-
cess operator station.
Release of drives
Setting the system-hum filter
The output drive release AF for the power electronics is auto-
matically set to "1" when the module has finished initialization The filter function i::; defined in function block KOfl,l for all ana-
and the mode-dependent release is available from drive con- log inputs in comnon.
trol ASP.

~
Display Entry I Remarks
Checkback signals from the process and analog Input PDDS PDDS
FIL 0 OFF I

The drive-related checkback signals from the process can be or 16 162/3 Hz I

connected to the hardware inputs of the module in case of the or 50 50 Hz (standard setting) I
drive control functions (see function diagrams and connection I
or 60 60 Hz I
diagrams).
The two analog inputs of a process interface are only intended Setting the analo!~ Inputs- and -outputs
for applications within the module itself and may only be con-
nected to the appropriate inputs of the drive control function The configuration IS defined in function block KON. The first
ASP. entry referring to all analog input or analog output is assigned
to process interface 1 (FE 1) and the second entry to process
Analog output interface 2.
Example:
The position setpoints are output via the analog outputs
AY1/Z11 and AY2/Z21. To adapt the position setpoint to the I
Display Entry IRemarks
~
direction of action of the positioner it is possible to reverse this
output in structuring. PDDS PDDS
B01 = ON, 0 Analog inp.1 (VA1) E11 0 ... 20 mA '
B02 = ON,4 Analog inp.2 (VA2) E21 4 ... 20 mA
B03 = ON,4 Analog inp.3 (VA3) E13 4 ... 20 mA
B04 = ON, 0 Analog inpA (VA4) E23 0 ... 20 mA
Module configuration B05 = OFF, 4 Analog out.1 (AA1)AY1 4 ... 20 mA
B06 = OFF, 0 Analog out.2 (AA2) AY2 0 ... 20 mA

Setting the operating mode

Setting the plug-In Jumpers
The operating mode (REG) and the cycle time of the module
are defined in function block KON. This function block shall be The type of the analog value transmitter connected to the ana·
at the top of the structure list, followed by the text elements log input is set by means of the plug-in jumpers X200 ...
TXT for function designations. X203.
X20n plugged in, analog input earthed to connect <~-wire trans-
Operating mode Cycle time of the Input KON
ducers supplied from the module.
module I
Analog control fixed: 100, 200 ms REG, x X20n not plugged ill, analog input unearthed to connect 4-wire
x = 100 ms transducers either supplied from the module or externally.
I
I ' X = 200 ms n from 0 to 3.

8
 83SR07/R1210

Function blocks for the operating mode Function block Abbr.

analog control (REG)
ANALOG FU~JCTIONS

This operating mode provides the function blocks for the ana- Absolute value generator ABS
log control tasks for single variable and master control. Limiter BEG
In this operating mode, no disturbance bits are transmitted for Divider DIV
analog values, except at the output of the function block GRE. Function gen 3rator FKG
The module cycle time can be preset in steps as fixed mini- Integrator (with integrator stop) INT1
mum time (see entries in configuration block KON). Factor variation KVA
The function blocks referred to in general terms above are Maximum value selector MAX
supplemented by an index (if available) in the following list. Minimum value selector MIN
Multiplier MUL
Function block Abbr. Monitoring and select function MVN
Differentiator PDT
BINARY FUNCTIONS Delay element PTO

.'~'.
Delay element PT1
Switch-off delay element ASV
Root extractor RAD
2-out-of-3 selection binary B23 Summing mLltiplier SMU
Extended bit marshalling BRA2 Fault flag suppressor SZU
Dynamic OR-gate DOD Time variation TVA
Switch-on delay element ESV Change -over switch UMS
Monostable flipflop "break" MOA
ANALOG CO 'JTROL
Monostable flipflop "constant" MOK
Manual station HST1
OR-gate ODR
PID controller (with integrator stop) PID3
RS flipflop RSR
PI controller (with integrator stop) PIR3
AND gate UNO P controller PRE
Selector switch 4-fold WS41 Setpoint intenrator SWI1

DRIVE CONTROL PUSHBUTTON SELECTION FUNCTION

Pushbutton selection TAW

... ......
..; '
Drive control function Proportional Output
with extended capabilities ASP1 Pushbutton selection with target value presetting TAl

ORGANISATION FUNCTIONS
LIMIT SIGNAL ELEMENTS
Configuration block for operating mode speCification KON
Limit signal for upper limit value GOG Text element TXT
Limit signal block GRE
For the detailnd specification and the procedure for structuring
Limit signal for lower limit value GUG refer to the function block specifications.

9
 I' Ill-t () -n (Xl
o
....
station bus " ::J::::r
a. co
X"O
o
5CD
c
:J
UJ
en
::D
~ f\) ~. 0 o
~:J
n -
0" .::::!
- USB USAZ
- Z ZO ZD ~D SRA"
- SS
- - - - - - <ii
a.
:::!:
o :J ....
::D

I ....o
X11 d30 d32 b32 z32 b02 b14 d2E d18 a ::I I\)

lr :::;" a. 0..
¥ 83SR07 -E/R121 0 a
S.
CD
III
-
!l)
'---
- IE" (Q
+. 0-::1
o III
.....
!l)
III .. 3
user Q. 0"
user _" ::I
shared parallel/serial operating function en III
processor functions functions
memory conversion functions blocks "0
EEPROM RAM (3
, <
a:
co
a.
::E
g:
s:
, co
a
o
::J
::J
co
a
o
, en
X
~

I "V
I +
monitoring

• • • • •
J
5" :J 0
(Q~o
< _ :J
o_ 0.... co
::J
SG ST S13 S23 S" X a
(Q ~-
co-l. Q
process interface 1 process interface 2 en 5" X
Cal\)
enc~
actuator process actuator process » a. 5"
setpoint variable setpoint variable 1ll~Q..
::J_ c
a.::::ra.
coco
C en en
en"'" III
CD~=
0"0
:J ....
0
0-
C a
en ~
a en
o:J ::J
-"
::J"O
X21Ib08IZ0~ IZ08Ib06lbO~b04 IZ021 Z04 b19Z1~ Ib16 I --i1----11:2 41 z1 0 b241z221z24Ib2~b18Ib20 IZ~I-Iz2_0_1- co c
a_en
-
0" III
::J :J
UK1 AF1 STA1 TS1 EZ1 E01 AY1 Z11 S11S13 Z12 E12E11 Z14 E14E13 UK2AF2STA2TS2EZ2E02AY2Z21 S21 S23 Z22 E22 E21 Z24 E24 E23 lila.
::J 0
a.c
~-6
co c
* To ensure proper functioning of the module, terminal X11/d18 has to be connected with ZD (once per subrack)" o Ui
"0"
co 0
.... 0
a::J
, ,
:ii )

1'1)
I 0
~
0
:::J
~
A
station bus . ......
I»
:::J
ct>
g.
::J
III 0
'f II a. :::J
c:
0 a.
.,
CI)
~ .
ISRAIZO SS IUSAIUSBIZ (Q
......

83SR07-E/R121O ~
~ ::0 ~
8
-E3---O--
::0
) D>
3
ct>
ct>
U
......
AYl IZll UKl EZl EOl E13 S13 Ell Sll 0
::T
'<
a.
......
D>
c
(')

0
......
ct>
ct>
(')
.-+
......
0
-0
:::J
ct>
c
3
~
o·

-~ 19J ~---- P~ P~ [;2W;"

~ransducer
-----

2-wire
transducer
/ D>
....
(')
c
~
0......
...-..
plant analog input analog input -0
......
any process variable e.g. POS 0
(')
ct>
en
en
....:::J
ct>
:::l,
D> Ol
(')
W
ct> en
...... :Il
0
-..J
--..
:Il
~

~
0
 N CD
f\)
I 0 (.0)

:e:::;- 0 en
~ :0
0
...
(II ~

--....
......
A

"
station bus
"
v
-,
DI
:l
(II
a.
c
-
CD
(")

0"
~
:0
....
f\)

0
0 0.
IS~IZD
(II
-, ~.
88 IU8A!USBIZ CO
..,
m
3
83SR07-E/R1210 ~ ;9.
~
8 ;9. CD
CD
-E::3-CJ---- -E::3-CJ---- U
..,
IAF1 IAY1 Z11 IT81 8TA1 /IUK1 EZ1 E01 E13 813 E11 811 0"
I I
I
I
I
1
, ______ .J
I
I
-3
0
0..,

-0
I
I I 0
~

~
I
r
CD
..,
t t CD
0.

lr power electronics 0.
..,
r continuous
-----r--------'
L..-I
<"
CD
..-..
-0
..,
j' 0
(")
CD
en
en

-~
~
m

(")
CD

--
.....

M )------
P\ P\ 2-wire
/'
transducer l / 2-wire
transducer

plant analog input analog input

any process variable e.g. POS

,
) )
 "::1
:j) .: )

""I
::IE
0
0
:::J
=.-
/'l
station bus
1'\

V
-g
(II

....
III
~
1/1
a.
:::J
(t)

0
:::J
" c:
0 C.

~
(II
.... 5)"
ZO SS USA USB Z (Q
....
III
~ ~
3
83SR07-E/R1210 g
1--'-'
JJ

rb-
0
0
I--- ~
;;!
J (t)
CD
n.....
AY1 Z1l UK1 EZ1 E01 Z14 E14 E13 S13 Z12 E12 El1 S11 0
::T
'<
C.
....
III
c
5-
0
....
(t)
(t)
n.
....
0
-0
:::J
(t)
c
3
~.
I
¥-@}----
~

"

L1j ./' ,/' III

4-wire 4-wire n.
c
transducer transducer
/" /" ~

--
0
....
LJ ~ LJ ~ -0
p ....
analog input analog input 0
0
any process variable e.g. pas (t)
C/)
C/)

:::J
.-+
(t)

~
0 ())
(t) w
C/)
--L
~
.::::!
:n
....
~
w 0
-'" ./>. () (Xl
./>. I UJ
0 en
=r :J :D

station bus ...,

==
CD :J
CD
U
0
.::::!
:D
/I
~
'v" III
:J
(II
a.
(5'
-'"
I\)
-'"
0
:J
c
n Q.

Is: ZD SS USA USB Z

\
.,CD ili-
...,
CO
III
~ ~
3
83SR07 -E/R121 0 0
-'" ;P. 0
0 :D <t>
f-e.- ~ f-e.- ~, CD
U
...,
IAF1 AY1 Z11 IT81 8TA1/ UK1 EZ1 E01 Z14 E14 E13 813 Z12 E12 E11 S11 0-
I I 3
I , ___ -1 0
I .-+
...,
0
I I
I
I I "'0
I I 0
:E
~.
I CD
.....
t t CD
Q.

>-j/f- power electronics ...,

Q.

continuous <'
CD
..-..
"'0
...,
~~ 0
(')
CD
en
en
:5"
.-+
~U
4-
I III
(')
CD
-L

4-wire / 4-wire /
M ---~ pl P /'
transducer
/"
transducer

LJ L LJ L
plant analog input analog input
any process variable e.g. POS

.~ "

) :l
 83SR07/R1210

Mechanical design Contact a!~slgnment of process connector X21

Board size: 6 units, 1 division, 160 mm deep View of contact side:

Connector: acc. to DIN 41612
1 x for station bus connection b z
48-pole, edge connector type F I
02 EZ1 AY1
(connector X11)
1 x for process connection, 04 I
E01 Z11
32-pole, edge connector type F 06 TS1 AF1
(connector X21)
08 UK1 STA1
Weight: appro 0.55 kg
10 E11 E13
12 S11 S13
View of connector side: ,
14 E12 E14
.
16 Z12 Z14
18 EZ2 i AY2
X
11 20 E02 Z21
1
I
22 TS2 AF2
24 UK2 STA2
26 E21 E23 1
28 S21 S23
30 E22 E24
32 Z22 Z24 1J

X
21

...:"'.".,....

15
83SR07/R1210

Side view and view of module front

r=P
ASS

~
ST disturbance
ST SG SG modu~e
disturbance

X11

X200d
X21
X201d
X202d
X203d
ASS
83SR07
0

II! EPROM programmed, order number: GJR2392741Pxxxx

xxxx = position number corresponding to the appropriate version

16
 83SR07/R 1210

..... ...
~

Technical data

The following values apply in addition to the system data:

Power supply

Operating voltage module USA/USB ,= 24 V

Current consumption IS = 145 I11A + output values
Power dissipation PV = 5 ... 13.4 W
depending on operating voltage and configuration
Reference potential process side Z = OV
Reference potential bus side ZD = OV

BINARY SIGNALS

Input values
Direct connections for 2 process interfaces
EZx Process checkback signal CLOSED 5 rnA at 48 V
EOx Process checkback signal OPEN 5 rnA at 48 V
TSx Local intervention 5 rnA at 48 V
STAx Disturbance in switchgear 5 rnA at 48 V
x = 1,2

Output values
Contact voltages process side
for the inputs EZX, EOx, TSx and STAx UK1 = 48 'I / :s; 30 rnA
UK2 = 48 'I / :s; 30 rnA
x = 1,2
The outputs are short-circuit-proof, non-interacting and
open-circu it-proof

Output values AFx

Drive release for power unit US - max. 4 V
Output current :s; 100 rnA
x'" 1,2
•••;,?;O;-O ••
The outputs are short-circuit-proof, non-interacting and
open-circuit-proof

17
 83SR07/R1210

ANALOG SIGNALS

Input values Ex1 and Ex3

2-wire transducer
The plug-in jumpers X200, X201, X202 and X203 are inserted.
Current ranges (corresponding to 0 ... 100 %) 0".20 mA or
4." 20 mA
Maximum value -1 ... 50 mA
Input impedance Ri to Z 50 Ohm
x = 1,2

Input values Ex1/Ex2 and Ex3/Ex4

4-wire transducer
The plug-in jumpers X200, X201, X202 and X203 are not
inserted.
Current ranges (corresponding to 0 ". 100 %) 0".20 mA or
4 ".20 mA
Maximum value -1 ... 50 mA
Input impedance Ri to Ex2 and Ex4 50 Ohm
Reference voltage Ex2 and Ex4 0".10 V
x = 1,2

Accuracy of Input values

All data referenced to 100 % of the input value (20 mAl
Accuracy < 0.3 %
(over temperature range 0 to 70°C, aging, voltage range)
Accuracy present on delivery (23°C) < 0.1 %
Quantization error < 0.02 %
Linearity error < 0.1 %
Response to temperature changes < 50 ppm/K (typ. 30 ppm/K)
Errors by digital linearization 1 LSB
Resolution, at 0 ... 20 mA 12 bits
at 4." 20 mA 12 bits
Common-mode rejection 120 dB
Normal-mode rejection at 16 2/3, 50 and 60 Hz 50 dB

Transducer supply Sx1/Sx3

Output voltage US - max. 4 V
Output current :5 50 mA
The outputs Sx1 are short-circuit-proof, non-interacting
and open-circuit-proof.
The outputs Sx1 and Sx3 are interconnected internally.
x = 1,2

Output values AYx/Zx1

Current ranges (corresponding to 0 ". 100 %) 0 ... 20 mA or
4" 20 mA
Max. load impedance :5 500 Ohm
x = 1.2

The outputs are short-circuit-proof, non-interacting and

open-circuit-proof

18

.~",.~~ ... =
... .. = ...=...=...=...=...=...=.. =...=...=...=.. '="'="'="'="=".= ..'~
...=...=., ...~ ...=...=...=...=.. =... =
..,.~.= ...=...=...=...=...=...=.. =...=...=...=...=.. ~~~~ ... =
"'''''''= ... =...=...=...=
... = ..=...C".=
... =...=...=...=...=...=...=.. ~====_ _ _ _._ _ _ _ __
 83SR07/R1210

Accuracy of output values

All data referenced to 100 % of the output value range (20 mAl
Accuracy, on delivery (23°C) :;; 0.1 %
due to effects of temperature, ageing, :;; 0.4 %
voltage range
Quantization error :;; 0.02 %
Unearity error :;; 0.1 %
Response to temperature changes < 50 ppm/K (typ. 30 ppm/I<)
Resolution, atO ... 20mA 12 bits
at4 ... 20mA 12 bits

Initialization time
Upon connection of the voltage or plugging in of the module 2 ... 22 sec

NOISE IMMUNITY (of the process inputs and outputs)

..... ..~ ESD acc. to lEG 801/2 8 kV to the front plate

EMV acc. to lEG 801/4 1 kV Burst
Destruction acc. to lEG 801/5, Draft: lEG TG 65 (Sec) 137 1 kV to reference potential

ORDER DATA

Order No. complete module:

Type designation: 83SR07-E/R1210 Order number: GJR2392700R1210

Technical data subject to change without notice!

,,-;0:-'-'"'>';'•

.... ~.

19

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• :"~~~'7':-:-:-;-• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ~~~_ _

 83SR07fR 1210

ASS Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH

p. O. Sox 100351, D-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462 411 107 ab d

Printed in Germany (DEPPCfR21 0496 0.3 810)

...=...=...=...=...=...=...= = = =
.~ ... =... =... =... =... =...=...=...=
...=...=...=...=...=... ..
~~~~= ...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=.... ...=...=...=...=...=...
~ .......... ...=...=...=...=...=..
~~~-.~==.~ ~ ~~-------~-----~-
 Module and PROf:ONTROL P
•. ·.·7·"';·.
Application Description ModulHS of the Turbine Control System

Relay unit
Publication No.
D KWL 6325 94 E, Edition 02/95
Replacing D KWL 6325 94 E, Edition 09/94 89AR:30/R0100

Application Description

The relay unit is primarily designed to activate the triggering The modUle contains prototype-tested relays *) with posi-
control elements of protection systems. tively driven contacts. The contacts of relays K1, K2, K3 are
grouped in two circuits and are wired in :2-out-of-3 order
It is mounted in a standard withdrawable compartment acc. to
according ':0 the open-circuit principle (external jumpers 918
DIN, using 3 units and including a female connector, type F.
- 920).

Auxiliary contacts can be used to interrogate the individual

relay positions.

Relays K4, K5, and K6 are freely available. 1<4 may be used for
instance for the emergency trip pushbutton of a certain protec-
Features tion circuit either based on the closed -circuit or the open-
circuit prinGiple. In that case, the required jumpers need to be
positioned on the edge connector.
The module contains six relays, three of which can be wired
according to user-specific needs. The contacts of the other *) Acc. to TUV Rheinland (German Technical Inspectorate of
relays are wired in a 2-out-of-3 pattern. Rheinland), Report No. 945/EL 178/88 of Jan. 7, 1988.

••••-<;""""'; ••

... ~."

~-~~~~~~- .. =
...-...-...-...-...-...-...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=......~.=="' ... = ... =
... = ... =
... =
... =... =... =... =.. =... =... =... =... =... ,.~.. =... =... =... =... = .~~~.~ =...=
...- ... ...=...=...~
... ...............
, =
... ~~~-
I\)

..
I
_._._._._._.
All A13
.-.-.~.-.-.-.-.
A31 A51 A53 A55 A57
._._._._._._._.,
~
:::J
n-
6'
:::J
~w
Q.
::D
....
o
a. o
l o
El ~.

,e--I~';- \;+ I~-~

____ 13 18
19
I
I ...,
E51 $l)
J 16 13

1 - , - ,-=-1 - I
L
IS t<
E52
3

1--------1--1--1----1
A58
--------------I--I---I--~---.
A56

13 16
l A54

t< 10 115 19
I A52
J
A17 ~I ,--,--,--
A62

E3$J-~~ -, A64
13

t< I. 19
I A66

J A68

I E61
I
E62
L

EMERGENCY TRIP

- - ~ . - ~.- -[,- - ~ 17
l
I
~-~-c-~-~-f~-~-J~-~--7. J
Pushbutton·
l. _. -I~~nl-. _ . _ . _ • .....jz02f-· -ibl0f-· -iz06-·
z A48 A46 A44 A42 A32 A33 A34 A35 A61 A63 A65 A67

1) external jumpers for 2 x 2-out-of-3

2) external jumpers for EMERGENCY TRIP with K4 (= closed-circuit)
 89AR30/R0100

Mechanical design Contact as;slgnments of connector X1

Board size: 3 units, 2 divisions, 160 mm deep View of the contact side:

Connector: to DIN 41 612

d b z
1 x 48-pole edge connector, type F
02 A32 A12 A48
(Connector X11)
04 A33 A47 A11
Weight: approx. 0.415 kg
06 A34 A24 A44
I
08 A35 A43 A13 I
10 A46
12 A45 I
I
14 I A42
16 A41
18 A64 A14 A68
20 A63 A15 A67
22 A61 A16 A65
24 A62 A17 A66
26 E51 E3 E1

±
28 E61 E4
30 E52 E62 Z I
32 A31 •

View of module front and module side

r-"1

~
0

K1 K2 K3 1<4 [~
X1

K5 K6

•••;;-;>;>;";.-.
~ ~
~
0 ABS I
8!IAR30
o

.
~~-=...=...=...=...=...=...=... ....=...=...=
~ ...=... _- ..............................................
...............................................
=.========================~,====~ =======~"~==================~~==~.~~~
 89AR30/R0100

Technical data

In addition to the system data, the following values apply:

Power supply

Operating voltage of the relays +24 V-

Power dissipation 3W

Input values

Relay coil:
Pickup voltage at 20 ·C ~18 V
Dropout voltage at 20 ·C $ 3.6 V
Coil resistance at 20 ·C 1152 Q ± 10 %

Output values

Contact outputs:
Switching voltage 60V
Switching current $2A
Switching capacity $ 120 W

Switching times

Pickup time < 30 ms

Dropout time < 20 ms
Bounce time < 1 ms

Engineering note:
For activation of inductors, certain protection measures
need to be provided (e.g. suppressor diode)!

ORDERING DATA

Type designation: 89AR30/R0100 Order number: GKWN000326R0100

Technical data are subject to change without notice!

ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH

p. O. Box 100351,0-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462411 107 ab d

Printed in Germany (KWUE24 0895 0.2 BID)

.... ....=
= =....".", .......=
.......= =
. . . .=. . . .=.. = = = = =
........ ....=....=....=... =....=....=....=...=....=....=....=....=.....=........=. . ==~--~= ... =....=.... ..... '"............. ....=....=....=...
~ ~ =....~ ....=... =
.. ~~-~== ....=....=....=... =
....=... ~.
 Module and PROCONTROl P
Application Description Input, Output, Signal Conditioning
Supplement
for Redundant Applications Universal Input Module
for Binary and Analog Transmitters

Publication No.
o KWL 6338 94 E, Edition 10/94 81EU01-E/R1210

Application Diagnosis'

This module can be used in PROCONTROL redundancy The hardware and software functions of the module are moni-
applications for input and processing modules. This descrip- tored. Figure 1 shows the diagnosis messages and the annun-
tion is intended to supplement the applicable module descrip- ciation and monitoring concept.
tion (Publication No. D KWL 6307 92 E) for module 81 EU01-E
All messages are annunciated over the SST line or the ST
/R1210 with information on the redundancy-relevant proper-
lamp on the module front respectively.
ties of the module.
When a module's SSG line is activated, this is interpreted as a
module disturbance by the redundancy control module
Features 88TR01 and indicated by the SG lamp on the module's front
panel.
Processing is performed on the active and on the non-active
module in parallel. In the case of a redundancy changeover,
the non-active module takes up processing in a bumpless
take-over. Bumpless condition is ensured by dual acquisition Operating states of the module
and processing of the input signals.
Active and non-active modules are self-monitoring and
Structure, address and limit-value list
signal module disturbances to the respective 88TR01 redun- For redundant operation all lists of the module (structure,
dancy control module over the SSG line. address and limit-value list) must be identical on both redun-
All process connections (connector X21) of the redundant part- dant modules. This can be ensured by the user with the help
ner modules are connected in parallel through the station of the PODS.
wiring.
The input resistors (loads) are switched on for the active Simulation
module and off for the non-active module. The contact and
For redundant operation, the signals of the redundant modules
transducer supplies are on for both modules.
have to be simulated identically. This is also done from the
....
~ ... For diagnosis purposes, non-active modules send a live-sign PODS.
telegram to the bus.
Checksum
Addressing For all active lists (structure, address and limit-value list) in the
EEPROM or RAM as well as for the module firmware, the
Live-sign telegram modules generate a checksum. This checksum is used for
monitoring the lists on active and non-·active module for
Active modules send all the telegrams structured in the
conformity. The checksums can be displayed on the PODS.
address list. Non-active modules only send live-sign tele-
grams for diagnosis. For this purpose, always register 0 is
used. If register 0 is structured in the address list the process
telegram with the corresponding data type is sent. In case
register 0 is not structured in the list, a substitute telegram with
data type 0 will be sent. Then, the live-sign telegram is sent
cyclically.
81 EU01 /R121 0

Module configuration
Redundant operation

The redundant operating mode does not require special con-

figuration. However, both modules always need to be
structured the same way. This can be ensured with the help of
the PODS.

Jumpers

The user has to make sure that all the jumpers (X100 and
X1 01) belonging to the active and the non-active module are
set the same way.

'-:""'~' ...

2
 81 EU01/R121 0

"'~"'.

Module operating

Diagnosis
Register 246
Bit I type CDS messages *)
15 I S - Parameter fault • 6615
14 I S - Pro cess channel fault 6600
13 S f - Pro cessing fault 6601
12 S - Che cksum error detected I
6602
11 0
•! I 6604
10 S f - Tim er defective I
9 D f - Mo dule restart executed II
6605
I
8 S - Bus deactivation defective 6606
7 I 0
I
6 0
5 0 I
4 I S - Sin k monitoring responded 6610
3 0 I !

....
S -
...
~

2 Eve nt mode fault 6612

1
0
0
0 I
I_
L-
iI
ST

I~
I
I
Module not operating I
Wrong firmware PROM ~ I

Hardware defect of processing section I

EEPROM not valid
>1 I >1
i
Processing initializatio n active
~
Module not accessible from bus
Module transmitter dis connected
by bus control modul e I
Module address not w ithin 0 - 58 ,
Hardware defect of bu s interface
i I

! i -
i SG

n,>1!
!
i

...
~".
I
i
®
i
I I
1
I
I

------------~

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after the contents of the diagnosis register has been transmitted
S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation
o = Not used

Figure 1: Diagnosis messages of 81 EU01
*) The control diagnosis system (CDS) provides a description
for every message number. This description comprises:
- Inforrnation about cause and effect of the disturbance
- Recommendations for elimination
Thus, fa:;t disturbance elimination is ensured.

3
81 EU01/R121 0

Function diagram two connectors, X21 and X11 . Connector X21 contains the pro-
cess inputs.

Terminal designations: The module consists of a printed-circuit Connector X11 contains the standard interface with the station
board (cf. "Mechanical design"). The printed-circuit board has bus and the operatin~1 voltages for the module.

'--ZO-2--2 - -1--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---~ST I

E01

9 3X100
- FE1 f---
~
-----..c:,; SG '

S01 z04 5 4

9 6
- X101 Ol
E02 z06 o
~l

_SO~2__ ~~
't:
Ol
1'_ZO_8_ _ _ _ -L__F_E2
__ 1; d18 SRA
~, I
E03
SCl3 z12
z10
FE3
-,---;-,- - - - - L . - - . - - J
r_ a~

,I
ss

E04 z14

_SO_·4__t-Z1_6_ _ _ _-L__ F_E_4~~

E05 ,z18

~SO~5__1~~0----i--F-E-5~~
E06 ~2

~SO~6~t'=~~4-----L--F-E-6~~
E07 ~6

_SO_7_ ' _~_8____-L__F_E_7~~

r
Eoa z30

~SO~8~~,~Z3~2~_____L__F_E_8~~
E09 I b02
SOg
~I~-"L----li -
1 b04 FE9 L
E10 'b06

_S_10__t-b_08______- i__ F_E_10~~

E11 b10

_S_11__t-b_12______- i__ F_E_11~r- :~

(J
II:
E12 b14 11..
LlJ

_S_12__1'_b_16_____-L__ F_E_12~~ LlJ

E13 b18 +5 V .....f------~

S13 I
b20
--.,----1_---11
FE13 1 b14 ZD
T d26 ZD
E14 b22

~S_14~~b~24~----_i__F_E1_4~~ ~~ ,
E15 'b26

_S1_5__lb_2_8_____ i-_F_E_15~~ 1+24~ d30 USB

E16 b30 +24V i
4r----1----+-~~~~~~---~
'" d32 USA

- 11L..... ' - - - - - - - 1
S16- t -b32
- FE16
----L--
81 EU01-E/R1210
b3T
z32 Z
X21 X11
'----- - --- - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----- - ---- - - - - - ,

4
 81 EU01/R121 0

Basic connection diagram, of specific redundancy wiring

Redundancy A

X21
- z02
z04 81 EU01-E/I={121 0
I
z06

I ··
·
..:'~'.'.

I
b32

Redund ancy B
Process
I
---...... z02 X21

z04 81 EU01- E/r~121 0

" z06

··
·
••••~.-o; •• I
b32

.'~ ..

~·~·.~= ...=
.... ...............m...=...=...=....=...=...=...=....=... ..
~ ~~,.""..~.~= ....=...=...=
=...=... =
•••• ...=.... ...
~= ,~.~,~,.,~",' ., ...
~~~_~ .... = = =............................ .
81 EU01 /R121 0

Connection diagram showing redundancy- relevant inputs

Module in standby mode From the process Module in on-line mode

Process interface (analog, binary) Process interface (analcg, binary)

X101 4 5 501 r • • • • • •

t-----o 6 6 o----j

X100 1 2 2 1 X100
E01

Function Function
unit 1 unit 1
en
.s:
- I f~
-----------l
Function unit 2 Function unit 2
'c:
CI
E
'CI
c:
0;1
through through -=i
CL
.E
Function unit 15 Function unit 15 cti
c::
en
cr.;
I I
516 516
E16 E16

Function Function
unit 16 unit 16

81EU01-E/R1210 81 EU01-E/R121 0

6
 81 EU01 /R121 0

Technical data

Power dissipation

Active mode Pv = 3.4 ... 11 W

Non-active mode Pv = 3.2 '" 7.8 W
depending on operating voltage and configuration

Redundancy changeover

Switch-on time for input resistors :5 10 ms

Switch-off time for input resistors :5 10 ms

Technical data are subject to change without notice!

.......,.......

7
81 EU01/R121 0

a 1111
ft • •
ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH
p. O. Box 100351, D-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462 411 107 ab d

Printed in Germany (KWLJE69 0195 0,3 BID)

 Module and PROC:ONTROL P
Application Description Binary and Analog Control
Signal Processing

Control Module
for Bina.ry Control Function 4-fold
for Analog Control Function 1- to 4-fold
for Applications with Redundant Design
Publication no.
D KWl 6323 94 E, Edition 06/94 83SR04-E/R1310

Application Features
The module is used for stored - program binary and analog The module address is set automatically by plugging the mod-
control tasks on the drive, group and unit control levels. It can ule into the PROCONTROl station.
be used for the following applications:
The telegrams received via the station-bus are checked by
- Drive control of unidirectional drives the module for error-free transfer via their parity bits.
"'~'"
- Drive control of actuators
The telegrarns sent by the module to the bus; are provided with
- Drive control of solenoid valves parity bits to ensure error-free transfer.
- Binary function group control
(sequential and logic) The user program is filed in a non-volatile memory (EE-
PROM). It can be loaded and changed from the PDDS via the
- 3-step control
bus.
- Signal conditioning
The module is ready for operation as soon as a valid user list
The module is intended for use in connection with the multi- is loaded.
purpose processing station.
The module can be operated in three different modes:
For communication with the process and the switchgear, the
- Binary control mode module reqlJires the following voltage:
(and analog basic functions)
USNUSB Operating voltage +24 V
with variable cycle time
branched internally into the following voltages:
- Analog control mode
(and binary control) lJS11 Supply of contacts of pmcess interface 1
with fixed, selectable cycle time lJS21 Supply of contacts of pmcess interface 2
- Signal conditioning mode lJS31 Supply of contacts of pmcess interface 3
with fixed cycle time and disturbance bit output
lJS41 Supply of contacts of pmcess interface 4
.. '~'.

The operating mode is selected by means of function block

TXT1, which is the first to appear in the structure.
In the binary control mode, up to 4 binary function group con-
trols or 4 drive controls, or combinations of drive and binary
function group controls can be implemented for each module
(noting the module cycle time).
In the analog control mode, a maximum of 4 analog control
loops in the form of 3-step controllers - depending on the
regulating time of the actuator - can be implemented for each
module (see "Operating modes").
The module incorporates 4 hardware interfaces to the switch-
gear and the process.
This module is used to implement input and processing mod-
ule redundancy in the PROCONTROl system.
The voltages US11...US41 are short-circLiit-proof and de-
signed to prevent any interaction.
The operating voltages and the external 10!liC signals are re-
lated to reference conductor Z.
The following annunciations are indicated ;:1t the front of the
module via light-emitting diodes:
ST Disturbance
SG Module disturbance
Light-emitting diode ST signals any disturbances in the mod-
ule and in data communication with the module..
Light-emitting diode SG signals module disturbances only.
83SR04/R1310
Processing is performed in parallel in the on-line and standby
units. When a redundancy switchover is effected, this results in
a bumpless transfer of the processing functions to the standby
unit. This bumpless changeover is ensured by synchronizing
the standby unit with the on-line unit by means of synchroniz-
ing telegrams.
Both on-line and standby units are self-monitoring. Any dis-
turbances within the modules are signalled to the appropriate
redundancy control module 88TR01 via the SSG line.
All process connections (connectors X21) of the individual
modules belonging to a redundant pair are connected in paral-
lel by appropriate wiring in the station.
The input resistors (burdens) are connected in the on-line unit
and disconnected in the standby unit. This is also true for the
process outputs and for the contact and transducer supplies
from the module.
For diagnostic purposes, standby units transmit a sign-of-life
telegram on the bus.
Module design
The module essentially consists of the following:
- Process interface
- Station-bus interface
- Processing section
Process Interface
In the process interface, the process signals are adapted to
the module-internal signal level.
Station-bUS Interface
In the station bus interface, the module signals are adapted to
the bus. This essentially involves a parallel/serial conversion.
ProceSSing section
In order to process the Signals coming from the process and
the bus, the module is provided with a microprocessor which
works in conjunction with the following memory areas via a
module-internal bus:
2
Contents Type of
mf~mory
Operating program EPROM
Function blocks EPROM
User program (Structure, address, EEPROM
parameter, limit value and
simulation lists)
I
I User program (Structure, address, RAM
parameter, limit value and
I
simulation lists)
Historic values RAM
Current module input and output RAM
signals (shared memory)
The operating program enables the microprocessor to perform
the basic operations of the module.
The memory for the function blocks contains ready programs
for implementing thE! various functions.
The function blocks available in a particular operating mode
are selected in such a way that the specified task call be per-
formed without addit,onal modules. For instance, in the analog
control mode, it is j:ossible to implement a superposed set-
point control in addition to the Single-variable analog control.
All function blocks together with their inputs and outputs can
be called by the uSI~r via the Programming, Diagnostic and
Display System (PDDS).
The memory for the user program contains information as to:
- how the function modules are interconnected,
- which module inputs and outputs are allocated to the inputs
and outputs of the function blocks,
- which constants are specified to the individual inputs of the
function blocks,
- which parameters are specified to the individual inputs of
the function blocks,
- which plant Signals are allocated to the module inputs and
outputs,
- which function blocks serve the process interfaces,
- which sets of limit values are allocated to the analog values,
- which calculated function results and module input and out-
put signals are simulated.
This information is speCified by the user according to the plant
involved.
The complete user program is filed for normal operation in an
EEPROM. For optimizing purposes, it possible to work with a
modified copy of the user program in the RAM, which must
then be taken over into the EEPROM upon completion of the
optimizing process.
Settings (mainly in the analog control) can be either preset by
the user directly at the appropriate function block inputs or al-
ternatively specified in a separate parameter list.
When limit Signals are formed by means of function block
GRE, the limit values (4 per GRE) are specified in a limit value
list.
Parameter and limit value lists can be changed (on line) at any
time during operation. In this case, they are stored in the RAM
or the assigned EEPI~OM, allocated to RAM and EEPROM op-
eration respectively.
Data exchange between the module and the bus system pro-
ceeds via the memory for the module input and output signals.
It serves to buffer the signals.
 83SR04/R1310

":"~""

Structuring
During structuring, module inputs and outputs are allocated to
the neutral inputs and outputs of the individual function blocks,
or constants and parameters or outputs of other function
blocks (calculated function results) are specified to the inputs
of the function blocks. Structuring is performed on the basis of
the data supplied by the user in the form of a socalled struc-
ture list.
The following limit values of the module have to be observed
during structuring:

- max. no. of module inputs 287

- max. no. of simulatable module signals 32
- max. no. of module outputs 223
- max. no. of calculated function results 255
- max. no. of timers 136
- max. no. of parameters 80
- max. no. limit value sets 16
- max. no. of drive control functions
(binary control, analog control)
e.g. ASE, ASS, ASM and ASI functions 4
- max. no. of group control functions
e.g. GSA and GSV functions 4
- max. no of lines in the structure list 2886
- Length of historic values list (bytes) 2048
- Design of shared memory (see" Addressing")
One line means one entry on the PODS.
The proper procedure to be followed for structuring the func-
tion blocks is shown in the Function Block Descriptions .

....
~.

3
83SR04/R 131 0

Addressing Incoming telegrams whose addresses are included in the bus

address list, are written to the sink register of the shared
memory. Incoming tE~legrams whose addresses arE! not in-
General cluded in the bus address list are ignored by the module.

The signal exchange between the module and the bus system
takes place via a shared memory. Here, incoming telegrams to
be received by the module and calculated function results
which are to leave the module are buffered.
The shared memory has source registers for telegrams to be
transmitted and sink registers for telegrams to be received.
Register numbers 0 to 63 are defined as source registers and
numbers 64 to 199 as sink registers.
The allocation of the module input and output signals to the
shared memory registers is determined from the PDDS on the
basis of data supplied by the user.
The allocation list Module inputs includes, for each module in-
put, the associated sink register number and, in the case of
binary values, also the bit pOSition.
Address list for module outputs to the bus
In the address list for module outputs, a source register is de-
fined for each signal to be output from the modulH, and a
source bit is additionally defined in the case of binary signals,
e.g.:
Output Addres~;
AG1 1, 5

The user data are in the form of address lists.

~- Bit No.
Register No.
(1 - 15)
(0 - 63)
Address list for module Inputs
Addressing of the process Interface for the relay outputs
In the address list for module inputs, the source location or the
process interface associated with the signal to be received is In the case of module outputs supplying their signal to the
allocated to each module input. relay interface, addressing is done in the structure list by al-
location of ARn, with 1 denoting the number of the relay inter-
In the case of module inputs receiving their signal via the bus,
face, e.g.:
addressing is done by allocating the source location address
to EGn, e.g. Signal Output

Input Address RM2 AR1

EG1 1, 32, 24, 8, 7
, I
1-= Bit No.
Register No.
(0 - 15)
(0 - 255)
L=_ Relay interface 1

Checkback signal
(1 - 4)

Module No. (0 - 58) Formation of addreHs

Multi-purpose
processing The system and stati:m addresses are set on the station bus
station No. coupling module (or on the station bus control module) and
(1 - 249)
System No. transmitted from this module to all other modules o-f a PRO-
(0 - 3)
CONTROL station.
In the case of module inputs receiving their signal via the pro- The module addres~;es are defined by connections on the
cess interface, addressing is done by allocating the process backplane, so that each module is set automatically to the
interface to EGn, e.g. associated address while being plugged into a slot.

Input Address Sign-of-llfe telegri:lm

EG1 VP2 On-line units transmit all telegrams as structured in the ad-
dress list. Standby units transmit a sign-of-life telegram for
I Process interface 2 diagnostic purposes. This is always register O. If register 0 has
(1 - 4) been structured in the address list, the process tel':lgram is
In the case of module inputs receiving their signal from the transmitted with the appropriate data type. If register I) has not
process operator station, addressing is done by allocating l to been structured, a default telegram with data type 0 is trans-
EGn, e.g.: mitted. The sign-of--life telegram is transmitted cyclically.

Input Address Limit value list

EG1 l
! Destination telegram from POS
The address list for inputs is translated by the PDDS into two
module-internal lists, the "Bus address list" and the "Alloca-
tion list Module inputs".
The bus address list contains all telegrams to be used by the
module, as well as the source location address and the sink
register number.
The limit value list c01tains a set of 4 limit values for E~ach of a
maximum of 16 function blocks GRE (limit signal formation for
one analog value). It is stored in the EEPROM and - in the
case of RAM operation - in the RAM.
Limit value lists can be changed at any time from the PDDS
and POS by way of a "Job memory" (RAM). Changes are
stored in the EEPROM in the case of EEPROM operation, and
in the RAM in the case of RAM operation. The limit value list is
taken over from the RAM into the EEPROM, and vice versa,
together with the usm list.

4

Parameter list
The parameter list contains up to 80 values for parameters of
the function blocks. It is handled and stored in the same way
as the limit value list.
Simulation list
Using the PODS, it is possible to "simulate" up to 32 module
signals (calculated function results, module inputs and out-
puts) by overwriting them with constant values. This simulation
list is handled and stored in the same way as the limit value
list.
Formation of events
.... ";";";" •...
The module is requested by the PROCONTROl system once
every cycle to transmit the information filed in the source regis-
ters of the shared memory.
If any values change within the cycle time, this is treated as an
event.
The module recognizes the following occurrences as events:
- Change of status in the case of binary values
- Change of an analog value by a permanently set threshold
value of approx. 0.39 % and elapse of a time delay of 200
ms since the last transfer (cyclic or event).
If an event occurs, cyclic operation is interrupted and the new
values are transferred to the bus with priority.
Disturbance bit evaluation, reception monitor-
....
~ ... ing
The telegrams supplied via the bus may be provided with a
fault flag on bit position O. This fault flag is generated by the
source module on the basis of plausibility checks, and the dis-
turbance bit is set to "1" in the event that specific disturbances
are present (see Function Block Descriptions).
In order to be able to recognize errors during signal transfer,
the module also incorporates a feature that monitors the input
telegrams for cyclic renewal. If a telegram has not been re-
newed within a certain time, (e.g. due to failure of the source
module), bit 0 is set to "1" in the allocated sink register of the
shared memory. In binary value telegrams, all the binary val-
ues are simultaneously set to" 0". In the case of analog val-
ues, the previous value is retained.
A set disturbance bit does not automatically involve a reaction
in the sink module. If the disturbance bit of a telegram is to be
evaluated, provision must be made for this during structuring.
In the "Binary control" and "Analog control" modes, distur-
....... -.-0; ••
bance bits of received telegrams can only be used within the
module. They are not included in telegrams to be transmitted.
In the "Signal conditioning" mode, disturbance bits are also
included in transmitted telegrams.
83SR04/R 131 0
Diagnosis and annunciation functions
Disturbance annunciations on the module
The following annunciations are signalled on the front of the
module by ight-emitting diodes (lED):
Designation of LED
- Disturbance ST
- Module cisturbance SG
Light-emitting diode ST signals all disturbances in the module
and disturbances in data communication with the module.
Light-emitting diode SG signals module disturbances only.
Disturbanc,e annunciations to the alarm ~mnunciation sys-
tem
The alarm al1nunciation system and the control diagnostic sys-
tem CDS receive disturbance annunciations from the control
module via the bus.
Diagnosis
All hardware and software functions of the module are moni-
tored.
The incoming telegrams, the generation of tile telegrams to be
transmitted, and internal signal processing are monitored for
errors in thE~ processing section of the mociule (self-diagno-
sis).
In the event of a disturbance, the type of disturbance is filed in
the diagnostic register and, at the same time, a general distur-
bance annunciation is sent to the PROCONTROl system.
If the annunciation 'process channel disturbed' appears in the
diagnostic register, this may be due to any of the following
causes:
- Short-circuit at the contact supply outputs US11, US21,
US31, or US41
- Short-circuit at the command outputs B11/B12/BV1,
B21/B22/BV2, B31/B32/BV3, or B41/B42/IBV4. (If any output
commands are present for more than 5 sec., this will be in-
terpreted as a disturbance of this category.)
- Open circuit at the command outputs B11 /B 12/BV1 ,
B21/B22/BV2, B31/B32/BV3, or 841/B42/BV4. (If no output
command is present, this will be interpreted as a distur-
bance of this category.)
If the annun::iation 'processing disturbed' appears in the diag-
nostic register, this may be due to any of the following causes:
- Invalid structuring
- Driver transistor for the command outputs B11/B12/BV1,
B21/B22/BV2, B31/B32/BV3, or B41/B42/BV4 defective.
When reqw~sted, the module transfers a telegram with the
data stored in the diagnostic register (registm 246) (see Fig.1).
When the module's SSG line is activated, this is interpreted as
a module disturbance by the redundancy control module
88TR01 ancl indicated by the SG lamp on the module's front
panel.
5
83SR04/R1310

Module working

Diagnostic
register 246
Bit Type CDS annuciations *)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _0 _ _ _ _ 6615
15 S - Parameter fault
14 S - Pro cess channel fault 6600
13 S - Pro cessing fault 6601
12 S - Ch ecksum error detected 6602
I,
11 0
10 S - Tim er defective 6604
9 0 - Module restart executed 6605
8 S - Bus deactivation defective 6606
7 0 !

6 0

~
5 0
4 S - Sin k monitoring responded 6610
3 I 0 i I
2 S r- Event mode fault c - - - - - 6612
1 S -
Syn chro-monitoring (D) responded 6613
0 0 -
-
ST

Module does not work

incorrect firmware PR OM
Hardware defect, process section
EEPROM not valid
Processing initializatio n active
-

-
>1 >1 Y ~,ST
=::J

Module not gddressg QI~ vi g QU~

Module transmitter switched off
by bus control modul e
Module address not 0 - 58
Hardware defect, bus adapter
~

SG
r---

>1
C?f !,SG
=::J
I
I
'----

o= Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after transmission of the diagnostic register contents
S = Static annunciations disappear automatically on deactivation
o = not used

Figure 1: Diagnostic signals 83SR04

*) The control diagnostic system (CDS) provides a description

for every annunciation number. This description provides,
among other data:
- Information on the cause and effect of the disturbance
- Recommendations for its elimination.
This makes for fast elimination of disturbances.

6

Operating statuses of the module
Initialization and bootstrapping with user lists
Initialization is accomplished either by plugging the module
into its slot or after connection of the voltage.
The initialization process causes the module to assume a de-
fined initial state. Light-emitting diodes ST and SG light dur-
ing this process.
No user program is available when the module is started up
for the first time. As a result, the module signals "Processing
disturbed", and the light-emitting diodes ST and SG light.
As a first step, it is necessary to transfer the user program from
the PODS, via the bus, to the RAM of the module. If this opera-
tion is started with the structure list, the PODS calls all other
lists automatically. To avoid the transmission of incorrect lists,
the PODS checks the place of installation and the address be-
fore each transmission job. The module checks every incom-
ing list for plausibility.
Now, the complete user program can be transferred to the EE-
PROM by a command from the PODS.
Following this, the module is ready for operation, and the
light-emitting diodes ST and SG are deenergized.
Normal operation
The module processes the user program filed in the EEPROM.
In normal operation, the signals arriving over the bus and the
process interface are processed in accordance with the
instructions contained in the structure list.
In line with these instructions, commands are output to the
switchgear, and checkback signals indicating the process sta-
tus are transmitted via the bus.
Modification of the parameter and limit value lists
The parameters and limit values can be changed from the
PODS (see "Limit value list" and "Parameter list").
Modification of the structure and address lists
The structure and address lists can be transferred to the
PODS, modified there and transferred back to the module. To
do so, the following procedure should be followed:
- The module should be in the EEPROM mode
- copy the complete user program from the EEPROM to the
RAM, using the PODS command "KOP"
- transfer the list to be changed from the EEPROM (or RAM)
to the PODS, modify
- transfer the modified list to the module, which involves auto-
matic storing in the RAM
- switch the module from EEPROM operation to RAM opera-
tion, using PODS command "UMS", test new list
- to make new changes, switch again to EEPROM operation,
repeat procedure.
83SR04/R1310
Upon succe!;sful completion of the test, the complete user pro-
gram can be transferred from the RAM to the non-volatile EE-
PROM, usinq either of the following commands:
- PODS command "Save" (SAV) or
- PODS commands "Copy from RAM to EEPROM" (KOP)
and
"Switch over from RAM to EEPROM"
(UMS)
"Save" effects copying of the lists and subsequent automatic
switchover t::J EEPROM, without impairing processing on the
module and command output.
Following a switch over operation with command UMS (from
RAM to EEPROM and from EEPROM to RAM), the user lists in
the RAM and EEPROM are compared. Should any deviation
be detected, the controller and the binary group controls are
switched to "Manual", the memories and tirrers are reset, and
the commands present at the process interface are deacti-
vated. For changed addresses of module inputs (EGn), the
associated entries in the shared memory are set to zero until
new data ar~ received for the first time after switch over. If the
lists are identical, processing will continue without any inter-
ruption.
Structure, ~Iddress, parameter and limit value lists
For redunda.nt operation, all of the lists contained in the mod-
ule (structurl~, address, parameter and limit value lists) must be
identical in the two redundant units. This can be ensured by
the user wit' the aid of the PODS.
Simulation
The PODS permits constant values to be spElcified for up to 32
individual module signals. These simulation data are stored in
the EEPROlvl in the EEPROM mode and in the RAM in the
RAM mode.
The simulation data are also copied when the user lists are
transferred from RAM to EEPROM and vice, versa.
The simulation lists concerned are preservEld in any change-
over betweE!n RAM and EEPROM.
On cancellation of a simulation process via tl1e PODS, the sim-
ulation data are deleted and the module continues to operate
with the data received over the bus or generated in the mod-
ule.
When Simulating redundant operation, the module signals sim-
ulated for tt'e two redundant units must be indentical. This is
ensured using the PODS.
Checksum
A checksum for all active lists (structure, acldress, parameter,
and limit value lists) in the EEPROM or RAM as well as the
module firmware is formed in the module. This checksum can
be used to verify that the contents of the lists in the on-line
and the sta:1dby units are identical. The cl1ecksums can be
displayed by the PODS.
7
83SR04/R1310

Command functions Operating modes

Actuation from the control room The module incorpori:ites all function blocks required for the
binary control, analo~ control and signal processing tasks on
The module is controlled via the bus and does not have any the drive, group and unit control levels. A set of function blocks
hard-wired control room interfaces. is specified as "Operating mode" for a particular application.
This is done by means of function block TXT1 which must ap-
Actuation by a higher-level automatic system pear at the top of the structure list, followed by text E!lements
TXT for function desi!Jnations.
A higher-level automatic system controls the module via the
1
bus. Operating mode Module cycle time Input TXTl
Binary control variable up to STR
Release and protective commands (and analog max. 700 ms
basic functions)
The logic combinations for release and protective commands
are specified as required for the plant involved. Analog control fixed: 50, 100 REG, x
(and bin. control) 150, 200 X= 50 ms
Command output or 250 ms x=100ms
x=150ms
The commands for the drive control functions (binary control x = 200 ms
or step control) to which the process interfaces were assigned x = 250 ms
are output via relay outputs B11/B12 ... B41/B42. These actu- Signal condl- fixed: 250 ms M'WV
ate, in conjunction with the command outputs BV1 ... BV4 com- tionlng with dis-
I

mon to both command outputs, coupling relays on a two-
channel basis.
The voltage for the command outputs Bll/B12 ... B41/B42 is
derived for each function unit from a separate, module-inter-
nal voltage.
The outputs are short-circuit-proof, protected against mutual
interference, and provided with a protective circuit.
Checkback signals from the process
The drive-related checkback signals from the process, which
are used by the drive control functions, can be connected via
the module's hardware inputs (see Function diagram and
Connection diagrams)
turbance bit out-
put
I
i
:
The module cycle time is determined by the number and type
of function blocks ent9red in the structure list. The cycle times
indicated as "fixed" are minimum times. They apply whenever
the time resulting from the structure list is shorter.
The actually required time is filed in register 205 ancl can be
read out via the PDD:S.
The following set of junctions can be implemented for each
module:
- 4 group control functions, e.g. GSNGSV functions or
- 4 drive control func:tions, e.g. ASIIASE/ASS/ASM functions
or
- combinations of drive and group controls are permissible.
The module cycle ':ime should be considered.
In the analog control mode, the following combinations are
possible, depending :m the module cycle time chosi9n:

I
Operating mode REG REG REG I REG
,
50 ms 100 ms 150 ms 12001
'Analog control I
i 250 ms I
: (and binary con- I ,
1trol) i

,ASI 11
, 1 2 1 2 31 1 2 13 14
,
i
lASE, ASM, ASS I -
I I S;3 - S;3 - i $3
I
-II
The module cycle time should be considered.
The 4 process interfa'::es of the modules including command
outputs are assigned to the drive control functions ASE/ASS/
ASM/ASI whose inputs annunciations from the process,
(PRO), are marked "VPn" in the address list. The following al-
location applies:
n = 1 ProCE!SS interface 1
n = 2 ProCE!SS interface 2
n = 3 Process interface 3
n = 4 Process interface 4
The module is connec:ted to the control room through the pro-
cess operator station

8
 83SR04/R1310

Function blocks

Synchronism

Function blocks with memory functions are synchronized by

means of synchronizing telegrams transmitted by the on-line
unit to the standby unit. The contents of the telegrams de-
pends on the function block concerned. In the event mode,
synchronizing telegrams are transmitted whenever a change
occurs. All synchronizing telegrams are destination telegrams
with data type 27. They do not have to be configured.

The synchronizing telegrams are also transmitted cyclically (in

each remote bus cycle, all synchronizing telegrams of one sta-
tion are transmitted) in the background for the purpose of
monitoring the transmission path of the synchronizing func-
tion. If the monitor is activated, this is indicated by the annun-
ciation "synchronization monitor activated".

Synchronization after module restart following connection

•••:.0;0;-;>•...
of supply voltage, Insertion of the module, or reloading of
user lists

After each restart, the on-line module is put in an operational

state and immediately starts performing its processing func-
tions and transmitting synchronizing telegrams to the standby
unit.

When a standby unit is restarted, it is put in an operational

state. The unit's disturbance lamp ST will light and the annun-
ciation "synchronization monitor activated" will be present in
the diagnostic register until the unit has received the required
synchronizing telegrams. When all synchronizing telegrams
have been received, this means that the processing statusses
of the on-line and standby units are identical.

.... ...
~

.... ~ ...

9
83SR04/R 1310

Function blocks for the operating mode Function blocks Abbrev.

Binary control (STR)
LIMIT SIGNAL ELEMENTS

This operating mode provides the function blocks for all binary Limit signal element for upper limit value GOG
control functions on the drive, group and unit control levels.
Limit signal element for lower limit value GUG
Additional analog basic functions are available.
Limit signal generation GRE
The module cycle time is variable, i.e. it is strictly determined
by the function blocks used. ANALOG FUNCTIONS
In this operating mode, no disturbance bits are transmitted for
analog values, except at the output of the function block GRE. Absolute value genera.tor ABS
Limiter BEG
Function blocks Abbrev. Divider DIV
Function generator FKG
BINARY FUNCTIONS Factor variation KVA
Maximum value selector MAX
Switch-off delay element ASV
Minimum value selector MIN
2 of 3 selection, binary B23
Multiplier MUL ~.

2 of 4 selection, binary B24

Monitoring and selec1 function MVN
M of N selection, binary BMN Delay element PTO
Extended bit marshalling BRA1 Delay element PT1
Extended bit marshalling BRA2 Square root extractor RAD
Dual-BCD converter DBC1 Summing multiplier SMU
Dual-Decimal converter DDC Disturbance bit suppression SZU
Dynamic OR gate DOD Time variation TVA

Switch-on delay element ESV Change-over switch UMS

Monostable flipflop "Break" MOA PUSHBUTTON SELECTION FUNCTIONS

Monostable flipflop "Constant" MOK
Pushbutton selection TAW
OR gate ODR
Pushbutton selection and target value presetting TAZ
RS flipflop RSR
AND gate UNO ORGANISATION FUNCTIONS
Counter ZAE Text element for desi~lnation and note TXT
Text element for operating mode TXT1
GROUP CONTROL
The exact specificaticn of the function blocks as well as the
Group control function for sequential control GSA2 procedure for structuring are shown in the function block de-
Group control function for logic control scriptions.
GSV
Criteria indication KRA1
Criteria indication without watchdog KRA3
Step function SCH1
Preselect function, 2-fold VW2
Preselect function, 3-fold VW3
Preselect function, 4-fold VW4
Select switch, 4-fold WS4
Select switch, 4-fold WS41

DRIVE CONTROL

Drive control function Unidirectional drive ASE1 "~'"

Drive control function Solenoid valve ASM1

Drive control function Actuator ASS1

10
 83SR04/R1310

.. :....,..,.,...;..

Function blocks for the operating mode Function block Abbrev.

Analog control (REG)
ANALOG FUNCTIONS
This operating mode provides the function blocks for all ana-
log control functions for single variable and master control. In Absolute value generator ABS
addition, the function blocks for drive and group control are
Limiter BEG
available.
Divider DIV
In this operating mode, no disturbance bits are transmitted for
analog values, except at the output of the function block GRE. Function generator FKG
The module cycle time can be preset in steps as fixed mini- Integrator INT1
mum time (see inputs in text element TXT1).
Factor variation 'rWA
When implementing several control loops on one module, it
should be noted that the cycle time of the module increases Maximal value selector MAX
accordingly.
Minimal value selector MIN
To ensure precise positioning in the case of single variable
Multiplier MUL
step controllers, the regulating time of the actuator (from 0 -
100 %) must correspond to 200 times the module cycle time, Monitoring and select function MVN
. ..
e.g.
..: ........-:-
Differentiator with P-DT1 action PDT
Regulating time > 10 s for a cycle time of 50 ms
Delay elemellt PTa

Function block Abbrev. Delay element PT1

Square root extractor RAD
BINARY FUNCTIONS Summing multiplier SMU
Switch-off delay element ASV Time variation TVA
2 of 3 selection, binary B23 Change-ovm switch UMS
2 of 4 selection, binary B24
M of N selection, binary BMN ANALOG CONTROL
Extended bit marshalling BRA1
Manual station HST1
Extended bit marshalling BRA2
PID Controlll~r PID3
Dual-BCD converter DBC1
PI Controller PIR3
Dual- Decimal converter DOC
Dynamic OR gate DOD P Controller PRE

Switch-on delay element ESV Differentiator with derivative action PTV

••••0;<;>;";-••

Monostable flipflop "Break" MOA Setpoint inte'grator SWI1

Monostable flipflop "Constant" MOK Setpoint adj uster SWV1
OR gate ODR Disturbance bit suppression SZU
RS flipflop (with reset input dominant) RSR
AND gate UNO PUSHBUTTON SELECTION FUNCTIONS

Counter ZAE Pushbutton selection TAW

Pushbutton selection and target value presetting TAl
DRIVE CONTROL

Drive control function Unidirectional drive ASE1 ORGANISATION FUNCTIONS

Drive control function Incremental output
with expanded capabilities ASI2 Text element TXT

Drive control function Solenoid valve ASM1 Text element for operating mode TXT1
Drive control function Actuator ASS1

LIMIT SIGNAL ELEMENTS

":'~"'.

Limit signal element for upper limit value GOG

Limit signal generation The exact specification of the function bloGks as well as the
GRE
procedure for structuring are shown in the Ifunction block de-
Limit Signal element for lower limit value GUG scriptions.

11
83SR04/R1310

Function blocks for the operating mode Function block Abbrev.

Signal conditioning (MWV)
ANALOG FUNCTIONS
This operating mode provides analog computing functions
and basic binary functions. A separate complete function Absolute value generator ABS
block "ENT" is available to calculate the enthalpy. In addition, Limiter BEG
binary and analog control functions are available.
Divider DIV
In this operating mode, any disturbance bits set to "1" in in- Enthalpy function ENT
coming telegrams are taken over into data telegrams which
are calculated from them and subsequently transmitted. Function generator FKG

The minimum module cycle time is permanently set to 250 ms. Integrator INT1
Factor variation ~A
Function module Abbrev. Maximal value selector MAX
Minimal value selector MIN
BINARY FUNCTIONS
Multiplier MUL
Switch-off delay element ASV Monitoring and select function MVN
2 of 3 selection, binary B23 Differentiator with P-DT1 action PDT
2 of 4 selection, binary B24 Delay element PTO
M of N selection, binary BMN Delay element PT1
Extended bit marshalling BRA1 Differentiator with derivative time PTV
Extended bit marshalling BRA2 Square root extractor RAD
Dual-BCD converter DBC1 Summing multiplier SMU
Dual-Decimal converter DDC Time variation TVA
Dynamic OR gate DOD Change-over switch UMS
Switch-on delay element ESV
Monostable flipflop (Break) MOA ORGANISATION FUNCTIONS
Monostable flipflop (Constant) MOK Text element TXT
OR gate ODR Text element for operating mode TXT1
RS flipflop (with reset input dominant) RSR
AND gate UNO
Counter ZAE

LIMIT SIGNAL ELEMENTS

Limit signal element for upper limit value GOG

The exact specification of the function blocks as well as the
Limit signal generation GRE
procedure for structuring are shown in the function block de-
Limit signal element for lower limit value GUG scriptions.

12
 !j !i ":~j
'il

1" ~:;! if}

... "'T1
"'-r. Station - bus "
v
...... (1)

~ ~,
c
:::J

--
:i" ::J U

-I
III
0'
USB USA Z
- Z ZO ZO ZO_ SRA
X11 d30 d32 b32 z32 b02 b14 d2E d18
- SS
1-- - - - - - (1)
0.
0
a.
CD
:::J
Po>
, ~.
10'
UI
83SR04-E/R1310 Q.

-o·
L- C ::::I
;::;:
0"
III iii'
I
+ a ...,
<0
I ~ ::::I
0. UI Po>
Shared Operational Standard
User User 00' 3
Parallel/Serial
Processor functions functions (1)
memory conversion functions functions .0
EEPROM RAM C
-6'
"0
I I (1)
0.
:E
;::;:
:r
0
a
::J
::J
I I (1)
U
a
iii
X
......
......
III
::J
I I 0.

I O)v I Monitor
I !!l()()
III
~.
a a
:J ::J

i i i i ::J ::J ::J

1i l
<0(1)(1)

a<n.n.
I I
US11 US21 US31 US4l a a
g~~
(1) ...... 1\)
Cfl ......

If T
Process interface 1 Process interface 2 Process interface 3 Process interface 4 C g :i"
(J)::J0

J' J'
I :>S'o
III :i"-a

I JT :J Cfl a
0 .:rill
- ....
c(1)CO

I \ \ J \ TV \ \ T \7 \J \7
I
. --
(J)CflCfl
WS'1ll
6'~
:J ....

'04~06"b08
I a
0"0
C (1)
Cfl Cfl
_. Cfl
LX21 ,02 'OBb£2 b04 bOIl
- z10 z12 z14 b16 z16 bl0 b12 b14
- - - z18 z20 z22 b24 z24 b18 b20 b22
- z26 z28 z30 b32 z32 b2~ b21J b30
:J _.
co::J
=1-"0
ru
o
S-
Cfl co
(1) III
w
Bl1 B12BVl USllSTA1Ell E12E13 B21 B22 BV2 US21STA2E21 E22 E23 B31 B32BV3US31STA3E31 E32E33 B4l B42 BV4US41STA4E4l E42 E43 (J)
III ::J :rJ
::J 0.
!:!"o
:r C
(1)-0
~......
a C
"0-
~
w , ~ o
83SR04/R1310

Basic connection diagram, redundancy wiring

Redundancy group A
X21
z02

I
z04 83SR04-E/R1310
zOS

·
··
I

I
b32

Redund ancy group B

Process
I
-----... z02 X21

z04 83SR04-E/R1310
" zos

·
··
I
b32

14
 83SR04/R1310

Basic connection diagram, inputs and outputs in a redundant disign

83SR04-E/R1310

Module in standby mode from / to the process ' Moclule in on-line mode
e.g. process interface 1 e.g. process interface 1

I----+-* ~~o-t--_US-I-l I _ _ --+1_+-jU_Sl_~_*- - - - I

r I
I I
STAl STAl
Ell Ell
E12 E12
: I E13 j E13
OJ
.!:
.8
'co
E
"0
C
('(l

:5
0-
:5
o
:;:.
::l
0-
.!:
tii
c
OJ
US

611
Ij"" --
---

* electronic switch

..'~'.

15
OJ o ~
o en
:Il
::J
::J o
Station-bus <l> ~
n-
O·
~
w
.....
::J o
a..
SRAfZO SS fUSAIUSBIZ ~.
..,
~
3
83SR04-E/R1310 c
::J
0.:
..,
Bll IB121BVl STAl US1l Ell E12 <l>
Disturbanc hf L11
n-
O·
Plant L21 ::J
L31 ~
F2
Al 2 19 18 10 a..
..,
I + 1+ --I <.

.--
I <l>
~

I L11
C
::J

l
~~~--~--- ~~
I
[L U
L1u o·
I
I I 04
::J
C

I I I I ::J
;::t:

I
ih i Fl Al11
.......,
-"

~2tt 14 rj7~
I

1-
11
Kl )

Switchgear

~
--o r--- A1/2
Kl
12
, L12(N) A1 \ 11
M
K1A K1E

Plant

!
.:;
':~ I
.:i )
 ) :1 :1

()
o
::::J
::::J
(D
Station-bus
/~'------------------------~ g..
/ o
~ v ::::J
0-
f».
SRA ZD SS USA USB Z ...,
CO
n>
\ 3
83SR04-E/R1310
( ?rc
Bll B12 BVl STAl / USll E13 Ell E12 et
o
...,
DisturbanCE /11 L11 -:::;:;
Plant III L21 C
::::J

A1 1_~ 9 I~ 1Q F2 ~f L31
n-
5'
I + +-1 ::::J
, ' C
::::J

:~ ~ T: ~::
;::::t:

I' ......

i ~ Iii Q4T---~
'I In I ' F1 --~ .. A1/1

1- ~ ~2tt 14 r;r7~ A1 5 A1 6
4 7

K2 -I Kl-1
Switchgear , -\

K1~ ,.--. Al/2 0

K1CJ K2CJ 12 ,-\ ~ ~
.. ZU T AUF T L12 Al 111 0 1'-'"1 1'-'"1
~ ~
00
w
Plant (f)
JJ
o
~
~
w
~

-..j o
..... o
CD
o
::J
::J
Station-bus CD
g
o
:::J
a.
iii·
co
P3
3
83SR04-E/R1310 en
o
CD
:::J
o
c.:
Disturbance <
Plant ~
<"
CD
Ai 11 -=+;
I
I
c:
::J
U
I
I
o·
::J
c:

I
::J
;:;:
I I L1u
......
I
I

I ih
I I
I '
~2tt 14 r:i7~
F1 T--
Switchgear /6 L A1/1
A1/2

-----K--. Ai

Plant
 83SR04/R1310

Connection diagram 3-step controller (function unit 1)

r""""~
"- ~
N
co
en
::::>

--
<I: C\I
en ~

::::> w
en c.O...

--
rn en ~
:J
.0 W
I
c 0 c.O...
o N
~
CO)

en ~ W
en
~

(j)
::::>
b 9 I
~ I
~
,.
~
en
~2i8J
0
.....
(Y')
.....
-
c::
W
I
oq-
0
c::
(J)
(Y')
co

:;;
co
C\I
co
~
"c:J
03
~
0
a.
""""~ 0
ai

19

................, ", ............................................................................................ .

83SR04/R1310

Mechanical design Contact allocation of process connector X21

View of the contact side:

Board size: 6 units, 1 division, 160 mm deep
Connector: to DIN 41 612 b z I
i

1 x for station-bus connection, 02 E11 B11

I
48-pole, edge-connector type F 04 E12 ! B12
(connector X11)
06 E13 BV1 I
1 x for process connection, I
08 US11 STA1
32-pole, edge-connector type F
10 E21 I B21
(connector X21) I I

Weight: ca. 0.55 kg 12 II E22 B22

14 ! E23 BV2
16 US21 STA2
View of the connector side:
18 E31 B31
20 E32 B32

i 22 E33 I
I BV3
X 24 US31 STA3
11 I
i 26 E41 841
28 E42 B42
I 30 E43 BV4

I
32 US41 STM

X
21

20
 B3SR04/R1310

Side view and view of module front

r::P

[]ST SG
ST Disturbance
SG Module
disturbance

)(11

....""";"';"...

X21

•• -."7"','.

ASS
83SR04
0

m EPROM programmed, order number: GJR2390243Pxxxx

xxxx = Position number corresponding to the applicable revision status

....... ...
~

21

........................................................................................................................
83SR04/R1310

Technical data

In addition to the system data, the following values apply:

Power supply

Operating voltage Module USNUSB = 24 V

Current consumption IS = 145 mA + output currents
Power dissipation, on-line status PV = 3.5 ... 7.0 W
standby status PV = 3.2 ... 3.5 W
depending on op~~ration voltage and configuration
Reference potential Process section Z = OV
Reference potential Bus section ZD = OV

Input values

Direct connections for 4 function units (FU)

Ex1 - Process checkback signal (EA/EZ) OFF/CLOSED 5mAat48V
Ex2 - Process checkback signal (EE/EO) ON/OPEN 5mAat48V
Ex3 - Torque monitor CLOSED/OPEN 5 mA at 48 V
STAx - Disturbance in switchgear 5 mA at 48 V

x from 1 to 4

Output values

CONTACT VOLTAGES

Contact voltages Process section US11 = 48 V / :$ 30 mA

for the inputs Ex1, Ex2, Ex3 and STAx US21 = 48 V / :$ 30 mA
US31 = 48 V / :$ 30 mA
US41 = 48 V / :$ 30 mA
x from 1 to 4
The outputs are short-circuit-proof and non-interacting.

PROCESS INTERFACE
Voltage supply of the 4 function units
for the command outputs Bx1 and Bx2 24 V
The outputs are short-circuit-proof and non-interacting
and are provided with a protective network
Loading capacity
Bx1 - Command output for OFF/CLOSE IS :$ 80 mA
Bx2 - Command output for ON/OPEN IS :$ 80 mA
BVx - Common command output IS :::;; 80 mA
for Bx1/Bx2 (wired return line)
For the connected load resistor
the following limits apply 360 Q :::;; Rload :::;; 1~, kQ
Service life of the relay output stages ~ 20 million switching cycles

22
 83SR04/R1310

Output values

COUPLING RELAY AND POWER DRIVERS

IN THE SWITCHGEAR
Wiring:
The wiring from the 83SR04 to the switchgear is laid down
in a cable specification to suit the plant.
The max. length of the line (outgoing and return lines) is 600 m
for a cross-section of 0.5 mm 2 .
The following coupling relays and power drivers
can be used:
Coupling relay R513
Power driver with semiconductor LU370
or coupling relays and power drivers
with the same technical data.

Noise immunity

ESD acc. to IEC 801/2 8 kV to fron:: panel

EMC acc. to IEC 801/4 1 kV burst
Destruction acc. to IEC 801/5, draft doc.: IEC TC65(Sec)137 1 kV to reference potential

ORDERING DATA

Order No. Complete module:

Type designation: 83SR04- E/R131 0 Order number: GJR2390200R131 0

Technical data subject to change without notice!

23
83SR04/R1310

1111
••
ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH
p. o. Box 100351, D-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462 411 107 ab d

Printed in Germany (KWL/E69 894 0.3 BID)

 Module and PRO CONTROL P
Application Description TransfE~r

Redundancy
Contl~ol Module
Publication No.
o KWl 6328 93 E, Edition 01/95
Replacing 0 KWl 6328 93 E, Edition 11/93 88TFt01 /R121 0

Application Features

In a PROCONTROl station the redundancy control module is The redundancy control module uses a standard interface with
used for redundancy applications. the PROCONTROl station bus. Connection with the redun-
dant modules is established by the printed station-bus circuit
The redundancy control module board. Connection with the other redundancy control module
is established through the partner interface on the lower
- recognizes redundancy-relevant disturbance signals edge-cornector of the module as well as via the PROCON-
issued by redundant modules of its own redundant station, TROl bus
- monitors the proper functioning of the modules of its own
redundant station, By their parity bits, the telegrams received from the bus are
- monitors the proper functioning of its own redundant station checked by the module for fault-free transmission.
on the remote bus,
- monitors the redundant stations for identical configuration, The telegrams sent from the module to the bus are provided
and with parity bits. This ensures fault-free transmission.
- monitors its own essential module functions.
Disturbances in the module, disturbances in the redundant
station, an::J the module state are indicated by light-emitting
Whenever a redundancy-relevant monitoring function does
diodes (S1; SG, SR, OF, BE, AK) located on the module front.
respond, this module will - in conjunction with the redun-
dancy control module of the other redundant station - effect a
The redundancy control module continuoLisly scans the state
redundancy switchover.
of its redundant station. Should a disturbance occur in its own
When a station is used as a redundancy, the station's address redundant station, the module will effect a switch over. In case
may be within n = 1 to 121. In that case station address the other mdundant station is not fault-free, a switch over will
n+128 must not be used by any other station. not be made.

...
~ ...

,.,
a
.. =
"~ ... =
...=
...=
...= ... ...=....='.'.'.='...==..=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=.. =....=......=... = =.. =... =
...= ~ ... =
... =... .....=
...=
~ ... ...=.... ....=......=..
~ ~ ..=...=...=...=... ....•............
~= ~ ==.=
=.'~".=. ...=...=...=...=...=...=...=.-.~-----------
...=.. =...=
88TR01/R1210

Design of the module Addressing

The module mainly consists of: General

- Partner interface Signal exchange between module and bus system takes place
over the shared mem Qry. This shared memory is usecl for buff-
- Switchover logic ering incoming telewams that are to be receivecl by the
- Station bus interface module as well as module-internal computed results which
- Processing section are to leave the module.
For this purpose, the shared memory is provided with send
Partner Interface registers for telegrams to be transmitted and with receive reg-
isters for telegrams ':0 be received. The information on the
Inside the partner interface, the signals from/to the redun- partner module is filed in the send registers. The tE~legrams
dancy control module of the other redundant station are received from the partner module and from the monitored
adapted to the signal level inside the module. modules of the mod Jle's own redundant station and of the
redundant partner station are stored in the receive r!sgisters.
Switchover logic
Address formation
The switchover logic contains the control and monitoring logic
for a redundancy switchover. The system and station address is set on the 88TK05 station-
bus coupling module which transmits it to all modules belong-
ing to the PROCONTROl station.
Station bus interface
The fixed setting of the module address of the redundancy
Inside the station bus interface the module signals are adapted control module is 59
to the station bus level. Mainly a parallel/serial conversion
takes place.

Processing section

The module uses a microprocessor for processing the signals

coming from the redundancy control module of the other
redundant station and from the bus. Through a bus inside the
module, this microprocessor cooperates with the following
memory areas:

. Contents I Storage
. medium
I Operating program I EPROM
! Address list of redundant modules I EEPROM
I Current module input and output RAM
I signals (shared memory)

The operating program allows the microprocessor to perform

the operation of the module.
The address list of the redundant module locations is filed in
the non-volatile EEPROM.
The ACTUAL values of the modules received by the redun-
dancy control module are stored in the RAM.
The exchange of information between the module and the bus
system takes place over the memory for module input and out-
put signals. This memory is used for buffering the signals.

2
 88TR01 /R121 0

.... ~ ...
Analog control and modes of operation

Redundancies A, B Setting thE! privileged redundant station

The designations "redundancy f;!.', "redundancy B" refer to
location. The following designation rules are to be adhered to:
If the redundant stations are located in two different cabinets,
these cabinets have to be arranged next to each other. Seen
from the front, the left cabinet shall always be designated as
redundancy B, the right cabinet as redundancy A.
If the redundant stations are housed in one and the same cabi-
net, seen from the cabinet front, the upper redundant station
shall always be designated as redundancy A, the lower redun-
dant station as redundancy B.
Setting the redundancy mode
The PROCONTROl station is suitable for redundant as well as
for non-redundant applications.
•••••• <;>;•••
A wired connection at the lower module connector (}(21) of the
redundancy control module of redundancy A between AZP
(contact z08) and EPS (contact b 12) is used to set the privi-
leged redundant station. This connection is not used on the
non-priviIE!ged redundant station.
Always se1 redundancy A to be the privileged redundant
station and redundancy B to be the non - privileged one.
Determininq a privileged station is important for the initializa-
tion phase (see also chap. on "Sequence of functions").
ACTIVE redundancy, PASSIVE redundan,ey, tracking mode
The redundancy control module selects the ACTIVE redun-
dancy stati:m in accordance with fixed rull~s (see also chap.
"Function ~equences").

The desired mode of operation is set by means of plug-type
jumpers on
- Station-bus p.c.b. 891105 or 891107 respectively, and
- Connection p.c.b. 891106 for 88FT05 and 88TK05.
PASSIVE radundancy refers to the non--active redundant
station.
The modules of the ACTIVE redundant station send their tele-
grams with station address n (n= 1 through 121) to the remote
bus.

The setting points are accessible from the cabinet rear. Nor- The PASSIVE redundancy sends its diagnosis telegram and,
mally, the setting is done in the factory by the manufacturer. for each module, the telegram having register address 0 with
station address n+128 on the remote bus (sign-of-life tele-
Settings on all station-bus p.c.b.s, 891L05, 891l07, seen from gram). ThE! diagnosis telegrams are sent by station-bus
the cabinet rear: coupling mJdule 88TK05 and the redundancy control module.
The modules of the ACTIVE as well as thE! ones of the PAS-
Redundant mode Non-redundant mode SIVE redundant station receive all telegrams from the remote
X218 X218 bus.

:~ SRA
:: A~C
B a a D
SRA
SynchronolJs operation of both redundant stations is automati-
cally ensumd by the ACTIVE redundancy. For this purpose, in
the event of any changes, the modules of the ACTIVE redun-
dancy sene! their tracking mode information in event mode to
their partner modules of the PASSIVE redundancy. In addition,
Settings on the 891L06 connection p.c.b., seen from the cabi- the trackin~1 mode information is transmitted cyclically in the
.... ~ ... net rear: background (per remote-bus cycle, for each redundant
station).
Redundant mode
X104 X103 X102 X101
A~C~A A~C~A
BO aDo oB Bo aDO OB

Non - redundant mode

X104 X103 X102 X101

3
88TR01 /R121 0

Making changes in the user software Hardware changes

The redundancy control module monitors both redundant The redundancy control module monitors both re!dundant
stations for identical software configuration. An activated stations for identical hardware configuration.
light-emitting diode DF on the module front indicates that the
Whenever the redundancy control module detects a.ny hard-
software of both redundant stations is not identical. In that
ware change in one of the redundant stations after initialization
case, also a diagnosis message will be issued. The PASSIVE
(see also chap. "Function sequences"), it will respond as fol-
redundancy is not READY for take-over. The READY lamp of
lows:
the PASSIVE redundancy is not on.
If only one redundant station is put into operation, the other - Light-emitting diode SR of the redundancy concerned
redundant station needs to be adapted to the same status if it (ACTIVE, PASSIVE) is ON. A diagnosis message will be
is to be activated later on. issued.
When both redundancies are in operation, it is possible to - Light-emitting diode DF is on in both redundancies. A
make changes in user programs, e.g. structure lists or param- diagnosis message will be issued.
eters, on the modules of both redundant stations by the PDDS! - A hardware chan~le in the ACTIVE redundancy causes a
EDS. As a rule, first the ACTIVE and then the PASSIVE redun- redundancy switcl10ver to the PASSIVE redundancy pro-
dant station will be served. The service personnel does not vided it is in a READY state. Should that station not be
need any special redundancy-related knowledge. READY, there will be no redundancy switchover.
However, it is to be noted that redundancy switchover is - A hardware chan~le in the PASSIVE redundancy renders
inhibited for each module where the user program is being this station not READY for a redundancy switchover.
changed. For this purpose, the PDDS/EDS sends an instruc-
tion for setting the inhibition to the redundancy control module Hardware changes while redundancy operation is activated
of the ACTIVE redundancy. A switchover inhibition is set with should be avoided, since only limited redundancy is available
the following PDDS/EDS interventions: during this time. However, should it be inevitable, hardware
- Writing into a non-active RAM of a module belonging to changes must be carried out as follows:
the ACTIVE or PASSIVE redundancy - Check whether tre redundant modules are of identical
- Changing using the job memory in the ACTIVE or PASSIVE hardware state (type, version, change index) and identical
redundancy software state (ident. no., program version).
- Activating programs on modules belonging to the ACTIVE - Make the hardware changes in the PASSIVE redundancy
or PASSIVE redundancy by means of commands UMS or (PASSIVE redundc.ncy now no longer READY).
SAY
Make corresponding hardware changes in the ACTIVE
The PDDS!EDS knows which changes require a following redundancy.
sum-CRC-check or the sending of synchronous-operation
- Then, provide for iclentical software (see chpt. on "Changes
telegrams and initiates the necessary transmission on the
of user software"). After the software is found to be ident-
changed modules per instruction telegram. This ensures that a
ical, the redundancies will automatically reassume normal
redundancy switch over is only possible if - as is the case with
operation so that a:;tivated disturbance annunciation lamps
initialization (see chpt. on "Initialization") - the PASSIVE re-
and diagnosis meBsages are deactivated again.
dundancy is identical again with the ACTIVE redundancy and
synchronous operation is achieved again.
After PDDS/EDS interventions have been completed, the
switch over inhibition is reset by an instruction.
An activated inhibition is signalled by the ACTIVE redundancy
control module through a flashing light-emitting diode BE.
After an inhibition is set, a monitoring time of approx. 3 min is
started on the redundancy control module. If the PDDS/EDS
does not cancel its inhibition within this time, the inhibition is
cancelled by the redundancy control module, and in diagnosis
register 246 bit 11 (diagnosis message: "Blocking by EDS/
PDDS expired") will be set for approx. 16 sec (longer than 2
remote- bus cycles of 7.5 sec each).
Simultaneous access of several PDDS/EDS systems is
admissible within one redundancy. Each new access will
restart the monitoring time. A switch over is allowed only after
the last PDDS/EDS has completed its activities.

4
 88TR01 /R121 0

Sequence of functions

Initialization

Initialization is effected when the redundancy control module is
plugged in or when the voltage supply is connected. Initializ-
ation results in a defined module status. During the initiali-
zation phase, the disturbance light-emitting diodes ST and
SG are on.
Initialization results in the following operating states:
- If both redundancies have been initialized at the same time,
and both are found eitherfault-free or faulty, upon comple-
tion of the initialization phase one redundancy will be
ACTIVE.
- If both redundancies have been initialized at the same time,
and one of them is found faulty, upon completion of the ini-
tialization phase that station will be ACTIVE which is fault-
free.
- If only one redundancy has been initialized, upon comple-
tion of the initialization phase this station will be PASSIVE in
case the other redundant station is fault-free.
- If only one redundancy has been initialized, upon comple-
tion of the initialization phase this station will be ACTIVE in
case the other redundant station is faulty.
If only one redundancy has been initialized and both redun-
dancies are faulty, upon completion of the initialization
phase the additionally connected redundant station will be
PASSIVE.
If only one redundancy is present and is initialized, it will be
ACTIVE.
After synchronous operation has been established and the
module software statuses have been compared (duration
< 100 msec), initialization is completed.
When the 110dule software statuses of both redundancies are
identical, both redundancies are ready for operation. If they
are not identical, the PASSIVE redundancy immediately enters
the not READY state.
The lists 01' sum CRCs generated during initialization are used
in normal operation for checking the identical structure of the
two redundancies.
Normal operation
During normal operation, the redundancy control module
monitors
redundancy-relevant disturbance messages of the mod-
ules in its own redundant station,
proper functioning of the modules in its own redundant
station,
- proper functioning of its own redundant station on the
remote bus,
- identical configuration of both redundant stations
and
- essential module functions of its own.

A state of "both redundancies ACTIVE" is prevented by the As soon a~; it recognizes a fault which is expected to lead to a
redundancy control module. A state of "both redundancies redundancy switchover, it will control the switchover in coop-
PASSIVE" can be present during the initialization phase only. eration with the redundancy control modulE! of the other redun-
After completion of the initialization phase, this state is pre- dant stati01.
vented by the redundancy control module.
After the ACTIVE redundancy is identified, the following func-
tions will be performed:
- Module-internal normalization.
During this time, sending telegrams from the redundancy is
inhibited.
- The partner interface of the redundancy control module is
checked.
- The software status (firmware and user software) of the
modules of both redundancies is assessed.
This procedure requires 1 to 2 remote-bus cycles. The
redundancy control modules use it to prepare their actual-
value list for the software status of the modules and the
equipment status.
- Synchronous operation of ACTIVE and PASSIVE redun-
dancy is ensured. This procedure takes approx. 1 to 2
remote-bus cycles.

5
88TR01jR1210

Redundancy switch over and related diagnosis messages Redundancy READY and relevant diagnosis messages

A redundancy switch over is effected whenever a redundan- If the PASSIVE redundant station is in a READY state, it is
cy-relevant fault is detected in the ACTIVE redundant station available for a switchover in case a redundancy- relevant fault
and the PASSIVE redundant station is in a READY state, i.e. is has been detected ir the ACTIVE redundant station.
not faulty.
The READY state is indicated by a light-emitting diode on the
In case there is a condition requiring a redundancy switchover, module front of the redundancy control module of the redun-
first the active outputs are switched off and then the outputs of dant station which is PASSIVE at the time.
the PASSIVE modules in READY state are activated.
The PASSIVE redundant station is not READY if a redun-
A redundancy switch over is effected (see also Figure 1):
dancy-relevant fault is present (see also description of the
- When the redundancy control module - via the SSG line of redundancy-relevant faults under "Redundancy switchover
the station bus - recognizes a module signal in the pres- and relevant diagnosis messages", however, under the aspect
ently ACTIVE redundant station. that the disturbance::; described do occur in the PASSIVE
The SSG line is that line which is used by all modules of the redundant station).
manager's own station to indicate their proper functioning
to their redundancy control module. The PASSIVE redundant station is also not in a READY state if
one of the following conditions has been detected:
Relevant diagnosis message: "Redundancy fault".
- If the redundancy control module in the ACTIVE station - When the redundancy control module detects that the
detects and signals a fault in its own firmware (check sum partner interface i~; disturbed (checking at least once per
error). remote-bus cycle).
Relevant diagnosis message: "Checksum error detected". Relevant diagnosiB message: "Partner connection fault".
- When the redundancy control module recognizes that an - When the redundancy control module detects thatthe mod-
additional module has been plugged into the ACTIVE ule user lists of the modules differ in both redundancies.
station.
Relevant diagnOSis message: "Diff. module user lists NB
Relevant diagnosis message: "Station allocation different".
detected".
- When the redundancy control module recognizes that after
initialization a module in the ACTIVE redundancy has either - When the redundancy control module detects that the firm-
been removed or has stopped transmitting. ware status (P number) of its partner module is not ident-
ical.
Relevant diagnosis message: "Station allocation different".
- Whenever the redundancy control module recognizes that Relevant diagnOSis message: "Ditt. module user lists NB
detected".
the ACTIVE redundant station no longer transmits Signals to
the remote bus. - When a switchover from ACTIVE to PASSIVE has been
Relevant diagnosis message: "Transmit path fault". made. The status "not READY" does last approx. 60 sec.
- Whenever the redundancy control module recognizes that
the ACTIVE redundant station does not receive any signals
from the remote bus.
Relevant diagnosis message: "Receive path fault".
- Whenever the redundancy control module recognizes that
there is a fault present in its hardware for redundancy
switchover. A hardware check is performed about every
Smin.
Relevant diagnosis message: "Switchover hardware defec-
tive".

..
~

6
 88TR01/R1210

.:.'''''''''''':'.
Signal designations

Signals from or to the station bus

- SRA = Active redundancy output (issued to the SRA line of the station bus and from there to the modules of the
redundant station)
- SSG = Module disturbance input (coming from the SSG line of the ~;tation bus, the line being activated in the case of
redundancy-relevant faults)

Signals from the partner Interface

Signals for redundancy switch over to the redundancy control module of thE~ other redundant station:
- AZP = "Partner available" message
- AT1 = "Partner ACTIVE" control signal 1
- AT2 "Partner ACTIVE" control signal 2
- APP "PASSIVE partner" control signal
-ASR "Redundancy switchover to partner" inhibited
-AAR "Redundancy ACTIVE" message to partner
-APR "Redundancy PASSIVE" message to partner

Signals for redundancy switch over from the redundancy control module of the other redundant station:
- EZP "Partner available" message
- ET1 "Partner ACTIVE" control signal 1
- ET2 "Partner ACTIVE" control signal 2
- EPP "Partner PASSIVE" control signal
- ESR "Redundancy switchover from partner" inhibited
- EAR "Redundancy ACTIVE" message from partner
- EPR "Redundancy PASSIVE" message from partner

Diagnosis bus from/to the redundancy control module of the other redundant station:
- AEPO =
- AEP1 =
- AEP2 =
- AEP3 =
Data lines
- AEP4 =
- AEP5 =
- AEP6 =
- AEP7 =

Status signals for the data of the diagnosis bus to the redundancy control module of the other redundant station:
- PSSO = Processing active
- PSS1 = Not used
- PSS2 = Reception monitoring did not respond
- PSS3 = Ready

Status signals for the data of the diagnosis bus from the redundancy control module of the other redundant station:
- EPSO = Processing of partner active
- EPS1 = Not used
- EPS2 = Reception monitoring of partner did not respond
- EPS3 = Partner ready

Operating mode signals

- ASP = Transmission inhibited (signal is sent to the 88TK05 station-bu~; coupling module)
- EPS = "Privileged redundancy" input

~~~~~.~ ... =
... =...=...=...=...=...=...=.. =... =... =...=...=...=."="'="="'="'="'="'="'"'~"='."=
..,.=.".= ...=...=...=...=...=...=.. =... =...=...=...=...=...=...=...............=...=...=...=...~==,========~==~~=o=.
.. ~~.=
88TR01/R1210

Diagnosis and annunciation functions Diagnosis

Disturbance annunciations on the module In the event of a disturbance, the type of disturbance is filed in
the diagnosis register and at the same time a disturbance
On the module front, red light-emitting diodes indicate: signal is sent to the PROCONTROl system.
- Disturbance ST The module cyclicall'{ sends a telegram with the data stored in
- Module disturbance SG the diagnosis registE~r (register 246).
- Redundancy disturbance SR
The contents of thE~ diagnosis register, the signals of the
- Compared lists discrepancy DF general disturbance line, the messages at the CDS and
annunciations ST, SG, SR, OF, BE, AK are shown in Figure 1.
Light-emitting diode ST annunciates all module disturbances
and disturbances of data exchange with the module.
Light-emitting diode SG annunciates pure module distur-
bances.
Light-emitting diode SR annunciates all disturbances within
that redundancy, including those which do not entail a redun-
dancy switchover.
light-emitting diode DF annunciates all discrepancies be-
tween the programs of the redundant modules of both stati-
ons.

Status annunciations on the module

On the module front, green light-emitting diodes indicate:

- Redundancy READY BE
- Switch over INHIBITED BE flashing
- Redundancy ACTIVE AK

light-emitting diode BE indicates that the PASSIVE redun-

dancy is READY for a redundancy switchover. In an active re-
dundancy a flashing light-emitting diode BE indicates that
switch over is inhibited by a PDDS/EDS intervention.
Light-emitting diode AK indicates that this redundancy is
ACTIVE.

Disturbance annunciation signals to the annunciation

system

The CDS control diagnosis system receives the disturbance

signals of the redundancy control module over the bus.

8
 88TR01/R1210

DF
~--------------0
Module operating CDS
mes!;ages AK
Diagnosis
register 246 ~--~-----0
BE*, RU** Bit Typ Redundancy designation
15 i S (0 ~ A ~ privileged, 1 ~ B ~ not privileged)
14 i S Redundancy ACTIVE ---------------t---'
x X 13 S Redundancy fault 4!:13-+----1
X X 12 S Switchover hardware defective - - - - - t - - - 4!: 12-+-----1
11 S Blocking by EDS/PDDS expired (1) 4!:11
SR
0 S r- Switchover inhibited by EDS/PDDS (2)
9 S ~ Checksum error detected
i
I
45 09-+-----1 ~1~+----------0
8 S Station allocation different 45 08.-+---...,
7 S Partner connection fault 45 07-+-----1
6 S :-- Diff. module user lists NB detected 45 06
5 0
4 0
X X 3 S - Transmit path fault 45 03--t-----1
X X 2 S r-- Receive path fault 45 02-+-----1
1 0
.... ~ .. 0 0 I
I

(1) Only in ACTIVE redundancy

Switch over inhibited
(2) Only in AC TIVE redundancy, (with time limit; approx. &
only internal status message 60 sec after a sWltch-
over from ACTIVE
to PASSIVE.
Partner available
I
I
I

~l
"Flashing"

ST

~
MQQ!.lle not QQ~rSi!ting ,--
Wrong firmware PROM
Hardware defect in processing section
EEPROM not valid ~1 ~1 ~T
Initialization 0 f processing ON I
~

MQQ!.lle nQ! aQQr~~~Si!QI~ fi:Qm !b~ Q!.l~ !

!
I
Module trans mitter switched off
by 88TK05
I I

U
I i
! !
Hardware defect in bus interfac
I I
i
SG
~I,

~
~
I

~ 1:
I
I I
!

'---

S = Static messages cancelled automatically upon deactivation

o= Not used

Figure 1: 88TR01 /R121 0 diagnosis messages

*** For eac:h message number, the control diagnosis system

* BE = READY:
(CDS) provides a description containing among other in-
Signals marked X in this column in the PASSIVE redun- formation:
dancy will effect a not READY state for the PASSIVE station
Explanations on cause and effect of a certain distur-
..-.'":":-:-.-. ** RU = redundancy switchover: bance
Signals marked X in this column in the ACTIVE redundancy
Recollmended remedies.
will effect a redundancy switchover if the PASSIVE station is
in a READY state. This enwres fast elimination of a disturbance.

9
88TR01/R1210

Function diagram
Connection designations
The printed circuit board includes connectors X11 and X21. Connector X21 includes all inputs and outputs of the partner
Connector X11 contains standard interface SS with the station interface (connections to the redundant partner) and ·the oper-
bus and input/output SSG, SRA for the redundancy switch- ating mode signals.
over.

A
1- I
OlE
.£ ttl::2:
Cij ... O
.... Ol a:
- - - - --

~
z12

I
ASP
en
Cii
c
Ol
'(j5
CD
"0
a

=sJ
CDoc... E
gc. UJ
--
Ol
c
b121 EPS ~
Qi
c.
..... I
o
I (/)
=::2: z08 !>;zP
0 (/)0
or- (/)a:
C\l ~c... z04 AT1

I
-
.....
cr:
.....
0
cr:
I-
"OUJ
~UJ z02
z14 lAPP
z06
AT2

ASR
CO
CO "O~ z10 AAR
CD 0::2:
CiiE~
..eCD
z16 APR
mE I
I
I
b08 EZP
b04 ET1
aen

en
:J
I

ct
en
CD
tl
a
b021 ET2
b14
b06 ESR
EPP
--
.0 b10 EAR
c 1
a b16 EPR
~
I tl
'OJ
Ci5 .Q
Qi
CD I- > z18 AEPO
en tl
ttl a
en ..e
't: .B z20 I AEP1
CD
:E ';: z22 AEP2
(/)
m
.0
:J z24 AEP3
(!)

en '"
en .a
C\J c z26 AEP4
«100
a: ~
~
Ci5
a

1--------- 1----.1
1 z28 I AEP5
en "tJ z30 AEP6
z32 AEP7
0
N '"
C\J
"tJ
r---- I
o'~ psso
~~
b26

r
1\
N .a
C\J +5V
b28 PSS1
~~
0 0
N .a
I b30 PSS2
~ffi
!!2
ttl

~1
c b321 PSS3
«I
~~
Ol
en C\l '00
:::> 'ti +24V
CD
"S
~ 0 b18 EPSO

1\
~t;
"0
:::> '" a

--
"tJ
C\l
+24V ::2: b20 EPS1
N,',:3
C\l b22 1 EPS2
N '"
.a
,....
~~ b24 EPS3
... x - or-
7- ~
- - - - - --
10
 88TR01/R1210

..':~"'.
Connection diagram for redundancy control modules in redundant stations

Redundancy A (privileged redundancy) Redundancy B

CD«
CJ)a:
CJ)CJ)

{'
I
... -
~' I
SSG f'.
00 (:)0 SSG f - - ..
... .-:-/:(>..:,." .,:,.:.'.':}
a: .... n: .... .",'"., .
CJ)C\J (f) C\J

---
(') ,....

~:
SRA
C"l"'"
co a: (0 a: SRA 14-
SSG 00 OO SSG f - - .... ....

=>,.... ::l ....

~••
::i':
.-
U
WC\J LlJ C\J
,.... ,.... ,....
f------o SRA co a: (0 a: SRA 14-
-c
0 I.
I::
':?:::::
lot i - - - SSG v
00
a: ....
0)
:;:::;
0).;9
.....c(/)
.....
(:)0
[I: ,....
(f) C"l
SSG f""
'>'.
I
u"
CJ)C"l
C. OJ"'C (') ,....
II ~ SRA
C"l"'"
co a: E .~ ~ (0 a: SRA 14-
::l~o)
.~ 0)-
0) (/).:;
.... .-
(/) ~ Q=Q. (/)
::l
::l EPS
EPS .0
V
~

.0
C c
0 AZP AZP 0
~ EZP EZP ~
Ci5 Ci5
AT1 AT1
AT2 }~T2

ET1 ET1
•••••••

. ,:,
ET2 ET2 ., .. '::.:" ,
':'" '." .

f
APP }~PP
( EPP EPP
.:,'.:.:
ASR ASR

i
ESR ESR !
.':': AAR }~R

CD EAR EAR CD
CJ)
>-- f---- CJ)
CJ) CJ) 14-f-
APR }~PR

EPR EPR
«
a:
«
a: <
14- r-: ~
L-
CJ) ": .. CJ)
a...

r~
a... 0 V" "'\ c::i

1
CJ) CJ)
« a... v
(L
«
UJ LU
« " c:(
~ l
It) CD a... « 0 « Ul
a... CD It)
0
~
CJ)
CJ)
CJ)
W
a:
CJ) ,....
C
~ c,:! ,.... a:
CJ) LJ.J
CJ)
CJ)
0
::.:::
t-
~
,....
C\I ,....
C\I

-
eo C:) co

-
0
eo CJ) co co
a:: CJ)
a...
co a:
,.... (L
,....
0 0
It) IX: ~
...
c,:! a:
.....
It)
0 ..... 0 V'- c::i 0
t::co co
CO
CJ)
a...
UJ
..
t'\. v
co
(L
LU
CO
co
t::co
eo co
A A

88FK05 , B8FK05
<: '.'.'0 , ":,',.: '::'." "
.... ' ..
)

( :.:':..... ::::.:::, '., 'c": ::,., :::"." :::.:::.:

Remote bus c=
The operating mode settings on all 891L05 station-bus p.c.b.s of the redunda lt station and on the 891L06 connection p.c.b.
need to be observed (see chapter "Control and operating modes").

11

..
~···~···~···~···~····~···""'·.··.=·.·.·.WO·.·.·.·=.·.·.====<~ ..=...=...=... ••••~
= •••=.. ~"'=""~"'="'~"'~""~"'~"'~"'~""~"'=.'.'
•• =.=. =,.~=== ....=...=...=... ........ ,...-.'.......... ... ...=... =... ....=...=..
~ ~~ ~ _~ _ _ _ _ _~==.~~~
88TR01/R1210

Mechanical design Contact assignments of connector X21

Board size: 6 units, 1 divisions, 160 mm deep View of the contact ~;ide:

Connector: to DIN 41612

1 x for station-bus connection b z
48-pole, edge connector type F
(connector X11) 02 ET2 AT2 I

1 x for partner interfaces and 04 ET1 AT1

connecting operating mode signals, 06 ESR ASR
32-pole, edge connector type F I
(connector X21) I
08 EZP AZP
Weight: approx. 0.55 kg
10 EAR AAR
12 EPS ASP
View of connector side:
, 14 EPP APP
16 EPR APR
18 EPSO AEPO
20 EPS1 AEP1
X 22 EPS2 AEP2
11
I 24 EPS3 AEP3
26 PSSO AEP4
ii 28 PSS1 I AEP5
30 PSS2 AEP6
32 PSS3 AEP7

X
21

12
 88TR01 /R121 0

Side view and view of module front

r:::P
ASB
@ @ ST Disturbance
ST SG SG Module disturbance

@ @ DF Discrepancy

X11 DF SR SR [Hsturbance
Fledundancy

@ @ BE FlEADY
BE AK AK ti.CTIVE

X21

ABB
88TR01
0

[}] EPROM programmed, order number: GJR2391141 Pxxxx

xxxx = Position number indicating the applicable program version

13
 88TR01/R1210

Technical data

In addition to the system data, the following values apply

Power supply

Operating voltage, module USA/USB = 24 V

Power consumption IS = 150 mA
Power dissipation PV = 3.6 W
Reference potential, partner interface Z = OV
Reference potential, bus side ZD = OV

Signal level

Signal exchange on the partner interface among the two

redundancy control modules and for the operating mode
signal takes place on 24 V levels:
Inputs: 0 signal o ... 3 V
1 signal 11.2 ... 30 V

Outputs: 0 signal o ... 1 V

1 signal 13.7 ... 30 V
Exceptions:
AZP signal allocated inside the module to reference potential
on the process side
EPS signal 5 V signal with resis':or against 5 V

Swltchover times

Activating the PASSIVE redundancy 70 ... 250 msec

(from detecting a fault by the 88TR01 e.g.
through the SSG line in the redundancy
ACTIVE up to now until setting the SRA line
in the redundancy PASSIVE up to now)
Intermediate setting, both redundancies PASSIVE max. 5 msec

Noise Immunity of inputs and outputs

ESD to IEC 801/2 8 kV against front panel

EMV to IEC 801/4 1 kV burst
Destruction acc. to IEC 801/5 1 kV against referen:::e potential

ORDERING DATA

Order No. for entire module:

Type designation: 88TR01/R1210 Order number: GJR:~3911 OOR 121 0

Technical data subject to change without notice!

14

.. =... ... ... ... ... ...=.. =

.~~= ~~~~~ ... =...=...=...=...=...=...=.. =... =...=...=...=...=...=...=.. =...=...=...=...=...=...=...=.. =... =...=... .. =
~~~~~~ ... =...=...=...~ = =
..................... ... ... =...=...=...=...~...=.. =
... =
... =...=.~~~--~---
 88TR01/R1210

ABB Krafiwerksleittechnik GmbH

PO. Box 100351, D-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 '2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462411 107 ab d

Printed in Germany (KWLJE24 0895 0,2 BID)

..=
,= ...=
...=...=...", =
...=
...=... ...=
...=
..."""..=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...•••
c~ =...=...=.. .. ..............=...=...=...=...=...=...
~~====~<==~_ ~~_~~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 Module and PRO~:ONTROL p
.....
~ .. Application Description TransfE~r

Station Bus Coupling Module

coupling the PROCONTROl
station to the remote bus
in redu ndant applications
Publication No.
D KWl 6334 94 E, Edition 05/95
Replacing D KWl 633494 E, Edition 07/94 88TI<:05 - E/R 1220

Application Design of the module

This module is used for redundant applications in stations of The module comprises the following functions:
the PROCONTROl system. - remote bus coupling
Used in conjunction with remote bus coupling module - control of the station protocol
88FT05, this module couples the PROCONTROl station to - setting the module, station and system addresses
..... ..-~ the remote bus .
- RS485 interface
Moreover, the module controls all operations which are - module data interface
required for data exchange inside the PROCONTROl station
in redundant applications. - monitoring interface
- diagnos,s and annunciation functions

Remote bus coupling

Transmitting data from the station

Two main operating modes are available for transmittal data

Features
The module is equipped with
•••• "'."?:"'o •••
- one standard interface (55) with the station bus
- one RS485 interface with the remote bus coupling module
88FT05
- one module data interface with the remote bus coupling
module 88FT05
- one isolated monitoring interface
- one input to operate the transmitter high-level stages in
the remote bus coupling module 88FT05.
The module is always used in the single-channel mode and
occupies the module addresses 60 and 62 (see chapter
"Setting the station, system and module addresses").
The module can be plugged into any slot of the PROCON-
TROl cabinet. In the standard cabinets, however, slots are
reserved for the module.
communication which are controlled by the master station:
- cyclic mode
- event mode.
In cyclic mode, the master station (MS) polls the stations one
by one. 88TK05 evaluates this call to transmit data telegrams
and forwar::ls it to the station.
In event mode, the 88TK05 signals the presence of events in
the station by activating the noise channel. Then the MS
identifies ttle requesting station and genel~ates an event call
which is evaluated by 88TK05 and forwarcled to the station.
88TK05 transmits the cyclic or event telegrams, provided by
the station modules after polling, via the l38FT05 module to
the remote bus.
All telegrams are checked for formal correctness and correct
contents. If an error is detected, the telegram will be retained
and 88TK05 will transmit a diagnosis telegram instead.
In case the master station does not receive~ a telegram which
has been lransmitted or receives it incorrectly, the 88TK05
will buffer E!ach block of telegrams transmitted by the station
until the next call so that it can be repeated if required .

•_:.O;O;Z:O;-'.
88TK05/R1220
Transmitting data to the station
The module receives all telegrams which are transmitted to
the PROCONTROl remote bus and checks them for formal
correctness and correct contents.
Send-location-addressed and destination-addressed tele-
grams are distinguished. Send-location-addressed tele-
grams are checked for formal correctness and if they are
valid they will be transmitted to the station.
Destination-addressed telegrams are checked for formal
correctness and correct contents and will be transmitted to
the station only if the system and station addresses match.
Formal correctness is checked by means of test marks with
which the contents of the telegram (operation code,
addresses, data) is protected (hamming distance: 6).
Special destination-oriented telegrams can be transmitted
via the PROCONTROl bus system which are destined exclu-
sively for the station bus coupling module. These are mainly
telegrams to control the remote bus coupling module
88FT05. These telegrams are identified by comparing the
addresses (station, system, module), but are not forwarded
to the station bus.
If an error is detected in those telegrams destined for the
station, the module will not input these telegrams into the
station. Instead the module outputs a signal via the noise
channel to make the master station retransmit the incorrect
telegrams.
Control of the station protocol
Station bus communication
Data communication with the station follows a defined proto-
col, which is controlled by 88TK05.
All PROCONTROl station modules follow this protocol, i.e.
no module of the station may partiCipate actively in data
communication without permission by the protocol.
Protocol control comprises the following functions:
- Identifying those modules requesting the permit to trans-
mit data telegrams to the station bus,
- Granting one module of the station at a time the permit to
transmit data telegrams to the station bus,
- Enabling or inhibiting a transmitted or received data tele-
grams on checking its contents and formal validity,
- Controlling cyclic opemtion in the station:
In the cyclic mode all the modules of a station are per-
mitted to transmit their cyclic data one by one starting with
the highest module address. The permit remains valid until
all data have been transmitted.
- Controlling the event mode in the station:
In the event mode each module of the station which has
output an event signal is permitted to transmit a data tele-
gram. Transmission begins with the highest module
address.
Then, in descending order, all other modules with events
are permitted to transmit a data telegram. This process is
repeated until all event messages have been transmitted
(rotating priority).
2
- Controlling the list mode in a station:
List transmission iH used to transmit big volumes of data.
Depending on the type of list transmission (writing/read-
ing) either the list master or the list slave is granted the
permit to transmit 3. telegram block of list data. List trans-
mission is perform<3d in the cyclic mode.
- Event mode:
When the station is receiving a data telegram from the
remote bus, both tile cyclic and the event modes are inter-
rupted in the staticn and the station bus coupling module
is granted access to the bus to transmit a receive tele-
gram.
- Autonomous modE':
The autonomous mode will be selected automatically if the
station is not connl3cted to the remote bus or no telegram
has been received over the remote bus for more than
100 ms. The autonomous mode is terminated by the first
telegram received 'from the remote bus.
In the autonomous mode the station bus coupling module
generates all calls required thereby taking over the control
function of the ma~;ter station within the station.
- Telegram monitoring:
Each telegram contains a number of test marks (hamming
distance= 6) by means of which the contents of the tele-
gram (operation code, addresses, data) are protected. The
station bus coupling module listens in on all telegrams
transmitted over the station bus and checks the telegrams
for errors by means of these test marks. In case of error
the telegram will be inhibited. If no error is detected, the
module outputs an enable signal. A telegram may be
transmitted from the station to the PROCONTROl l::luS sys-
tem or the output and processing modules of the station
may resume processing of this telegram only if the enable
signal is available.
These processes ensure that only one module at a time out-
puts data to the serial station bus and that data exchange
within the station and to the remote bus is undisturbed.
Redundancy capabilities
As a station bus coupling module for redundant stations, the
88TK05-E/R1220 has the following capabilities:
- The module forms and transmits the station address in
relation to the status of the SRA line after power-on, plug-
ging in of the module, and during operation (see chapter
"Address transmission").
- When the status 01 the SRA line changes as a result of a
redundancy switch over, the current telegram protocol is
terminated. After a waiting period of 8 ms, during which no
telegrams are received or transmitted, the station is again
ready to receive and send under its new address (ACTIVE!
PASSIVE).
- The module detects changes in the module arrangement
whenever modules in the station are removed or installed
and generates an appropriate diagnosis messa';:Je (see
chapter "Diagnostic and annunciation functions").
 88TK05/R 1220

Address transmission RS485 interface

The system and station addresses of a PROCONTROL In this interface the signals to be transmitted to the remote
station are set on the 88TK05 module. bus coupling module 88FT05 are conditioned and adapted.

88TK05-E/R1220 detects the current status of the station All signals of this interface are transmitted with their true and
(ACTIVE or PASSIVE) from the status of the SRA line. inverted va.lues.

If the status is active, the address set on the station address This RS48!i interface handles the followin~~ signals:
switch is used as the station address.
SE1 +, SE1- controlling the telegram transmitter and trans-
If the status is passive, an offset of 128 is added to the mitter monitoring remote bus channel A ON
address set. SE2+, SE2- controlling the telegram transmitter and trans-
The 88TK05 transmits this address information in a special . mitter monitoring remote bus channel B ON
telegram to the station bus whenever the station is initialized RE+, RE-- noise transmitter ON
and once per system cycle. This ensures that all modules of DA+, DA-- telegram data
a PROCONTROL station are assigned the same station and RA+, RA-- telegram frame
system addresses. TA+, TA-· telegram clock pulse
SP+, SP-- checkback signal of the transmission level of
the active remote bus channel
RP+, RP-- checkback signal of the noise level of the
••••~;>;"••••

active remote bus channel

FS+, FS-· annunciation remote bus coupling disturbed
Setting the station, system and module as general disturbance annunciation of 88FT05
addresses and the operating mode to the RS485 interface
ESP+, ESP - disconnect signals for the 24 V supply of the
The station and system addresses as well as the module high-level stages of the telegram and noise
address 60 are set on the 88TK05-E/R1220 module with two transmitters
switches (S1 and S2). Module address 62 is set automati- ANB+,ANE:- annunciation active remote bus channel
cally. (channel A = 1, channel B == 0)
SGD, SGD reference conductor interface RS485
The station address must be within the range from 1 to 121. US, US +24 V for 88FT05
Z, Z reference conductor for +24 V
Switch S1 sets the station address (STA).

Switch S1:
Module (lata interface
Assignment S1 STA
Contacts S1 The data icentifying the module is transmitted to the remote
bus coupling module 88FT05 via this inten:ace.
Significance 2 J4 8 i 16 1 32 1 64 1 128 1

IExample
STA65 ION I - i- I- I- I - I- I - I - I
The contact S1/8 must be set to ON.

Switch S2 sets the module addresses (GA) 60 of the module,

and the system addresses (SYS) 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Switch S2:

Assignment S2 GA not assigned I SYS

Contacts S2 1 2 I 3 I 4 1 5 I6 , 7 I
8
Significance I 1 1 1 i 1 I 2

IExample
SYS01
- -I -
\ I - I - I - I- I
The contact for setting the module address shall be set to
.... •...
~
'ON' (GA 60). The contacts which are not assigned shall be
set to 'NOT ON'.
Incorrect setting of the switches S1 or S2 results in the failure
of the module functions.

3
88TKOS/R1220
Monitoring interface
The module is equipped with three isolated signal inputs
G12, G22 and G32 to which external disturbance annuncia-
tion signals can be connected. The monitoring module
89NU01 can be connected to the binary signal output MST.
Input G12 uses the closed-circuit principle to monitor the
cabinet supply. Thereby it is possible to detect whether the
power supply of the modules has failed in the station. If
88TKOS is used without 89NU01 the input shall be connected
externally. This requires the contacts b08/d08 and d06/z06 of
connector X21 to be connected (assignment see function
diagram).
Input G22 uses the open-circuit principle and is intended to
monitor the temperature in the cabinet.
Input G32 uses the open-circuit prinCiple. This input may be
used to monitor the door if one is mounted.
These three signals are provided by the monitoring module
89NU01 (see Fig. 1).
If these disturbance annunciations are present this fact will
be input in the diagnosis register. If provided, a cabinet dis-
turbance lamp can be activated via output MST and module
89NU01.
4
Diagnostic and annunciation functions
Disturbance annunciation signals to the annunciation
system
The annunciation system and/or the control diagnosis sys-
tem (CDS) receives ':he disturbance annunciation signals of
the module via the PROCONTROl bus.
They also include all disturbances which are detect€!d by the
transmission monitor on the remote bus coupling module
88FTOS and the "general disturbance annunciation - station
detected" generated from the signals of the modules.
The 88TKOS transmits its disturbance annunciations and
diagnosis results to 2 diagnosis registers using register
address 246.
Six additional background diagnosis registers with register
addresses 22S, 227, :228, 230,232 and 237 are used for error
localization. They are only transmitted on request under
module address 60.
The contents of either diagnosis register with register
address 246 is transmitted to the remote bus at the begin-
ning of each cyclic call of the processing station.
Sequence:
- Diagnosis register for module address 60
- Diagnosis register for module address 62
In the event mode, each time the station is called the first
time, merely the diagnosis register for module address 60 is
the first data telegram to be transmitted to the remote bus.
The following types Clf disturbance are recorded:
1. Internal disturbances of the module
2. Disturbance in data communication on the station and the
remote bus
3. Disturbance annunciations of other modules of the station
(as "general disturlJance annunciation - station d€!tected")
4. Disturbance annunciations from the remote bus coupling
module 88FTOS
S. Disturbance annunciations from the monitoring interface
All types of disturbarce (1 ... 5) lead to the activation of the
binary signal output MST. '~'.
The types of disturbances (1 ... 4) are indicated on the front
panel of the module (see chapter "Disturbance annunciations
on the module").
As an option, disturbance type S is indicated by means of
89NU01 by activation of the cabinet disturbance lamp.
The contents of the c iagnosis registers, the annunciations of
the general disturbance line, the annunciations on the CDS
and the indications ST and SG are shown in the Figs. 1 ... S.

Disturbance annunciations on the module
The following disturbances are indicated on the front panel of
the module by red LEOs:
Designation of the LED
- Disturbance general
types of disturbance 1 ... 4
- Disturbance module 88TK05
type of disturbance 1
- Disturbance transmission path 88TK05/88FT05 SG 1
type of disturbance 4
- Acknowledgement error
type of disturbance 2 (remote bus only)
The LED ST indicates all the disturbances of the module and
of the data communication with the module. When three
cycles of the master station have been performed without
disturbance, the red LED ST is switched off. Moreover, ST is
activated for about 3 s when the module is being initialized or
when 88TK05 has disconnected a disturbed module from the
station bus.
The LED SG indicates module disturbances only. Moreover
SG is activated for about 3 s when the module is being initial-
ized.
The LED SG1 indicates disturbances of the transmission path
on the data channel and the noise channel.
The LED QF indicates telegrams received incorrectly from
the remote bus. For this purpose, the error pulse is pro-
longed to approx. 100 ms.
.-.~...
Status signals on the module
The following operating states are indicated by green LEDs
on the front panel:
Designation of the LED
- Telegram transmit to remote bus
- Telegram receive from remote bus
- Station bus communication
- Station bus modules with events
The LED FS will be activated if telegrams of 88TK05 or tele-
grams from the station bus are transmitted to the remote
bus.
The LED FE will be activated if telegrams are transmitted
from the remote bus to the station bus.
The LED SV will be activated if telegrams are transmitted
•.;.-:--;-;>•.••
from the station bus to the remote bus.
The LED ER is switched on from the moment when events
are detected until the event telegrams are transmitted.
............................... ... .. ..
88TK05/R1220
Reception monitoring on 88TK05 and 8BFT05
Reception monitoring on 88FT05 monitors the received tele-
grams for character distortion.
If the recel=tion monitor responds the transmission of frames,
data and the clock pulse (RA, DA, TAJ from 88FT05 to
ST 88TK05 via the RS485 interface will be interrupted until the
next, valid SYN character is received.
SG
As a result, the abortion detector of the reception monitor of
88TK05 responds. 88TK05 Signals the disturbance by means
of the input "remote bus acknowledgement error" (bit 8) in its
diagnosis register (GA60) and the LED QF on the front panel
QF of the module is activated.
Transmltte r monitoring on 88TK05 and e:SFT05
The station bus coupling module 88TK05 which controls the
telegram and noise transmitters of 88FT05 monitors the tele-
gram transmitters on the active remote bus channel for the
absence of the transmission level and excessive transmission
telegrams i.e. the telegram frame is longer than 63 IlS, and
also monitors the noise transmitters on the active remote bus
channel for the absence of the noise level.
Transmitter monitoring on 88FT05 monitors the telegram
transmitter of the active remote bus channel for an excessive
telegram "transmit", i.e. transmission of more than 64 tele-
grams without interruption by the reception of a complete
telegram, and the noise transmitter of the active remote bus
channel for an excessive noise signal, i.e. the noise transmit-
ters are switched on for more than 10 ms incessantly.
In case of excessive transmission telegrams, an excessive
telegram"transmit" or and excessive noise signal, the drivers
of the disturbed telegram transmitter on 88FT05 are switched
off by the signals SE1 or SE2 until the end of the cycle.
The drivers will be switched on again by 88TK05 with the
signals SE1 or SE2 when the telegram "start cycle VS" has
been received .
If transmis5ion monitoring of the tele~lram transmitters
responds, three times in succession, the drivers of the dis-
turbed tele~lram transmitter remain switched off.
Each of the above-mentioned disturbances is signalled by
the entry "transmission path fault" (bit 9) in the diagnosis
register (GP.60) of 88TK05.
FS
FE
SV Monitoring of module arrangement in thl~ PROCONTROL
ER station
In order to ensure fast detection of changes in the station's
module arrangement due to the removal or insertion of mod-
ules, the 88rK05 polls the modules at time intervals < 3 ms
over the station's internal parallel bus. The current arrange-
ment deterrnined in this way is compared to the previous
arrangement. If the same changes are consistently detected
in three polling cycles, the diagnosis message "Module
arrangement changed" is generated in the diagnosis register
of module address 62 (see Fig. 2). This message is trans-
ferred to the PROCONTROL system and is cancelled again
> 1 s after the disturbance has occurred.
~~~~-
 ~..
O'l CJ)
CJ)
88FT05 Transmit monitoring -I
Transmit monitoring

f-J ~
.- .--
CJ) Excessively long - Excessively long send telegram -
CJ)
-I telegram 'il
.....
;;>\
0 Excessively long -. ~1
FS
Transmission level missing --j ~1 88TK05 - E/R 1220 ~
CJl o
noise signal
Cl.
~.

CO
:J
Voltage
monitoring L _ __
Noise level missing -U
0
en
(ii'
Reception r-- I I
3(1) monitoring Diagnosis register 246
en using module address 60 CDS

JII I
en Character distortion Receive
III messages 1)

::::~,;:O':Pt;oo RA I~
co monitoring
(1) Bit ypE r--
en
:E 15 0
~ 14 o
3
0 Data ---t>- DA I I I Abortion 13 o
Cl. detector 12 0 Module restart executed ----- 4404 - - - - - - 1
c TA
<D Clock pulse ~ 11 0 Noise channel test, event
III 10 S Group malfunction station detected - - - 4405
Cl.

~l
Cl. 9 S Transmit path fault 3401 •

II
CD - - - - - - - - - - - - -, Telewam 8 0 Remote bus acknowledgement error
en
en
O'l
Optional t-- - MSI a~ortlon 7 ~ Transmit allocation in AS missing - - . - 4406
0 I Telegram 6 S Checksum error detected 4407 --+-+---1
I 89NU01 I invalid 5 0 ~1
----------t- - - .Q32 4 S Cabinet door open - - - - 4401
II MST I G12
G22
---
3 S Power supply fault - - - - - - - + - 4402
I - - 2 S Temperature monitoring responded 4403
I
I MTK
+ 1 0
0 0
Substitute telegram transmitted
AS restart executed - - - - - - + - - ::~~-t-rj
I MSP Bus coupling module not accessible from bus

lE
r--- r-
I Restart by resetting
I Watchdog responded - - - - - - - - - - - - i

I
MTE
I ~1 I - -

~
Power ON - - -
I Voltage monitoring responded ----1 SG
I
0-
SST
'--- ~1
I MST = Disturb. signal from station
I MTK = Door open
I MSP = Power supply fault I
Bus coupling module not operating
Incorrect firmware PROM ~1
~
SG1 ~1 ~ . [>SSG
I MTE = Temperature inside the cabinet I Hardware defect -----
L __ too hig~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -.J L--

S = Static annunciations disappear automatically 1) The control diagnosis system provides a description for every
upon deactivation message number.
This description includes:
o = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after the
contents of the diagnosis register has been transmitted - Information about cause and effect of the disturbance
- Recommendations for elimination
o = not used
Thus, fast elimination of the disturbance is ensured_
 88TK05/R1220

Module operatinQ
Diagnosis register 246
using module address 62
CDS
Bit Type messages
15 S Module address code (A = 0 = 60)
14 S f-- Signal simulated - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4430
13 0 ' - Protocol error AS detected CD 4412
12 0
11 0 I
10 0
9 0 Module restart executed 4415
8 S ' Module from AS bus disconnected CD i 4416
I
7 S Operating mode setting wrong ® 4423
I
6 S , Checksum error detected ® , 4419
!
5 S r-- Station module arrangement changed 4425
4 0: Telegram error in AS detected CD 4417
3 0' Cycle abortion detected CD 4428
2 0 Protocol error remote bus detected 4427
1 0 Response from module missing <j) 4418
o i 0 I
I ..--
L-
I -
I
i I
I

8T
0)
I
ModulSl nQt gQQSl~§!iQISl frQm bu§! I 88T
;;:1
Watchdog responded
Power ON
Voltage mon itoring responded

Module not operatinQ

Wrongfirmware PROM
Hardware d efect
L--

®
8G 88 G
...----
~
;;:1
'--
@
~
~1
® ;;:1
L--

;;:1

S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation

o = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after the contents of the diagnosis register has been transmitted
o = Not used
CD = For cause and associated module address see background diagnosis registers in Figs. 3 to 5
® = For cause see background diagnosis registers in Figs. 3 to 5
@ = Also triggers the output of the CDS message" AS restart executed" 4410
® = Also triggers the output of the CDS message "Response from AS missing" - - - 4204
® = Cause of fault on another module; only SSG lamp of disturbed module ON
® = No redundancy changeover since a fault correcting function is activated on this module

.E&....2;. 88TK05 diagnosis messages using module address 62

........................................... . . =
,~ .. =~~.= ...=... =....=...=...=... =....=.. ,.=
...=... =....=...=...=........ •.
~., ~.~=,~~.~--~~ ... .........
~ ~.-~~ .... ...
~.~~~.~.=~.-.~-.~~-
88TK05/R1220

Background
diagnosis register 225 Cause of "Response from module missing" (62/246/1)

Bit Type
15 0
14 0
13 0
12 0
11 0 I
10 0
9 0
8 o i
7 Di
6 D
I
5 D I
I 4 D ,- Module address (decimal) of last grant
3 D
2 D i-
1 D -
I 0 DI-

i
Background I
I
diagnosis register 227 Cause of "Cycle abortion detected" (62/246/3)

Bit Type
15 D I--
14 I D -
13 0 I--
12 0 I-- Counter reading for number of cycle abortions
11 D I--
10 D I--
9 D -
8 D I--
i 7 D t--
6 D
5 D I

4 D Modul address (decimal) of module

D_f-
_3':-t-:::- which fails to respond after having received a grant twice
I 2 D
1 D
o D

S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after the contents of the diagnosis register has been transmitted
o = Not used

~ Background diagnosis registers 225 and 227.

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• m ••~
•••~
•• ~->=~~= =.. =
...=...=...=...=...
.. = ... =... ... ...=..
~~ ".~.~= ................-.=
... ... ...=..
~~ ~.~-----
 El8TK05/R 1220

Background
diagnosis register 228 Cause of "Telegram error in AS detected" (62/:!46/4)

Counter reading for number of telegram errors

Module address (decimal) of last grant

Background
diagnosis register 231 Cause of "Operating mode setting wrong" (6:~/246/7)

Bit Type
15 0
I 14 0
13 0
12 0
11 0
10 0
9 0
I
8 0
7 0
6 0
... ..-;..........
5 0
I 4 . D ,- No cyclic call 1.8

I~
3'O
2 0
1 ' 0
oI 0 i

S == Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after the contents of the diagnosis register has been transmitted
o = Not used

.-:'~"

Fig. 4: Background diagnosis registers 228 and 231.

.............................................................
.................... ~~~--~,,~~-~~- ............................~
... =
....~
...~~
88TK05/R 1220

Background
diagnosis register 232 Cause of "Module from the AS bus disconnected" (E2/246/8)

Bit Type
15 0
14 0
13 I 0
12 i 0 !
11 0
10 0
9 0 I
,
8 0 I
,
7 D ~

I 6 D -
5 D f--
4 D -
Module address (decimal) of the module disconnected
3 D f--
2 D r-
1 D f--
a D f--

Background
diagnosis register 237 Cause of "Protocol error AS detected" (62/246/13)

Bit Type
15 0
14 a
13 0
12 0
11 o i
10 0
9 D - Telegram contents not plausible
8 I D I- Protocol violation
7 D -
6 D -
5 D -
4 D -
Module address (decimal) of last grant
3 D f--
2 D r-
1 D f-
0 D r-

S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after the contents of the diagnosis registm has been transmitted
o = Not used

.-:,,",0"",.

~ Background diagnosis registers 232 and 237.

10

-~--' ................................... .
 88TK05/R1220

.... ~ ..

Function diagram Connector X 11 includes the standard interface for the station
bus.
Terminal designations Connector )(21 includes the RS485 interface, the module
The p.c.b. is equipped with the connectors X1, X11 and X21. data interface for remote bus coupling module 88FT05, the
Connector X1 includes the interface for the dual-channel power supply US for 88FT05 and the interface to the monitor-
station bus coupling. ing and flasher module 89NU01.

~~:~::1~~=_-_-_-_-_-_--:-1
.Esp
+24V
d02
.----
-------- -------- ---- - ---0-1
1~1 '" _ C\J I
RA+ b10 gj,~ r---~ a: ~
RA- b12 .s"'00
L1. '"
c:
1'6' W a:
OA+ b14 S 00 0 '-1V\ ill
OA- b16 %~ g I '6' [2 I
TA+ b18 L!'l :: 5. .2 ~ LO
TA- b20:= .;j .~ g "<Y ~ ~
ANB+
ANB-
b22
b24
L1.
~
E 15
~ E
21
'0 H9w !:;;
""'"
SP+ b26 E ~ ~ ~.~
SP- b28 Q) ~'O0 __:::>
a. §!>H9
§
'"
L1.

L1.
co
SE2+ • b30 0 E
'" OJ
8 ;;1
~
0 I

~ 4'31~~D
't:
SE2- b32 Q) c: 3 _' ' ~ ~ (!)(/)..-
FS+ z10 £ '5.. ~ "61
FS- z12 ~ 8 15 ~ i_JO.. (!)(/)
ESP+ z14 (/) '" ~ '" i'<Y
ESP- I z16 a:..5 a: 0 ~ I-(/) 10 1 GNO
RE+ z18 -E "61 ~ 06 GNO
RE- z20 E - ~ g' 03 GNO
SGO z22 ~ '5 = 14 GSAI
1 ~ r-~1~2-+~E=T~--
SGO z24
gj8
RP+ 1z26 '0 '" 11 SOl
RP- z28 ~ :::>
,E.o 09 I KGAKTN
SE1 + z30 Q) c 07 GASO
SE1- z32 ~~ 05 ST
Q) '" 04 SOO
'--- E 02 KONFIG
1~1 I

~~T.!~~~~g~:lt-________-+____________________________________.____________~__~_5J~c-. I::~N ~
US z08
01
/ ',.
I .l<I. d30 USB
I ~ 1 .... 1 d32 USA
Z b02 IW b32 Z
Z b041 z32 Z
Z b06 b02 ZO
Z b08 b14 ZO
r-- , d26' ZO
OJ
c:
'-- ~ ~ f--..-- 00 1--..-- 00
~1 (/) (/) 1--..-- "- f--..-- "-
f----
ZM
ZM I
d16
d12
r..-- co 1--..-- co
f--..-- It) 1--..-- L!'l
ZM d08
f--..-- '<t f--..-- '<t
UM d18 I-- f--___ (')
f--.....- (')
G32 d14 f--___ C\I
G22 d10 f-- _ _ 1--..-- C\I
G12 I d06 f--. ..- f--. ..-
..
N
MST d04 (/) w

....
~ •...

11
88TK05/R 1220

Block diagram 'Connection of stations'

Station bus coupling

Remote bus A Remote bus B

in- , - . , ou- In- out-
comi ng
- I -
I gOin=
coming
- I - I going

88FK05/R0100 89MS02/R0200 88FK05/R0100

I
Remote-bus branch line

- - - - +-- - -+- - - - - - - r-- --- -

,
+-----
II, 88FT05/R1200

I,
88FT05/R1200

RS485 ! RS485
I,
I, I
II, 88TK05/R1220
I, 881'K05/R1220

I, . I
II Station bus
. I, Station bus
,
! I,
I Redundant 88TR01/ 88TR01/ Redunda nt

I
I, modules R1210 R1210 modules
J
I
I
'I Station n
Redundancy A iI Station n + 128
Redundancy B I

b=--------:.---..:---_----:=d

.--.~ ..

12
 88TK05/R1220

._:;o;?'"•...

Mechanical design Contact assignments of connector X21

View of contact side:
Board size: 6 units, 1 division, 160 mm deep
Connector: X11, X21 acc. to DIN 41612 d b z
2 x 48-pole. edge connector type F 02 ESP Z US
X1 acc. to MIL-C-24308 04 MST Z US
1 x 15-pole. female connector type HDP 20 06 G12 Z US
i
Weight: approx. 0.5 kg 08 ZM Z US
10 G22 RA+ FS+
View of connector side: 12 ZM RA- I FS-
14 G32 DA+ I ESP+
I
16 ZM DA- I ESP-
18 i UM TA+ RE+
X
11 20 TA- RE-
22 ANB+ I SGD+
Ii i
I
24 I ANB- I SGD- I
26 SP+ RP+
I I
28 I SP- RP- I
30 ICC SE2+ SE1+
32 ICD I SE2- SE1-

X
21
Contact assignments of connector X1
View of contact side:

I
!
01 PAKTN
02 KONFIG

i
03 GND
I
04 SDO
05 ST
06 GND
07 GSAO
08
09 KGAKTN
10 GND
11 SDI
12 ET
13 GND
14 I GSAI
15

13

'~~""="""""""""""""""""".'.'.' •••
88TK05/R 1220

Side view and view of the front panel of the module

1":1°
IO,N
. 8
I S1 ASS
[II 0 0 ST Disturbance
ST SG SG Module disturbance
W 0 0 OF AcknowledgemE,nt error
OF SG1 SG1Dlsturbance tra~lsmlsslon
W path 88TK05/88FT05
X11
lIJ
[§J
J
W
0 0 FE Remote bus "Receive"
IO,N 8
'-'-------''-'
Is2 FE SV SV Station bus communi·
cation
0 0
FS ER FS Remote bus "Send"
ER Event

70
00
00

X1
0
X21 00
00
~
X1

m [ill ~ lIQ] [ill 1m

ASS
88TK05

Memory modules: Order number: Note on single PRQr...~

(EPROM programmed)
The order number fOI" the complete module includes the en-
[j] = A101 GJR2393253Pxxxx tire set of memory modules required for the basic program.
W = A102 GJR2393254Pxxxx
W = A103 GJR2393255Pxxxx ~
lIJ = A104 GJR2393256Pxxxx The number includes the position of the components on the
[§J = A105 GJR2393257Pxxxx p.c.b.
W = A106 GJR2393258Pxxxx xxxx = Position number indicating the applicable program
m= A401 GJR2393259Pxxxx version.
[ill = A402 GJR2393260Pxxxx
~ = A403 GJR2393261Pxxxx
lIQ] = A404 GJR2393262Pxxxx
[j] = A405 GJ R2393263 Pxxxx
1m = A406 GJR2393264Pxxxx

14
 88TK05/R 1220

Technical data

The following values apply in addition to the system data:

Power supply (on the module)

Operating voltage 24 V +/ - :~5 %
Current consumption IS for approx. 166 mA
Power dissipation typo 4W

Monitoring interface

Input values
G12 - Disturbance power supply of cabinet Ie = 5 mA
The input uses the closed-circuit principle. Ue = 24 V
G22 - Thermostat responded Ie = 5mA
Ue = 24 V
G32 - Cabinet door open Ie = 5 mA
Ue = 24 V
UM - Annunciation voltage UM = 24 V

Output values
MST - General station disturbance la = 6 mA
Ua = 24 V

RS485 interface to the remote bus coupling module BBFTOS

RS485 standard
Transmission rate 1 MBaud
Termination resistor 100 Ohm
Passive differential signal voltage 400 mV
Max. length of connection between 88TK05/88FT05 1 m, cable B91K01
Input ESP Ie = 5 mA
Ue = 24 V

Noise Immunity (of station bus coupling)

in case of proper installation
••••?;";"••••

ESD acc. to IEC 801/2 B kV to front panel

EMC acc. to IEC 801/4 2 kV burst included in remote bus cable

ORDER DATA

Order No. of complete module:

Type designation: 88TK05-E/R1220 Order No: GJR2393200R1220

Technical data are subject to change without notice!

15

......................................................................................................................................................... ,..
~~~~=
88TK05/R1220

.~ .

.. ~ ...

alill
lilli_II'
ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH
PO. Box 100351, D-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462 411 107 ab d

Printed in Germany (KWLJE24 0995 0.3 BID)

 Module and PROC:ONTROL P
....
~ ...
Application Description Input, Output
Signal conditioning

Output Module
for Analog Signals
8fold, 0/4 to 20 rnA
Publication No.
o KWl 6329 94 E, Edition 10/94 81AA03-E/R1210

Application Signal input from the PROCONTROl bus

The output module is used to output analog signals in the
signal ranges 0 to 20 rnA or 4 to 20 mA.
The module contains 8 function units. It is thus possible to out-
put 8 different analog signals simultaneously.
Features
The module can be plugged into any PROCONTROl station.
It incorporates a standard interface to the PROCONTROl
station bus.
The signals to be outputted are received by the unit in the form
of telegrams from the PROCONTROl bus system via the
station bus. The telegrams are checked for error-free transfer
by means of the parity bits before being outputted.
Digital-to-analog conversion is performed with a 12-bit res-
olution.
The analog signal outputs are short-circuit-proof and pro-
tected against mutual interference. They have a common refer-
ence conductor. The analog inputs are isolated from the mod-
ule's internal voltage and from the PRO CONTROL bus.
Within the module, the signals are transferred to the outputs
via optocouplers.
The output signals can be simulated individually.
Whenever an internal monitoring circuit responds, this is indi-
cated on the module's front panel by an SG (module distur-
bance) and an ST (general disturbance) disturbance annun-
ciation.
All telegrams transmitted on the station bus are received by
the module via its standard interface. Transfer takes place seri-
ally. The processing section therefore performs a serial/parallel
conversion of the data.
The module is able to receive telegrams witll the following ad-
dress information:
- System address 0 ... 3
- Station address 1 ... 249
- Module address 0 ... 58
- Register address 0 ... 255
Based on its programming, the processing section determines
which telegrams are to be evaluated and assigns the analog
values to the appropriate memory location in the output regis-
ter (see "Data communication with the module").
Sink timE~ monitoring
The module is provided with a time monitoring feature which
supervises tile incoming telegrams for proper cyclic renewal. If
any of these telegrams is missing (e.g. due to failure of the
source module), the module responds as follows:
- It sets the disturbance bit of the received input value. This
results in the analog output being set on the AP03 function
block in accordance with the setting for disturbance bit eval-
uation.
- The "Sin~ monitor responding" bit is se1 in the diagnosis
register, and the ST fault lamp lights up .

.
~~= ... =......................... .
81AA03/R1210
Operating modes
Function blocks
The function blocks listed below are provided on the module
for outputting analog signals. The abbreviated type designa-
tion is given for each function block.
Function block Abbreviation
Text element including specification TXT1
of operating mode
Outputting through analog process outputs AP03
Selection of operating mode
When selecting the module's operating mode via the TXT1
function block, STR (binary control) is the only option per-
mitted.
Output ranges
The following output ranges may be configured with the AP03
function blocks (output function blocks for analog process out-
puts) for each function unit:
0... 100 % = 0 ... 20 mA (standard setting)
0... 100 % = 4 ... 20 mA
If the output signal exceeds the output range specified, the
current signal outputted will be increased accordingly until the
current limitation feature intervenes at approximately 23 mAo
Allocating the outputs of the function units
Anyone of the module's analog outputs can be allocated by
the user to the output of any AP03 function block.
2
Structuring the analog signal outputs
Structuring is performed by means of appropriate user specifi-
cations for the AP03 function blocks.
The AP03 function block permits:
- Signal expansion, i.e., linear mapping of an input value
range AS ... ES to the output value range 0 ... 10'0 %.
AS = Beginning cf the expansion range, i.e., the input
value which is mapped to the output value 0 %.
ES = End of the Hxpansion range, i.e., the input value
which is mapped to the output value 100 %.
- Setting of the output ranges 0 ... 20 mA or 4 ... 20 mAo
- Disturbance evaluation, if the disturbance bit of the received
input signal has been set.
The cycle time needed for processing the defined structure is
determined by the module and entered into the module regis-
ter 205.
Simulation of outPlJt signals
The output signals can be simulated individually via the PDDS
(EDS).
In the simulation mode, the processing section substitutes the
simulated values for the values received from the bus during
normal operation.
As soon as the simulation is stopped via the PDDS (I:DS), the
module again uses the values transmitted over the bus.
 81 AA03/R121 0

....
~ ...

Data communication with the module Diagnosis and annunciation functions

Signal allocation Disturbance annunciations on the modlJle

The addresses of all telegrams whose data are to be outputted Disturbances are indicated on the module's front-panel by
are programmed in the module. This enables the module to red lEDs:
determine (by comparing the addresses) which of the data
- Disturbc.nce ST
telegrams received have to be processed. The allocation ofthe
individual converted signals to the module outputs at which - Module disturbance SG
they are to be made available is also programmed. It is pos- The "ST" LED indicates all module disturbances, as well as
sible to allocate the same signal to several module outputs. disturbances occurring in data communication with the mod-
To enable the output module to be addressed individually (e.g. ule.
for simulating an output signal), it is given a unique address. The "SG" _ED indicates module disturbances.
The system and station addresses are identical for all modules
contained in the same PROCONTROl station. They are set Disturban,::e signals transferred to the annunciation sys-
collectively and automatically on the modules via the station tem
bus control module.
The alarm annunciation system and the control diagnosis sys-
The module address is set automatically when the module is tem (CDS) receive disturbance annunciation signals from the
plugged into the appropriate slot in the multi- purpose proces- output mo:lule via the bus.
sing station.
Diagnosis

The incorring telegrams, the generation of telegrams to be

transmitted and internal signal processinfl are monitored for
errors in the processing section of the module (self-diagno-
sis).
In the event of a disturbance, the type of disturbance is filed in
the diagnosis register and, at the same time, a disturbance an-
nunciation is sent to the PROCONTROl system.
When requested, the module transfers a telegram with the
data stored in the diagnosis register (register 246).
The contents ofthe diagnosis register, the annunciations trans-
mitted ovel' the general disturbance line, the annunciations on
the CDS, Clnd the ST annunciation are shown in Fig. 1.
The annunciation "Parameter fault" may appear in the diagno-
sis register for the following reasons:
- Limits of expansion range (inputs AS and ES of function
block AP03) not plausible.
The annunciation "Processing fault" may appear in the diagno-
sis register for the following reasons:
- No valid structure list.
- Disturbance of internal module voltages.
- Hardware disturbance on the module.
The annunciation "Process channel fault" may appear in the
diagnosis register for the following reasons:
- Disturbance of internal module voltages ..
- Hardware disturbance in the process section.

.......................................... ..
~~.~~
81 AA03/R121 0

Module operatinQ

Diagnosis
register 246
Bit Type CDS messages *)
15 S Pa rameter fault 6615
14 S c-- Process channel fault 6600
13 S i- Pr ocessing fault i 6601
12 S ~ Ch ecksum error detected 6602
11 0 i
f-1:"':90'---=~=-t ~
mer defective
odule restart executed
6604
6605
1--=-8_-,S=--r-- Bu s deactivation defective 6606
7 O!
6 o I
:----::~---+-.:::..~----1L Si nk monitoring responded I 6610
3
2
'--:=--'---'=-
0
S f- Event mode fault
I I
I
6612
1
o
0
0
II ! I

I I~=fl
,t-~
I ST
I I
MQdule nQt operating
Wrong firmware PRO M
...------
i I I ~ I ®
~.~
: ST
Hardware defect of p rocessing section
EEPROM not valid I >1 >f =:J
Processing initializat ion active
L-
I
MQdUle nQt accessib Ie frQm bu~ I
Module transmitter d isconnected
I
by bus control modu Ie
Module address not within 0-58 I
I
Hardware defect of b us interface
I I
' -

I i SG
r--

I
~---

®
• >1 I s SG
=:J

'---

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after the contents of the diagnosis reqister has been transmitted
S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation
o = Not used

Figure 1: Diagnosis messages of 81 AA03

*) The control diagnosis system (CDS) provides a description

for every message number. This description comprises:

- Information about cause and effect of the disturbance

- Recommendations for elimination.

Thus, fast disturbance elimination is ensured.

4
 ""\,j
:1 )

-t
...3~
<~----r----T""----"""---"'-------' Station bus " :::T
<t> "
C
--y :::J
-u 5" g.
0
ss _, OJ ~ O-
w- e. :::J

I
/I)
<t> 1/1
.0 0..
,,- 81AA03-E/R1210 c cD ill-
L-- -6- j
ac)" to
-.
'"
"0
.-+0 <t> III
0. :J
:E 1/1 3
;:;:
User User :::T
Shared Parallel/serial Operational
Processor
memory conversion functions
functions functions Interlace g:
EEPROM RAM <t>
0
0
:J
:::J
<t>
U
...
0
(f)

~
, , nJ
:J
0.

l__
I
___________________________________________ _J ,
~
~

000
+ "0 0 a
<t> :::J :::J
.., :::J :J
el.<t><t>
s' n n
I
<000
I Digital!
o
< -, :-'
xx
Multiplexer analog- ;::::;~I\)
nJ -'
converter <0
00
<t> a a
:::J :J
c(f) ........
en.... e?_:::J:Je?
.v(f)(f)

§:::T~

l~" ~LS
o.<t>"O

"" " C(f)'"

engg
-OJ a-- <t>
(f)
:::J (f)
CJ 5·

~ ~ C"O
(f) C
our

~-~ili-f~-r-i~-#-ii:-_i-: t:+--
* To ensure proper functioning of the module, terminal Xii /d18 has to be connected to ZD (one connection per rack).
~.po I~N
r::' I~
o
:J :J
15 0.
Uo
-- C
a ....
:::J"O
nJ S.
nJ

:::J (f)
0.-
g:
~

~
w
--..
:n
-'

~
(]1
<t> o
81AA03/R1210

Mechanical design Contact assignments for process connector X21

Board size: 6 units, 1 division, 160 mm deep

Connector: to DIN 41612
1 x for station bus connection, View of contact side:
48-pole, edge connector, type F
(connector X11)
1 x for process connection,
32-pole, edge connector, type F
(connector X21)
Weight: approx. 0.55 kg b z
I
02 AA1
View of connector side: i
04 Z1
06 ! AA2
08 Z2
X 10
11 AA3
12 I
I Z3
14 AA4
16 Z4
i
18 AA5
! 20 Z5
22 I AA6
24 Z6
X 26 ! AA7
21
28 i Z7
30 AA8
32 Z8
I
! I

6
 81AA03/R1210

Side view and front panel

cP
ASS

[[;]ST SG
ST Disturbance
SG Module disturbance

X11

)(;21

ABS
81AA03
0

OJ EPROM programmed, Order number: GJR2394141Pxxxx

xxxx = Position number indicating applicable software version .

.
'~'.

.~-~ ............................... , ......... .

B1 AA03/R1210

Technical data

In addition to the system data, the following values apply:

Power supply

Module operating voltage, USA/USB 19.5 ... 30 V, typo 24 V

Current consumption with USA/USB = 24 V 160 mA + output current· 1.0
Current consumption with USA/USB = 30 V 140 mA + output current . O,B
Power dissipation with USA/USB = 24 V 3.9 W + output curr"mt . 24 V . 1.0
Power dissipation with USA/USB = 30 V 4.2 W + output curr·~nt . 30 V . O.B
Reference potential ZD, bus section OV
Reference potential Z1 ... Z8, process section OV
Potential isolation between process section and bus section 500 V

Output values

Output current (impressed current) 0/4 ... 20 mA

Max. load impedance :;; 500 Q
Outputs short-circuit and or:en-circuit-proof
Overrange current 23 mA max.

Accuracy

Accuracy, referenced to 100 %

on delivery :;; 0.1 %
due to effects of temperature, :;; 0.4 %
ageing, voltage range
Quantizing error :;; 0.02 %
Linearity error :;; 0,1 %
Response to temperature changes < 50 ppm/K (typ. 30 ppm/K)
Resolution, at 0 ... 20 mA 12 bits
at 4 ... 20 mA 12 bits

Processing time

For complete module :;; 95 ms incl. expansion

For the first function unit :;; 25 ms
For each further function unit, additionally :;; 10 ms

Initialization time

Upon connection of supply voltage or plugging in the module 1 ... 22 s

Noise immunity (of the process outputs)

ESD acc. to IEC B01/2 8 kV to front panel

EMC acc. to IEC 801/4 1 kV burst
Destruction acc. to IEC 801/5 (draft); IEC TC 65 (Sec) 137 1 kV to reference potential

ORDERING DATA

Order number for complete module:

Type designation: 81AA03-E/R1210 Order number: GJR:~394100R1210

Technical data are subject to change without notice!

8
81 AA03/R 1210

ABB Kraftwerksleitlechnik GmbH

P.O. Box 100351, 68128 Mannheim, Germany
Phone (0621) 381 3288, Telefax (0621) 381 8962
Telex 462411 107 ab d

Printed in Germany (KWUE69 0195 0.3 BID)

Module and
Application Description
Publication no.
o KWL 6314 92 E, edition 10/92
Application
This output module is used to activate electronic inputs, relays,
and lamps.
The module contains 16 function units. It is, therefore, suitable
to put out 16 different binary signals at the same time. The
outputs of the module can activate the following loads
- up to 50 standard loads PROCONTROL electronic input
- a lamp having a rated current of 100 mA at a rated voltage
of 24 V
- a relay having a 100 mA current consumption. For this pur-
pose, the quenching diode is already incorporated in the
module
- other loads up to a max. current consumption of 100 mA.
In the case of lamp actuation, lamp testing can be carried out
jointly for all 16 outputs using the bus.
PROC:ONTROL P
Input, Output,
Signal Conditioning
Output Module
for Bi nary Signals
16-fold, 24 V, 100 rnA
81 A8:03- E/R121 0
Features
The module can be plugged into any multi-purpose proces-
sing station of the PROCONTROL bus system. It incorporates
a standard interface to the PROCONTROL station bus.
The moduil~ receives the signals to be put (lut from the station
bus of the PROCONTROL bus system in the form of tele-
grams. Belore being issued, the telegrams are checked for
fault-free transfer by their parity bits.
The binary signal outputs are short-circuilt-proof and non-
interacting. They use a common reference conductor.
Inside the r10dule, the outputs are energized through an opto-
coupler to Hliminate interaction between bus side and process
side.
The output signals can be simulated individually.
An actuation of internal monitoring circuits or input signal mon-
itoring functions is indicated on the module front by an ST dis-
turbance annunciation (for general disturbance).
An actuation of internal monitoring circuits I:S additionally indi-
cated on the module front by an SG disturbance annunciation
(for module: disturbance).
ASEA BROWN BOVERI
81 AB03/R121 0
Signal input
Signal Input from the bus
Through its standard interface, the module receives all tele-
grams that are transferred on the station bus. Transfer takes
place serially; therefore, the processing section carries out a
serial/parallel conversion of the data.
The module is designed to receive telegrams containing the
following address data
- System address 0 ... 3
- Station address 1 ... 249
- Module address 0 ... 58
- Register address 0 ... 255
- Bit address 0 ... 15
These address data serve for unambiguous signal identifica-
tion by the sending module. Based on its programming, the
processing section knows which telegrams are to be evaluated
and which data bit is to be written into which memory location
of the output register (see "Data transfer").
Lamp testing
For lamp actuation from the module, the "Lamp testing" func-
tion may be required. For this reason, the module is provided
with the TL bus input for lamp testing which is programmed
like the other bus inputs. Whenever TL is being energized, all
of the 16 outputs are energized at the same time.
Signal output
The module passes a signal received on to an output only af-
ter it has established
- that transfer and reception of the data has been error-free
(using the parity bits in the telegram for identification),
- that the signal is assigned to one of the module's outputs
(by comparing the addresses).
In the case of digital data transfer, every bit of a 16-bit data
word is an independent single signal. It is possible that only
one or several bits of the entire data word are destined for a
particular output module. It is also possible, for example, for
the binary signal bit "8" of the data word to be aSSigned to
module output "13". The possible maximum of 16 data words
of a maximum of 16 different transferring modules are written
into 16 registers of the shared memory (see " Data communica-
tion"). With the aid of its bus address list and a marshalling list,
the microprocessor is able to allocate the various registers to
the module outputs.
The binary output incorporates a free-wheeling diode for acti-
vating inductive loads and an output diode for the simple gen-
eration of external OR functions.
2
Sink time monitoring
The module is provided with a time monitoring feature for su-
pervising the incoming telegrams for cyclical renewal. If any of
these telegrams is missing (e.g. failure of the source module),
the module respond~; in the following way:
- The correspondin~1 binary output(s) is (are) set to "0",
- The bit for "sink monitoring activated" is set in the diagnOSis
register, the light-I~mitting diode for disturbance annuncia-
tion ST is on and tile signal "Common station disturbance"
is put out.
Operating modHs
In addition to the normal signal output, the module also pro-
vides simulation functions.
Simulation of output signals
The output signals can be simulated individually. Thl3 TL bus
input for lamp testin~1 cannot be simulated.
The processing section blocks the real signal value and trans-
fers the value to be ~;imulated to the output register instead.
Further signal output proceeds as described above.
Data communication with the module
Signal allocation
Inside the module, the addresses are programmed for those
telegrams whose data are to be put out. This way, the module
knows (by comparinq the addresses) which of the clata tele-
grams received have to be processed. The module outputs, at
which the various converted signals have to be made avail-
able, are also programmed.
The 16 binary output signals can originate from a maximum of
16 different telegrams. As soon as the data word for lamp test-
ing is received, all outputs are set to logic "1".
The output module i~; given a separate address so ttlat it can
be addressed selectively (for instance for Simulating an output
signal).
System and station addresses are identical for all modules be-
longing to the same l1ulti-purpose processing station. They
are set, jointly and automatically, on the modules Llsing the
station-bus control module.
The module addressl3s are set automatically by plu!;lging the
module into the slot provided within the multi-purpose pro-
cessing station.
 81AB03/R1210

.. '~'.

Diagnosis and annunciation functions

Disturbance annunciations on the module

The light-emitting diodes located on the module front indicate

lED designation
- Disturbance ST
- Module disturbance SG

Ught-emitting diode ST annunciates all module disturbances

and disturbances of data communication with the module.
Ught-emitting diode SG annunciates module disturbances
only.

Disturbance annunciation signals to the annunciation sys-

tem

The annunciation system and/or the CDS control diagnostic

system receive disturbance signals issued by the output mod-
ule using the bus.

Diagnosis

Inside the module processing section, the telegrams received

and the formation of the telegrams to be sent as well as the
internal signal processing are monitored for errors (self-diag-
nosis function).
In the event of a disturbance, the type of disturbance is filed in
the diagnostic register and, at the same time, a general distur-
bance annunciation is signalled to the PROCONTROl system.
When prompted, the module transfers a telegram containing
the data stored in the diagnostic register (register 246).
The contents of the diagnostic register, the annunciations sig-
nalled over the general disturbance line, the annunciations on
the CDS, and annunciation ST are shown in Fig. 1.

..-;':":";-.

" ..":".";-.".

3
81 AB03/R121 0

"~.-;".

Module operating

Diagnosis
register 246
Bit Type CDS annunciation *)
15 S
14 S
13 S Processing disturbed • 6601
12 S r - Checksum error 6602
11 0
10 S I-- Timer defective 6604
9 D I-- Module restart 6605
8 S r - Bus disconnection defective 6606
7 0
6 0
5 0
4 S -- Sink monitor activated 6610
3 0 I,
I
2 S -- Event mode disturbed 6612
0 !
0 0 I -

r
ST

Module not op ~raliDg r--

Incorrect firmware PROM
Hardware defect in processing section S ST
EEPROM not v alid >1 >1 :=J
Initialization of processing active !
L--

Modyle not ad g[~§§abl!i! 1I:~lIll1b!i! by§

Module transm itter switched off
by 88TVOx
Module addre ss not within 0 - 58
Hardware defe ct of bus interface
'--

r
SG
r--

=1 >1 [>1 SG
::J

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after transmission of the diagnosis reqister contents

~notused
o=
_____S__St_a_ti_c_a_n_n_u_nC_i_at_io_n_S_d_i_sa_p_p_e_ar__a_u_to_m_a_t_ic_a_lI_y_o_n_d_e_a_c_tiv_a_t_io_n_________________________________ ~I
__
L

Figure 1: Diagnostic annunciations of 81AB03

The annunciation "Process channel disturbed" may appear for
the following reason:
- Hardware defect on the output levels AB1 ... AB16
*) The control diagnoi~tic system (CDS) provides a description
for every annunciation number. This description gives,
among other data:
- Information on Gause and effect of the disturbance
- Recommendation on its elimination.
This makes for fast elimination of disturbances.

4
 81AB03/R1210

..':~..

Function diagram

Terminal designations
Connector X21 incorporates all process inputs and outputs.
The printed-circuit board is equipped with connectors X11 Connector X11 contains the station-bus interface and the op-
and X21. erating voltages USA and USB.

-----:::l AB1

T!~
i

~~
t------+==- :1:
---+-------:: I:
z10 I AB3

___ + _______
..... 00
Ol . - a: t - - - - - I
cnoa.,
~ew
.2w z16 124
z18 AB5

o
.....
C\I
0r- t--t--
_---t-------- :~ ~:6 z24 I 26
x-
u
~
a::
~-T---::1~7
Q;
W- Co
Ql
I U
('I')
o
CO
«
--- -r- ------ - z30 I AB8
O
e
.S-

---T -------
Cti Vl N
T- e e
.20
I z3.2 28 .8
eo (5+= b02 AB9 '0
~Ol
..... U
Ole
Vl Co:l

---T------- :i:~O
:l 0- b04 29 e
..c e
e o
o u

~
Ol
..c
.8

=~=== :b~1~41:111
Vl
CCl
(f)1
1Q e
..... 0
.L:
(f) Ql.- co
.....
Vl Vl
--. .....
32.
-Ol AB12
~>
~§
t13 U
c.. ---1-------- b16
b18
212
AB13
X
Cti
e

-t- 'E
I
b2D 213
2
--- - - - - - - - - b22 AB14 Ql
'S
. I b24 214 '0
o
C2 ~
'O~
Ql 0
~ E
--- -+- --- --- - b26 I AB15
E
Ol

b2~
(f) 'C .L:Ql -£
o C\J U'JE a
~---
N 'C
OJ
o v e
N :0 . b30 I AB16 'c
oN C\J
0
o
.0 U

--·~----~i
e
N
IN
<;:3
o
Vl
.2
Vl
Ql
Q;
N Co
U
N
C")
.0 o
c:
eCo
<{ N
(f) C") [> ~ Ql
::::l 'C :;
ml
(f)
0
C")
a....-----i8 Vl
e
Ol
::::l 'C C!l
... ..~
(f)

~I
------....1
5

.......................................................................................................................................................................
~~~~~.-~----- ------~---~
 81AB03/R1210

Connection diagram

L ___________________ 4I

Note: Each output is suitable to actuate any of

the permissible loads

...........................................................................
 81AB03/R1210

.....-... ..
~

Mechanical design Contact ass.lgnments of process connect'or X21

Board size: 6 units, 1 division, 160 mm deep

Connector: to DIN 41 612
1 x for station-bus connection
48-pole, edge-connector, type F
(connector X11) View of the contact side:
1 x for process connection
32-pole, edge-connector, type F
(connector X21)
Weight: approx. 0.55 kg ·b z
!
View of the connector side:
02 I AB9 AB1
I
04 Z9 !
Z1
:
06 AB10 AB2
08 Z10 i Z2
I
X II
.....-:':"."'.... 11 10 AB11 AB3
12 Z11 Z3 I
I
,
I
14 AB12 I AB4
16 ,
I Z12 Z4
J
18 AB13 AB5 I

X
BEE
!
22
24
26
.
I
Z13
AB14
Z14
AB15
Z5
AB6
Z6
AB?
I
I

21 I
28 I Z15 Z7
30 I AB16 AB8
32 I Z16 Z8
I

.. / ............

- - - _.. _ - - -
81AB03/R1210

Side view and view of module front

r::P

[;]
ST SG
5T DlstlJrbance
SG Module
disturbance

X11

X21

ABB
81AB03 E
Co

OJ EPROM, programmed, order number: GJR2392541 Pxxxx

xxxx = Position number as per applicable revision status

8
 81AB03/R1210

Technical data

In addition to the system data, the following values apply:

Power supply

Operating voltage of module USNUSB == 24 V

Current consumption IS == 50 rnA + output currents
Power dissipation PV = 1.2 W + (3.5 V . output currents)
Reference potential on process side Z = OV
Reference potential on bus side ZD == 0 V

Output values

Binary outputs AB1 ... AB16

Output voltage ~ USNUSB - 3.5 V
Output current ::; 100 mA

"-'~"
Processing time

For complete module 10 ms

Interference Immunity (of process outputs)

ESD according to IEC 801/2 8 kV to front panel

EMV according to IEC 801/4 1 kV burst
Destruction according to IEC 801/5 (draft) 1 kV to reference potential

ORDERING DATA

Order number for complete module

Type designation: 81AB03-E/R1210 Order numbl~r: GJR2392500R1210

Technical data subject to change without notice!

.....................................................................................................................................
81AB03/R1210

aliit
ft • •
ASEA BROWN BOVERI

ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH

PO. Box 100351,0-6800 Mannheim 1
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462 411 107 ab d

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany (KWUE69 0293 0.5 BID)

12
 Module and PROCONTROl P
Application Description Input/Output, Signal Conditioning

Universal Input Module

for Binary and Analog Transmitters
Publication No.
o KWl 6307 92 E, Edition 07/94
Replacing 0 KWl 6307 92 E, Edition 04/92 81 EU01 - E/R121 0

Application Features

The universal input module connects the following transmit- The module can be plugged into any station of the PROCON-
ters: TROl bus system. It incorporates a standarcl interface for the
PROCONTROl station bus.
Binary Transmitters
The module transmits the input signals and/or converted input
- Single and changeover contacts with or without line monitor signals in telElgrams via the station bus to the PROCONTROl
- Inductive initiators acc. to NAMUR DIN 19234 bus system. Before transmission the telegrams are checked
and providec with parity bits. This ensures tl1at the receiving
- Electronic transmitters module can check for fault-free transmission.
Analog transmitters for current signals The module checks the telegrams received over the station
bus, e.g. those intended for corrective calculations, by their
- Twin-wire transducers 4 ... 20 mA supplied from the input parity bits for fault-free transmission.
module
Provision is made to eliminate interference among the function
- 4-wire transducers 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA and 0 ... 5 mA
units of the module and the station bus.
with external power source
A short-circuit-proofand monitored transmitter power source
Temperature transducers is available for each function unit, suitable for the various
applications.
- Thermocouples with transducers for current signals of 4 ...
20 mA and cold junctions inside the transducer. lineariza- In case the inlernal monitoring circuits or the input signal moni-
tion is on the input module. tor respond, disturbance annunciation ST (general distur-
bance) will bl3 indicated on the front panel of the module.
- Resistance thermometers with transducers for current sig-
nals of 4 ... 20 mA Response ofthe internal monitoring circuits is indicated as dis-
turbance annunciation SG (module disturbance) on the front
The module consists of 16 function units. Each function unit panel of the module.
may be used for any type of input mode. Any combination is
possible. Parameter allocation and setting is programmed
easily via the configuration list. The programmed values are
stored in an EEPROM to ensure that they are not lost in the
event of power failure. They can be changed any time.
Up to four limit values can be allocated to each analog signal.
Up to four independent correction and filter calculations can
be performed independently on each input module. Program-
ming is done by function block structuring. Observe the
boundary conditions for this application .

•••• 0;••>;>.
81 EU01/R121 0
Application of binary transmitters
Types of transmitters
The function units of the module can be used for
- single/changeover contacts
with 48 V supply from the module, inc!. monitoring
- single/changeover contacts
with 48 V supply from the module, without monitoring
- single/changeover contacts
with 24 V supply from the module, without monitoring
- contacts or electronic transmitters
with external power supply of up to 60 V, without monitoring
- inductive initiators acc. to NAMUR (DIN 19234),
with supply from the module, inc!. monitoring.
For the applicable type of connection refer to the connection
diagrams
For programming of the application-specific settings refer to
the configuration list.
Transmitter power supply from the module
The transmitter power supply for the different binary mode
applications is available for each function unit at the appropri-
ate output Sn.
The transmitter power supply is short-circuit- proof and moni-
tored on the module.
The applications of "single/changeover contacts with 48 V sup-
ply from the module with or without monitoring" allow parallel
supply of max. 4 contacts with a common root from one Sn
supply output.
The application of "single/changeover contacts with 24 V
supply from the module, without monitoring" allows parallel
supply of max. 16 contacts with a common root from one Sn
supply output.
Those inputs grouped together to be supplied from one com-
mon source are susceptible to mutual interference.
In the case of common supply, those Sn supply outputs which
are not required shall not be used.
If the transmitters are supplied from an external power source,
the respective Sn supply output on the module shall not be
used.
It is not permissible to connect several Sn supply outputs in
parallel.
The maximum permissible static potential difference between
the reference potentials shall not be exceeded when an exter-
nal power source is used.
2
Binary signal Input circuit and monitoring
Signal input for binalY transmitters is through inputs En.
Each input is provided with bounce suppression. The module
detects the first signal change as an effective Signal if the
signal is present for more than n processing cycles (without
the use of function blocks).
In the applications of "single/changeover contacts with 48 V
supply from the module with or without monitoring", a current
of about 5 mA will flow through the closed contact.
In the applications of "single/changeover contacts with 48 V
supply from the module with monitoring", a resistor of
47 kOhm +1- 2 % shall be connected in parallel with the con-
tact. This allows to monitor the following faults:
- Wire break and short-circuit to earth in the transrnitter line
- Wire break and ~,hort-circuit to earth in the transmitter
supply line
- Interruption in suppression resistor when the contact is
open
- Breaking of chan!; eover contact.
When the initiator acc. to NAMUR (DIN 19234) is used, the
signals of a function unit are evaluated as follows:
- up to and including version P0006
active area free En = "1" signal
active area covered En = "0" signal
- version P0007 or P1007 or higher
active area free En = "0" signal
active area covered En = "1" signal
Monitoring at this application:
- Wire break and short-circuit to earth in the transrnitter line
- Wire break and ~~hort-circuit earth to in the transmitter
supply line
- Interruption in the transmitter.
Reaction to the response of a monitoring function
As soon as a monitoring function responds, the relevant trans-
mitter signals are set to zero in the telegram, the single distur-
bance bit and the gE~neral disturbance bit are set to 1.
 81 EU01/R1210

.....-;";"'"'...
Use of analog transmitters The input module transmits the digital 12-bit signal, com-
plemented by a prefix sign, as telegram to the station bus.

Types of transmitters
The function units of the module can be used for
- 2-wire transducers, 4 ... 20 mA, supplied from the input
module
- 4-wire transducers, 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA and 0 ... 5 mA
with external power supply of the transducer
- and the following thermocouples with transducers for 4 .,.
20 mA and a cold junction before or inside the transducer.
Linearization is in the input module.
• Thermocouples type S (PtRh-Pt) acc. to DIN lEG 584
• Thermocouples type K (NiCr-Ni) acc. to DIN IEC 584
• Thermocouples type J (Fe-CuNi) acc. to DIN IEC 584
• Thermocouples type L (Fe-CuNi) acc. to DIN 43710
When the analog signal monitor has respcnded, the analog
value telegram is transmitted with the disturbance bit set.
Connection of thermocouples and resistance thermo-
meters
The connection of thermocouples and resistance thermome-
ters require:, a transducer to be connected in the incoming
circuit. It is fI~quired that the cold junction for thermocouples is
located before or inside the transducer.
The thermocouples and the associated transducer are linear
with respect to the thermal e.m.f. Therefore, the current signals
within 4 .. , :;;0 mA from the temperature transducers for ther-
mocouples are linearized in the input module. For this
purpose, thE! characteristics of the permissible thermocouples
are stored cn the EPROM of the input module.

• Thermocouples type N (NiCrSil-NiSil) The resistan::e thermometer and the associated transducer are
linear with fI~spect to temperature. Linearization on the input
••••"'"'~.">; ••
- resistance thermometers Pt 100 acc. to DIN IEC 751 with module is not required.
transducer for 4 ... 20 mA
Within the plausibility limits, the measured value transmitted to
For type of connection refer to the connection diagrams. the station bus is always identical with the measured tempera-
For programming of the application-specific settings refer to ture.
the configuration list. The temperature transmitters and the associated transducers
shall be selected according to the required measuring range.
Transducer supply
When earthE!d thermocouples are used, isollated transducers
The transducer supply from the input module is short-circuit- are required.
proof, is available at the respective supply output Sn and is
monitored on the input module. Measuring ranges:
In the case of external supply of the transducer, the supply The transmitters have the following ranges.
contact of the respective function unit is not used.
The maximum potential difference among the reference poten- Thermocouple Nominal range 100 % value
tials shall not be exceeded in case of external power supply. Type S I 0 ... 1200 °c 1000°C
Type K 0 ... 600°C 600 °c
Several Sn supply outputs shall not be connected in parallel. 0 ... 1000°C 1000°C
,
Type L 0 ... 200°C 150 °C
Analog Signal Input circuit and monitoring 0 ... 400°C 300 °C
Type N 0 ... 600°C 600 °C
The current input signal is converted into a measuring voltage Type J 0 ... 300°C 300 °C
by a high-precision measuring resistor, transmitted to the in- 0 ... 600°C 600 °C
put measuring amplifier via a multiplexer and finally converted
into a 12- bit analog Signal by an analog-to-digital converter.
ResistanCE! Nominal range 100 % value
The input measuring amplifier and the analog-to-digital con-
thermome':er
verter are monitored by means of reference voltages.
Pt 100 0 ... 150°C 150 °C
The analog signals are monitored for plausibility on the mod- 0 ... 300°C 300 °C
ule. The monitor responds as soon as the upper limit (OG) or 0 ... 600°C 600 °C
the lower limit (UG) is violated.
These limits can be readjusted via the configuration list. The If the measuring range limits are violated, a disturbance bit will
upper limit is preset to 118.75 % and the lower limit to be added to the temperature values.
-6.25 %.
The measuring range of the module which can be represented
The plausibility check can be suppressed for each function is -200 % ... +199.9 %. The minimum and maximum values
unit separately. This requires the entry of the OG and UG maxi- which are actually transmitted depend on tl1e type of trans-
mum values into the configuration list. ducer selected.

3
 81 EU01 /R121 0

Use for correction and filter calculations
When used for analog signal input, the following function
blocks are available on the module for correcting flow rate and
level measurements and filtering measured values:
- Correcting function for flow rates of
water/steam
- Correcting function for flow rates of KOR3
gases with variable reference pressure
- Correcting function for levels
- Non-linear filter
One function block can be used per function unit with the max-
imum limited to 4 per module.
Function blocks KOR1, KOR3 and NIV include the Fil func-
tion.
The function blocks have inputs for specifying the correcting
quantity and basic calculation values and outputs for putting
out the corrected value and internal status messages. The
function block outputs of corrected values are allocated to the
analog value telegrams of the associated function unit.
Module inputs, signals from the station bus and fixed values
must be allocated to the function block inputs to perform the
corrections. These data are specified by the user.
This procedure is referred to as structuring. The sum of these
data makes up the structure list. This list is stored on the
EEPROM of the module.
For details on structuring the function blocks refer to the func-
tion block descriptions.
The following limit values of the module shall be observed for
structuring:
- max. number of function blocks
- max. number of signals from the bus
- max. number of function blocks per function unit
(since the source module failed for instance), the sink time
watchdog will respond. The watchdog sets the disturbance bit
in the sink register allocated to this telegram. The module then
uses the last value t"ansmitted in this telegram and forwards
the calculated value with the disturbance bit set.
KOR1
Limit signals
When the module is used for analog signal input, max. 4 limit
NIV values can be programmed for each function unit. One out of
four hysteresis values can be selected for each limit value.
Fil
Programming is by 11eans of the PDDS on the basis of the
limit value list. The Iir1it value list is stored on the module in an
EEPROM.
The limit value list can be stored in a RAM if changes shall be
made. But these data will be lost in case of voltage failure. In
that case, the modull~ changes over to the list in the EEPROM
immediately. If the lir1it value list is loaded both into EEPROM
and RAM, the list processing will be performed in the mode
defined by the PDDB, i.e. EEPROM/RAM.
In the event mode, any violation of a limit value is immediately
Signalled to the station bus in the form of a limit siqnal tele-
gram. The same happens when the input signal monitoring
feature responds, but in this case together with the associated
analog value telegram. Then the disturbance bits of the analog
value and limit signals telegrams will be set. All limit values
allocated to the analog value are set to "0".
The limit value rangl~ is -150 % ... + 150 % of the selected
signal range.
The following hysteresis values can be set for each limit value
individually:
- HY1 0.39 0/0
4 - HY2 1.56 % (standard setting)
20 - HY3 3.12 0/0
- HY4 6.25 0/0

The use of function blocks increases the cycle time of the The hysteresis can be above or below the limit value depend-
module by the calculation time specified for each function ing on whether violation of the minimum or maximum value
block. has been selected (~;ee Fig. 1).
The module automatically determines the required cycle time
which is stored in module register 205. The cycle time can be
read from this register using the PDDS.
~__o-~~____ ~GW
The corrected analog values are output to the PROCONTROl : Hy
bus system in the form of telegrams. _off
Moreover, the uncorrected raw values can be output in a tele-
gram.
~---------------+
J
Telegrams arriving over this bus for the function blocks may be t
faulty and therefore contain a disturbance bit. The module
uses this value in its arithmetic operations and transmits the upper limit value lower limit value
calculated value in a telegram with the disturbance bit set.
Fig. 1: Option for limit value setting
The module incorporates a monitoring feature which checks
the telegrams to be received by the bus for cyclic updating. When function blocks are used, the limit values are always
When a signal has not been updated for a particular time derived from the cori"ected analog values.

.......................,... ," ............................................,....,.,.,',',',',','",

 81 EU01 IR121 0

••• 0;-;0;0;',.

Event generation Simulation

The input module transmits the data in telegrams to the station Source simulation
bus either cyclically or in the event mode.
Source simulation is possible for both binary and analog trans-
In the event mode, data are transmitted whenever binary or mitters by means of PODS. Max. 16 sources can be simulated.
analog values have changed in the module. In this case, the
cyclic mode is interrupted and the module is immediately Sink simulation
granted the permission to transmit.
When binary transmitters are connected, the module interprets Sink simulation is possible with function blocks for correction
and filter calculations. Simulation is performed by means of
the following occurrences as events:
the PODS. Max. 20 bus signals can be simulated.
- Switching of a connected contact, response of a NAMUR
transmitter, change in a connected electronic signal.
- Response of a monitor Setting the operating modes
When analog transmitters are connected, the module inter-
The type of application and the setting values are required to
prets the following occurrences as events:
be loaded in the form of a configuration list before the module
- Response of a limit signal can take up operation. Before that, all process inputs of the
- Response of a monitor module have a high-resistance bias and the module transmits
..... ...
~

no data telegrams on the bus. The fault lamps ST and SG

- Change of an analog value by an adjustable threshold value
within an adjustable time span since the last transmission to
the station bus.
As soon as the module detects the change of an analog
value by more than the specified value, the module initiates
an event transfer if the set time value has been exceeded
since the last transfer, too.
signal the pmsence of disturbances. Nevertheless, the module
can receive data via the bus. The module is waiting for the
configuration list to be transmitted by the PDDS.
After transmission of the configuration list, thE! module takes an
active part in bus communication. The disturbance LEOs are
deenergized.

Adjustable The configuration list contains all the settings required by the
analog value change: 0.2 % ... 6.8 % module, listed acc. to function units (table 1).
standard setting: 1.56 % Settings can be performed within the defined range of values.
Adjustable time value The column for standard setting contains the default value
for current signals 40 ms, 200 ms which is entered if no other value is set.
standard setting: 200 ms
for temperature signals 200 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms Special setting for function unit 1:
standard setting: 1000 ms
Two plug - in jumpers X100 and X101 are provided on the
The values on the configuration list are set by means of the module for connecting four-wire transducers.
PODS. For standard applications, these jumpers are plugged into
positions 1/2 and 4/5.
..... .....
~ In the positions 2/3 and 5/6, lines E01 (z02) and S01 (z04) are
permanently connected to Z.
In this case, function unit 1 is no longer available .

•••:;0;-.;0;-; ••••

5
81 EU01/R1210

Range of values PODS presetting

I Type of transmitter, measuring range 0 ... 20mA 4 ... 20mA
4 ... 20 mA
0 ... 5 mA
TE type S, 0 ... 1200·C
TE type K, 0... 600·C
TE type K, 0 .. , 1000 ·C
TE type L, 0... 200·C
TE type L, 0... 400·C
TE type N, 0... 600·C
TE type J, 0 ... 300·C
TE type J, 0 ... 600·C
Pt 100, 0... 150·C
Pt 100, 0... 300·C
Pt 100, 0... 600·C
Contact, 48 V with monitor
Contact, 48 V without monitor
Contact, 24 V without monitor
Contact/electronic signal, up to 60 'I
NAMUR (DIN 19234)

Plausibility limit, lower end -200 ... 0% -6.25 %

Plausibility limit, upper end 0 ... 199.9% 118.75 %
Threshold value ! 0.2 ... 6.8 % (step approx. 0.2 %) 1.56 %
Time-out 40,200,1000,2000 ms 200ms
(time-out not possible with binary signals)
Transfer raw value Yes, No No
No. of function block (1 ... 4), KOR1, KOR3, NIV, FIL ! -
Filter function *) 162/3,50,60 Hz 50 Hz
Linearization Yes, No No
(relevant only for thermocouples)

Table 1: Configuration list

*) Setting valid for all function units with analog transmitters.

6
 81 EU01 /R121 0

Signal output to the PROCONTROl bus Data communication with the module

The module transfers the data telegrams through a standard Address formation
interface to the station bus. Data transfer is serial.
The system and station addresses are identical for all modules
of a PROCONTROL station. They are set automatically by the
Identification of signals
station bus control module.
The conditioned and digitalized input signals and the limit
The module address is set automatically when the module is
signals formed in the module are written into special registers.
plugged into the slot reserved in the PROCONTROL station.
The processing section writes the following data into the
address part of the data telegram: The data words of the input signals and the diagnosis results
are written into special registers of the shared memory. The
System address (possible 0 ... 3) register number is the register address. A register is perma-
Station address (possible 1 ... 249) nently assigned to each data word. Assignment is automatic
Module address (possible 0 ... 58) when a process signal is connected to the process connector
of the module.
Register address (possible 0 ... 31 for analog values
and limit signals No telegrams are transferred for function units which are not
32 ... 35 for binary values used.
36 ... 99 vacant
If none of the four possible limit signals of an existing input
101 ... 104 for raw values
signal is programmed, the associated limit Signal telegram will
205 for module cycle
not be transferred.
246 for diagnosis data)
If not all limit values of an input signal are programmed, those
bits in the limit signal telegram which belong to the non-pro-
grammed limit values are always set to "0".

Reading the data

Address-related information is needed to read the contents of

a register. Table 2 shows this information and the contents of
the respective register.

.... .....
7.~.-

~== ...=...=...=...=...=.. =...=...=...=...=... ... ... ..

~~~~.~~~-~===.= ...=...=...=.. =....=
....",
..... =... ....... . ..
~ ~ ~ ~~============~
 81 EU01/R121 a

I Type of Information Address word Data word (bit address) DA

1
Sys- 1 Sta-
tern tlon
Mod- I Reg- [15
ule ister
I, 14 13 12 11
10 I 9 i 8 : 7 i 6
5 4 3 2 I 1

Analog value a I a a a I VZ 100 50 25 12.5 6.25 I

3.125 : 1.561 0.78 I C.39 0.195 II 0.097 0.048 MB SM
FE1 % I % I % %1%1% % %1% % % % '1 '2

I MW1

Limit signals
I J a o a GO GU M M GO SM I 3
FE1 4 4 4 2 1 I

Analog value a a a 30 VZ MW16 I MB SM '2

\ I
FE16 ! '1
I
i limIt Signals a a a 31 0 I a 0 GO GU M GO GU M ! CiO , GU
II M
! GO GU M SM
I
3
FE16 i
4 4 4 3 3 3 ! 2 I 2 2 I 1 , 1
I 1 I
: BInary values a a a 32 0 0 E NE M E NE M E NE M ! E i M SM 3
, FE1 - FE4 o I 4
i
4 4 i 3 3 3 2 -I 2 i 2 1 ! N1E I 1
I

i B!nary values a a I a ,
33 0 0 0 E NE M E NE M E I NE M E NE I M SM 3
i FE5 - FE8 8 8 I 8 i,

I
7 7 7 6 6 6 : 5
,
5 i 5 I
1 Binary values a a a 34 0 0 o I E NE M E NE M E NE M E NE M SM
I FE9 - FE12 I 12 12
I
12 i 11 11 11 '0 10
I
10 i 9 9 9 3 !
I
, BInary values a a a 35 a 0 0 E NE M I E NE M E ! NE M , E NE M SM 3
I FE13 - FE16 I 16 16 16 i 15 15 15 "4 i 14 14 i 13
,
, 13 i 13
: Module cycle time a a a 205 Time value 100 ms Time value 10 ms Tine value 1 ms Time value 0,1 ms 0
1 1

diagnosIs register a a a 246 Allocation see Fig. 2 0

I

Table 2: Register allocation and bit significance in the telegrams (applies to all analo!~ value telegrams)

Explanation Note:
In the limit signals (if not disturbed), bits GU and GO are al-
FE function unit ways antivalent
8M general disturbance annunciation "telegram"
*1 Measuring range, depending on type of transmitter, for
VZ sign
-temperature 00 measuring range 0 ... 150 'c
MWn digital measured value
sensors 01 measuring range a '" 300 'c
En binary signal input
10 measuring range a ... 600 'c
NEn negated value of En
11 measuring range a ... 1000 'c
Mn individual disturbance annunciation
- current sensors: 00 fixed
GOn max. limit value n violated
GUn min. limit value n violated *2 Data type, depending on type of transmitter, for
DA data type - current sensors: 5
a address depending on place of installation -temperature sensors: 6
.~- ..

'~~~~~-~"'="~"'~"'="'="~"'="'="'="~"'="'="'=""".'.'"' ......=
......""
...."'
.....~ ...~.~~,~~=~~.~----~~~..=.======
....~
 81 EU01 /R121 0

Type of Address word Data word (bit address) DA

InformatIon

Sys- Sta- Mod-I Reg- IS 14 13 ! 12 11 I 10 9 8 7 6 5 i 4 3 2 1 0

tern I tion ule ister ! i I

Status message, a a I a 100 0 0 0 MF MF ! MF MF MF MF MF MF MF MF

I
MF MF SM t 1
function block 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
i
I Function block 4 Function blo:k 3 Function block 2 Function block 1
I I
i I
I I

Raw value 1 a a a 101 VZ 100 I 50 25 12.5 I 6.25 I 3.125 1.56 I 0.78 0.39 ! 0.195 j 0.097 0.048 J 0 SM 5
I I
% I % % i % %
I % % % % I % % %
I I
Raw value for function block 1
!
I
Raw value 2 a I a a 102 VZ Raw value for function block 2 0 0 I SM 5
I I
II
Raw value 3 a a i a I 103 VZ Raw value for function block 3 J 0 ! SM 5
, i
Raw value 4 a a i a I 104 VZ Raw value for function block 4 J 0 I SM 5
I ! I
I

Table 3: Register allocation and bit significance of the additional telegrams fo~ structuring

......,.,..... Explanation:
DA Data type
SM General disturbance annunciation telegram
VZ Sign Note:
MFn Status annunciation n The telegrams of the registers 101 to 104 will be transmitted
(annunciation outputs of the function blocks) only if the raw values are output too, and the associated
a Address depending on the place of installation correction function is structured,

Diagnosis and annunciation functions

Disturbance annunciations on the module Diagnosis

The following annunciations are signalled on the front panel of In the processing section of the module the received tele-
the module: grams, the generation of the telegrams to be transmitted and
the internal signal proceSSing are monitored for errors (self-
Designation of LED
diagnosis),
•• ;.-0;0;>;"•.••
- Disturbance ST
If a disturbance occurs, the type of the disturbance is stored in
- Disturbance Module SG the diagnosis register and a disturbance signal is transmitted
to the PROCONTROl system at the same time,
The LED ST signals all disturbances of the module and distur-
bances in the data communication with the module. When requested, the module transmits a telegram which con-
tains the data stored in the diagnosis register (register 246)
The LED SG signals module disturbances only, (see Fig, 2),
The contents of the diagnosis register, the signals on the
Disturbance signals to the annunciation system general disturbance lines, the messages on the CDS, and
lamps ST and SG are shown in Fig_ 2.
The annunciation system and the CDS control diagnosis
system receive the disturbance signals from the input module If message "Process channel fault" is indicated in the diagno-
via the bus, sis register, this may be due to one of the following reasons:
- Analog signal not plausible; values are above or below the
plausibility limits specified.
- Internal reference values of analog inputs disturbed,
- Transmitter monitoring responded.
- Correcting function disturbed,
If message "Processing fault" is indicated in the diagnosis
register, this may be due to one of the following reasons:
.-:'~'-'.

- No valid configuration list.

- Internal module voltages disturbed.
- Hardware fault on the module.

9
81EU01/R1210

Module operating

Diagnosis
register 246
Bit Type CDS messages *)
15 S c-- Parameter fault 6615
14 S ~

Pro cess channel fault 6600

13 S - Pro cessing fault 6601
12 S c-- Ch ecksum error detected 6602
11 a
10 S - Tim er defective 6604
9 D f-- Module restart executed 6605
I
8 S f-- Bu s deactivation defective I 6606
I
7 II a \

6 II a I
5 I a i
L Sin k monitoring responded
!
6610
I 4 S I
I 3 a
2 S f-- Event mode fault I
6612
1 a I
I
0 a !
I I
,----
I '---
I I I
I

r
ST

Module not operatinQ

Wrong firmware PRO M
,---- I I

Hardware defect of p recessing section SST

EEPROM not valid
>1 >1
Processing initializati on active
'----
i
MQdl,lle nQt accessil,2 l~frQm l,2l,l~ I

Module transmitter dl'sconnected

by bus control modu Ie
I
i
Module address not w ithin 0- 58
Hardware defect of b us interface 1
i
---
SG
I

f
~

I ss G
>1

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after the contents of the diagnosis register has been transmitted
S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation
a = Not used

Fig. 2: Diagnosis messages of 81 EU01
*) The control diagnosis system (CDS) provides a description
for every message number. This description comprises:
- Information abcut cause and effect of the disturbance
- Recommendations for elimination
Thus, fast disturbance elimination is ensured.

10
 81EU01/R1210

•••• ':":0;>; ••

Function diagram equipped with connectors X21 and X11 . Connector X21 con-
tains all process inputs.
Terminal designations: The module consists of a printed circuit Connector )(11 incorporates the standard interface with the
board (see "Mechanical design"). The printed circuit board is station bus and the operating voltages of the module.

- - - - - -----

~
E01 z02 2 1
~ .r-.

o 3
J... X100 --@SG '
FE1 c---

S01 z04 5 4
, ,
~101
(J)

i ()
ell
't:
E02 z06 0)

S02 , z08 FE2

J- ~
CIl
:::l
.0
d18 SRA •

r Iss
E03 z10
S03 z12 FE3
,
.... ..
;";";";
,I
E04 z14
S04
E05
z16
, z18
FE4
~
,
S05 z20 FE5
~
r
E06 z22
,
S06 z24 FE6 ,

EO?
SO?

E08
S08
,
z26
, z28

z30
z32
FE?

FE8
~
~
Qj
x
0)
a.
:;::;
::;
E
(ij
c
r----
! OJ
c
.Ci5
CIl
0)
()

ea.
,

,
CIl
:::l
.0
C
o
~CIl
E09 b02 OJ C

~
.Ci5 0 ~ f---

II
S09 b04 FE9 n(J)
CIl
~
E10 ' b06 eC ,
S10

E11
b08

b10
FE10
~ 0
() r--+ f---+

~
FE11
~ ,
S11 b12 0
a:
0....
E12 b14 W

~
w
S12 ' b16 FE12 ,
E13 b18 +5V ...

~
b021zD
S13 b20 FE13 1 b14 ZD
,
1 d26 ZD
E14 b22
l
FE14
~
I~
S14 b24
E15 ' b26 ,
S15 b28 FE15
~ +24V

I 1 :::
d30 USB
d32 USA

r
E16 b30 +24V'" ,
S16 b32 I FE16 b32 Z
z32 Z
X21
81 EU01-E/R121 0
X11
- - - - - ----- -
* Connect connector X11/d18 with ZD to ensure proper func-
tioning of the module (once per subrack).

11

...............,.,.,.,., .......................................................... "", .....................................................,.~,.,.,~..~

...~
...~
...~
.. =
....... ...=...=...=.. =... =... =
= =...=...~ ...=.~-~~==~~-~~~~.~-----
81 EU01/R1210

Connection diagrams (each connection diagram can be used for each function unit.)

Standard application

Single/changeover contacts with 48 V supply from the module

with monitoring

W I
i
E01 S01 E02 E03 S03 E04

81 EU01-E/R121 0
I

'v------~~--------,
station bus =>

Single/changeover contacts with 48 V supply from the module

without monitoring

r----

lI

I E03 I S03
E01 S01 E02 i S02
! -, I E04 I S04
II 81 EU01-E/R1210
I
I
I
I I :
II
station bus
=>

12
 81 EU01/R1210

.'.~'.

Single/changeover contacts with 24 V supply from the module

without monitoring

,.----

E01 801 E02 802 I E03 1803 I E04 I S04

lI ! II lI
81 EU01-E/R1210
: I
I
I I
II
station bus

Inductive initiator acc. to NAMUR (DIN 19234)

~ +
I
I E01 S01 I E02 I S02 I E03 1803 I E04 i 804 --
II !
81EU01-E/R1210
lI lI
I
I I I I
I --
JI
station bus

13
81 EU01/R1210

2-wire transducer, 4 ... 20 mA supplied from the module

/
transducer
4 ... 20 mA
/
+

E01 801 I E02 \ 802 I E03 \ 803 I E04 1804

I -
:I 81 EU01-E/R1210
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I I I I -
II
station bus

Temperature transducer

....
+

/ /
transducer transducer
/ 4 ... 20mA / 4 ... 20mA

+ +

E01 801 : E02 ' 802 ! E03 I 803 \ E04 \ 804

.
......-.~ ....

14
 81EU01/R1210

Special application

Contacts or electronic transmitters with external power supply

without monitoring

Electronics Uext
signal

-------.J
I J
I
EOl I 801 I! E02 1802 E03 1803 ! 804

:I !
81EU01-E/R1210
I I

/L-------------------------------st~J;ojLb-u-s--------------------------------------~:>

Caution:
Max. static potential difference between the reference potentials permissible < 0.5 V

Parallel power supply:

Single/changeover contacts with 24 V supply from the module,
without monitoring, max. 16 contacts permissible

"-'~'"

I~~I.:...--.--w~ - - - ----------1----------4

I EOl 801 E02 En 816

-y----
I
81EU01-E/R1210 I
I I
~--------~------------~r---------.---L-----------~---

~--------------------=~~------------------------~:>
"'~'"

15

...=
······················.·.·.·.·.·.·.·.··m ... =... =... =...=...=
.. = = = ...=...=...=...=...=... ..,.=
~ ...=...=...=...=...= = =..=...=...=......................................
~~- .. -.~
81EU01/R1210

Parallel power supply:

Single/changeover contacts with 48 V supply from the module

with or without monitoring, max. 4 contacts permissible

I
r h ,-1' I-

c-;J
' '
h-
!

I
I
E01 i 801 E02 : 802 • E03 1803 E04 804

lI ! :I :I
81 EU01-E/R1210
I
J I I I
_I I
station bus
=>

4-wire transducer with external power supply

I
U ext

/"
J I
U ext

/
I
I
U ext
I
/"
transducer transducer transducer
4 ... 20 mA o .,.5mA 0 ... 20mA
/ / /
+1 1 +'I I
+ 1 -
I
E01 S01 I E06 I 806 EO? 180? E08 I S08
I TI
2 51 lI lI
1 i 3
6 • 41
I
81 EU01-E/R1210
I
X100
I
X101 I I I I
J I
station bus

Caution:
The return lines of the externally supplied transducers are ar- This is permissible only for transducers connected to function
ranged in parallel and connected with the contacts E01 and units 2 to 16.
S01,

16
 81 EU01 IR121 0

"-:'~'"
4-wire transducer

I +
/'
4-wire
transducer
/' I<SOmA

I +

I
E01 801 I E02 i 802 I E03 803 I E04 1804

! I I
2 5 : I I
1 r: 3 6 • 4 I 81 EU01-E/R121 0 I I
I I I
•• -;'""?:":"'. X100 X101 : I I L
II
station bus
>
Caution:
In this mode, merely 2 transducers may be connected per
module, since otherwise the specified max. power disSipation
would be exceeded.

"':~'"

••••-z;o:>;"; ••

17

................................................................................................................................... ... .. ..
~~~~~~
 81 EU01/R121 0

Module design Contact assignment of process connector X21

Board size: 6 units, 1 division, 160 mm deep View of contact sid€!:

Connector: acc. to DIN 41612 ,

,,
1 x for station bus connection, b z
I
48-pole edge connector, type F 02 E09 E01
(connector X11) ,
04 509 501
1 x for process connection, , 06 E10 E02
32-pole connector, type F
(connector X21) 08 I 510 502
10 E11 E03
Weight: approx. 0.5 kg ! I

12 i 511 503
I I
View of edge connector side: I 14 E12 E04
i
16 i
512 504
,
18 E13 I E05
I 20 513 I 505
I 22 E14 E06

X 24 514 506
11
26 E15 E07
i
28 515 507
30 E16 E08

!
32 516 508

X
21

18

......................................................................................................................................
 81EU01/R1210

.. :.~ ..
Side view and view of module front

cO

ASS

[D;]
ST SG
ST disturbance
SG module
disturbance

X11

X101 X10C

6· • 3
5A A2
4~~ 1

>:21

ASS
81EU01

rn EPROM programmed, order number: GJR2391541 Pxxxx

xxxx = position number indicating the applicable program version .

.... ~ ...

19
81 EU01/R121 0

Technical data
In addition to the system data, the following values apply:

Power supply

Operating voltage +24 V

Current consumption (depending on configuration) Configuration Basic requirem. + for each function unit
when transmitter active
NAMUR 140 mA 9 mA
contacts, 24 V 140 mA 2 mA
contacts, 48 V 140 mA 17 mA
2-wire-transducer 140 mA 7 mA + meas. current
Reference potential OV
Power dissipation 3.4 ... 11 W
depending on the operating voltage and configuratllon
Approximation formula:
approx. 3.4 W + 24 V . (n . current per function umt when
the transmitter is active).
n = number of func:ion units configured

Binary transmitter mode

Single/changeover contacts with 48 V supply from the module,

withlwithout monitoring
Input values
O-signal without monitor 0 ... 10.5V
O-signal with monitor 6 ... 10.5 V
1-signal 14 ... 51 V
Response range of monitor 0 ... 3 V
Input resistance 10 kOhm + 11 %, -- 10 %
Destruction limit > 55 V
Resistance (forward and return lines) ~ 100 Ohm

Output values
Output voltage 48 V +1- 5 %
Output current max. 32 mA
Response time of monitoring function 0.5 s
(for use with monitoring)

Contacts or electronic transmitters with 24 V supply from the module,

without monitoring
Input values
O-signal 0 ... 3 V
1-signal 11.2 ... 30 V
Input resistance 15 kOhm + 13 %, -- 10 %
Destruction limit > 65 V
Resistance (forward and return lines) ~ 100 Ohm

Output values
Output voltage us - 5.5 V
Output current max. 50 mA

20
 81EU01/R1210

Gontacts or electronic transmitters with external power supply up to 60 V,

without monitoring
Input values
O-signal 0 ... 3 V
1-signal 11.2 ... 60 V
Input resistance 15 kOhm +13 %, - 10 %
Stat. potential difference compared to reference potential < 0.5 V
of extemal power supply
Destruction limit > 65 V
Resistance (forward and return lines) ~ 100 Ohm

Inductive initiators acc. to NAMUR (DIN 19234), supply from module,

with monitor
Input values
Signal change at 1.65 mA
Short-circuit alarm at ~ 6mA
Open-circuit alarm at ~ 0.35 mA
Input resistance 1 kOhm + 13 %, - 10 %
Destruction limit > 12 V
Resistance (forward and return lines) ~ 50 Ohm

Output values
Output voltage 8.2 ... 10 V
Output current max. 10 mA

Analog transmitter mode

Input values
Input current, nominal range 0 ... 20mA
(corresponds to 0 ... 100 %) 4 ... 20mA
0 ... 5 mA
Maximum range -1 ... 30 mA
Measuring resistor 50 Ohm
Destruction limits +/- 50 mA
Resistance (forward and return lines) ~ 100 Ohm

Accuracy
..............
Accuracy related to 100 % < 0.3 %
(over temperature range 0 to 70 "G,
aging, voltage range)
Errors on delivery < 0.1 %
Quantization error < 0.02 %
Linearity error < 0.1 %
Response to temperature changes < 50 ppm/K (typ. 30 ppm/K)
Errors by digital linearization 1 LSB
Resolution, at 0 ... 20 mA 12 bits
at 4 ... 20 mA 12 bits
at 0 ... 5 mA 10 bits
Common-mode rejection 120 dB
Normal-mode rejection at 16 2/3, 50 and 60 Hz 50 dB

Transducer supply
Output voltage (at I ~ 25 mAl US - 4.5 V
Output voltage (at I ~ 50 mAl US - 5.5 V
Output current max. 50 mA

,,-7""'""',

21
 81 EU01/R121 0

Processing time
For complete module
(no function blocks):
- Binary transmitters 5 ms
- Analog transmitters 80 ms
- Temperature measurements 320 ms
Additional time requirement if function blocks are used
(per function) KOR1 105 ms
KOR3 125 ms
NIV 105 ms
FIL 70 ms

Bounce suppression time

When binary transmitters are used < n . 5 ms + 3 ms
(set value: n = 3)

Initialization time
When voltage is switched on or the module is plugged in
Function blocks not used 1 ... 12 s
Function blocks used 2 ... 22 s '~""

Contact resistance
Resistance value 47 kOhm
Power dissipation ~ 0.25 W
Tolerance +/- 2 %
Noise immunity (of the process inputs and outputs)
ESD acc. to IEC 801/2 8 kV to front panel
EMC acc. to IEC 801/4 1 kV burst
Destruction acc. to (lEG 801/5), 1 kV to reference potential
draft doc.: lEG TG 65 (Sec) 137

ORDERING DATA

Type designation: 81EU01-E/R1210 Order number: GJF2391500R1210

Technical data subject to change without notice!

22

........................................................................................................................................ ..
~~.~~~~--~~-~.= ... =...=...=...=... ...=...=.. =
~ ... ..
~~~===~========~======-
81 EU01 /R121 0

ASS Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH

p O. Sox 100351 , 0 - 68128 Mannheim

Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462 411 107 ab d

Pnnted in Germany (KWL'E69 Ot95 0.3 BID)

 Module and PROCONTROl P
.. -.~-~-.
Application Description Binary and Analog Control
Signal Processing

Control Module
for Binary Control Function 4-fold
for Analog Control Function 1- to 4-fold
Publication no.
D KWL 6306 92 E, edition 02/93
Replacing D KWL 6306 92 E, edition 04/92 83SR04-E/R1210

Application Features

The module is used for stored-program binary and analog The module address is set automatically by plugging the mod-
control tasks on the drive, group and unit control levels. It can ule into the multi-purpose processing station.
be used for the following applications:
The telegrams received via the station-bus are checked by
- Drive control of unidirectional drives the module for error-free transfer via their parity bits.
- Drive control of actuators The telegrams sent by the module to the bus are provided with
- Drive control of solenoid valves parity bits to ensure error-free transfer.
- Binary function group control The user program is filed in a non-volatile memory (EE-
(sequential and logic) PROM). It can be loaded and changed from the PDDS via the
- 3-step control bus.
- Signal conditioning The module is ready for operation as soon as a valid user list
is loaded.
The module is intended for use in connection with the multi-
purpose processing station.
For communication with the process and the switchgear, the
The module can be operated in three different modes:
module requires the following voltage:
- Binary control mode USNUSB Operating voltage +24 V
(and analog basic functions)
with variable cycle time branched internally into the following voltages:
- Analog control mode US11 Supply of contacts of process interface 1
(and binary control) US21 Supply of contacts of process interface 2
with fixed, selectable cycle time US31 Supply of contacts of process interface 3
- Signal conditioning mode US41 Supply of contacts of process interface 4
with fixed cycle time and disturbance bit output
The voltages US11 ... US41 are short-circuit-proof and de-
The operating mode is selected by means of function block signed to prevent any interaction.
TXT1, which is the first to appear in the structure.
The operating voltages and the external 10~lic signals are re-
In the binary control mode, up to 4 binary function group con- lated to reference conductor Z.
trols or 4 drive controls, or combinations of drive and binary
function group controls can be implemented for each module
(noting the module cycle time). The following annunciations are indicated at the front of the
module via light-emitting diodes:
In the analog control mode, a maximum of 4 analog control
loops in the form of 3-step controllers - depending on the ST Disturbance
regulating time of the actuator - can be implemented for each SG Module disturbance
module (see "Operating modes").
Light-emitting diode ST signals any disturbances in the mod-
The module incorporates 4 hardware interfaces to the switch- ule and in data communication with the module.
gear and the process. Light-emitting diode SG signals module disturbances only.

jl
jill
•••-;";'7'•• __ •

ASEA BROWN BOVERI

- . . . . . . . . . . .m...m... =...m...m... .. =.. ==.. =

~,~. ... =... =... =
...=...=...=...=.. =...........
,~_~_~ ...,..
~.= ... =...m...=...=-
m...m... ........... .
 83SR04/R1210

Module design The operating program enables the microprocessor to perform

the basic operations of the module.
The module essentially consists of the following: The memory for the function blocks contains ready programs
for implementing the various functions.
- Process interface
The function blocks available in a particular operating mode
- Station-bus interface are selected in such a way that the specified task can be per-
- Processing section formed without additional modules. For instance, in the analog
control mode, it is possible to implement a superposed set-
point control in addition to the Single-variable analo!;1 control.
Process Interface
All function blocks together with their inputs and outputs can
In the process interface, the process signals are adapted to be called by the user via the Programming, Diagnostic and
the module-internal signal level. Display System (PODS).
The memory for the Llser program contains information as to:
Station - bus Interface
- how the function modules are interconnected,
In the station bus interface, the module signals are adapted to - which module inputs and outputs are allocated to the inputs
the bus. This essentially involves a parallel/serial conversion. and outputs of the function blocks,
- which constants are specified to the individual inputs of the
Processing section function blocks,
- which parameters are specified to the individual inputs of
In order to process the signals coming from the process and the function blocks,
the bus, the module is provided with a microprocessor which
- which plant signal~; are allocated to the module inputs and
works in conjunction with the following memory areas via a
outputs,
module-internal bus:
- which function blocks serve the process interfaces,
- which sets of limit values are allocated to the analo~~ values,
Contents I Type of - which module input signals are simulated.
memory
I Operating program ' EPROM This information is spt~cified by the user according to the plant
! Function blocks I EPROM involved.
User program (Structu"', add,.." I EEPROM The complete user program is filed for normal operation in an
parameter, limit value and EEPROM. For optimizing purposes, it possible to work with a
simulation lists) modified copy of the user program in the RAM, which must
User program (Structure, address, I RAM then be taken over into the EEPROM upon completion of the
parameter, limit value and ; optimizing process.
!
simulation lists) I Settings (mainly in the analog control) can be either preset by
. Historic values the user directly at the appropriate function block inputs or al-
I Current module input and output ternatively specified in a separate parameter list.
signals (shared memory) When limit Signals are formed by means of function block
GRE, the limit values (4 per GRE) are specified in a limit value
list.

Parameter and limit value lists can be changed (on linH) at any
time during operation In this case, they are stored in the RAM
or the assigned EEPROM, allocated to RAM and EEPFIOM op-
eration respectively.

Data exchange between the module and the bus system pro-
ceeds via the memory for the module input and output signals.
It serves to buffer the signals.

~~~~ .....=.......=.... = =..=... =....=... =....=...=....=...=.... ... .... ... ....

.............................. ... ... .... ....", ~~~~ ,.~====~ ..
 83SR04/R1210

•••:;0;0;0:0•...
Structuring
During structuring, module inputs and outputs are allocated to
the neutral inputs and outputs ofthe individual function blocks,
or constants and parameters or outputs of other function
blocks (calculated function results) are specified to the inputs
of the function blocks. Structuring is performed on the basis of
the data supplied by the user in the form of a socalled struc-
ture list.
The following limit values of the module have to be observed
during structuring:
- max. no. of module inputs 287
- max. no. of simulatable module inputs 32
- max. no. of module outputs 223
- max. no. of calculated function results 255
- max. no. of timers 128
- max. no. of parameters 80
- max. no. limit value sets 16
- max. no. of drive control functions
.... ..-.
~ (binary control, analog control)
e.g. ASE, ASS, ASM and ASI functions 4
- max. no. of group control functions
e.g. GSA and GSV functions 4
- max. no of lines in the structure list 2789
- Length of historic values list (bytes) 768
- Design of shared memory (see" Addressing")
One line means one entry on the PODS.
The proper procedure to be followed for structuring the func-
tion blocks is shown in the Function Block Descriptions.

... ...
.. "'.=~.~~=....' ...........................................'.'.'.. .
~='="'~"'~"'~"'="'="="'="'="'="'~"'="'="'="='.".='.'.'."'
83SR04/R1210

Addressing Incoming telegrams whose addresses are included in the bus

General
The signal exchange between the module and the bus system
takes place via a shared memory. Here, incoming telegrams to
be received by the module and calculated function results
which are to leave the module are buffered.
address list, are written to the sink register of the shared
memory. Incoming telegrams whose addresses are not in-
cluded in the bus address list are ignored by the module.
The allocation list Module inputs includes, for each module in-
put, the associated sink register number and, in the case of
binary values, also thl3 bit position.

The shared memory has source registers for telegrams to be Address list for module outputs to the bus
transmitted and sink registers for telegrams to be received.
Register numbers 0 to 63 are defined as source registers and In the address list for module outputs, a source regist.:H is de-
numbers 64 to 199 as sink registers. fined for each signal to be output from the module, and a
source bit is additionally defined in the case of binary signals,
The allocation of the module input and output signals to the e.g.:
shared memory registers is determined from the PODS on the
basis of data supplied by the user.
Output Address
The user data are in the form of address lists.
AG1 1, 5

Address list for module Inputs

~-- Bit No.
Register No.
(1 - 15)
(0 - 63)
In the address list for module inputs, the source location or the
process interface associated with the signal to be received is
allocated to each module input.

In the case of module inputs receiving their signal via the bus, Addressing of the process Interface for the relay I)utputs
addressing is done by allocating the source location address
to EGn, e.g. In the case of modul'3 outputs supplying their signa.l to the
relay interface, addressing is done in the structure list by al-
Input Address location of ARn, with n denoting the number of the relay inter-
EG1 1, 32, 24, 8, 7 face, e.g.:

I~ Bit No.
Register No.
(0 - 15)
(0 - 255)
Signal
RM2
Output
AR1
Module No. (0 - 58)
Multi- purpose
processing
L._ _ Relay interface 1
("I - 4)
station No. (1 - 249) I Checkback signa.l
System No. (0 - 3)

In the case of module inputs receiving their signal via the pro-
cess interface, addressing is done by allocating the process Formation of address
interface to EGn, e.g.
The system and station addresses are set on the station-bus
Input Address control module and transmitted by this module to all other
EG1 VP2 modules served by a multi-purpose processing station.

I Process interface 2 The module addressHs are defined by connections on the

(1 - 4) backplane, so that each module is set automatically to the
associated address while being plugged into a slot.
In the case of module inputs receiving their signal from the
process operator station, addressing is done by allocating L to
EGn, e.g.:
Limit value list
Input Address
EG1 L The limit value list contains a set of 4 limit values for each of a
I maximum of 16 function blocks GRE (limit signal formation for
Destination telegram from POS
one analog value). It IS stored in the EEPROM and -- in the
case of RAM operati01 - in the RAM.
The address list for inputs is translated by the PODS into two
module-internal lists, the "Bus address list" and the "Alloca- Limit value lists can be changed at any time from thE~ PODS
tion list Module inputs". and POS by way of 3. "Job memory" (RAM). Chan!~es are
stored in the EEPROM in the case of EEPROM operation, and
The bus address list contains all telegrams to be used by the in the RAM in the case of RAM operation. The limit value list is
module, as well as the source location address and the sink taken over from the RAM into the EEPROM, and vice versa,
register number. together with the user list.

4
 83SR04/R1210

"':'~"

Parameter list Diagnosis and annunciation functions

The parameter list contains up to 80 values for parameters of Disturbanl:e annuncIations on the module
the function blocks. It is handled and stored in the same way
as the limit value list. The following annunciations are signalled on the front of the
module by light-emitting diodes (lED):

Designation of LED
Simulation list - Disturbance ST
- Module :listurbance SG
Using the PODS, it is possible to "simulate" at up to 32 module
Light-emi1ting diode ST signals all disturbances in the module
inputs, signals normally received via the bus, by overwriting
and disturtlances in data communication with the module.
them with constant values. This simulation list is handled and
stored in the same way as the limit value list. Light-emi1ting diode SG signals module disturbances only.

Disturbance annunciations to the alarm ,annuncIatIon sys-

tem
Formation of events
The alarm annunciation system and the control diagnostic sys-
The module is requested by the PROCONTROL system once tem CDS n3ceive disturbance annunciations from the control
every cycle to transmit the information filed in the source regis- module via the bus.
ters of the shared memory.
If any values change within the cycle time, this is treated as an DIagnosis
event.
The incoming telegrams, the generation of the telegrams to be
transmitted, and internal signal processing are monitored for
The module recognizes the following occurrences as events:
errors in the processing section of the module (self-diagno-
sis).
- Change of status in the case of binary values
- Change of an analog value by a permanently set threshold In the even·t of a disturbance, the type of disturbance is filed in
value of approx. 0.39 % and elapse of a time delay of 200 the diagnoBtic register and, at the same time, a general distur-
ms since the last transfer (cyclic or event). bance annunciation is sent to the PROCONTROl system.
When requested, the module transfers a telegram with the
If an event occurs, cyclic operation is interrupted and the new data stored in the diagnostic register (regist,er 246) (see Fig.1).
values are transferred to the bus with priority.
The contents of the diagnostic register, the annunciations sent
over the glmeral disturbance line, the annunciations on the
CDS and the annunciation disturbance ST are shown in Fig.1.
Disturbance bit evaluation, reception monitor-
ing

The telegrams supplied via the bus may be provided with a

fault flag on bit position O. This fault flag is generated by the
source module on the basis of plausibility checks, and the dis-
turbance bit is set to "1" in the event that specific disturbances
are present (see Function Block Descriptions).
In order to be able to recognize errors during signal transfer,
the module also incorporates a feature that monitors the input
telegrams for cyclic renewal. If a telegram has not been re-
newed within a certain time, (e.g. due to failure of the source
module), bit 0 is set to "1" in the allocated sink register of the
shared memory. In binary value telegrams, all the binary val-
ues are simultaneously set to " 0". In the case of analog val-
ues, the previous value is retained.

A set disturbance bit does not automatically involve a reaction

in the sink module. If the disturbance bit of a telegram is to be
evaluated, provision must be made for this during structuring.
In the "Binary control" and "Analog control" modes, distur-
bance bits of received telegrams can only be used within the
module. They are not included in telegrams to be transmitted.
In the "Signal conditioning" mode, disturbance bits are also
included in transmitted telegrams.

~=~~~=~=.= ...=
...=...=...=...=...=.. =... =...=...=...=...=...=.. ...=...=...=...=.. =... =...=...=..........................
==~~== ~~~~-- -.= ... =
... = =..
... =
...=...=...=... ,=.. =... =... ==~~~~-----~----
83SR04/R1210

Module working

Diagnostic
register 246
Bit Type CDS annuciations ")
15 S f- Parameter disturbed 6615
14 S f- Process channel disturbed 6600
13 S r- Processing disturbed 6601
12 S r- Checksum error 6602
11 0
10 S f- Timer defective 6604
9 D r- Module restart 6605
8 S r- Bus disconnection defective 6606
7 0
6 0
5 0
4 S r- Sink monitor activated 6610
3 0
2 S f- Event mode disturbed 6612
1 0
I 0 0 ,-----
'---

ST

MQdule dQes nQl ~Q[~

incorrect firmware PROM
Hardware defect Process section
EEPROM not valid
Processing initialization active
~

~
!
I

I
I
>1 r S ST
:::J

MQdyle nQt aQ Qrel2l2~Qle vi~ QYl2

Module transm itter switched off
by 88TVOx
Module addre ss not 0 - 58 !
I
Hardware defe ct Bus adaption --I
-
SG
-
®
>1
T S:SG
::J

L----

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after transmission of the diagnostic re'gister contents
S = Static annunciations disappear automatically on deactivation
o = not used

Figure 2: Diagnostic signals 83SR04

If the annunciation 'Process channel disturbed' appears in the
diagnostic register, this is due to any of the following causes:
- Short circuit at outputs US11 ... US41
*) The control diagnostic system (CDS) provides a description
for every annunciation number. This description provides,
among other data:
- Information on the cause and effect of the disturbance
- Recommendations for its elimination.

This makes for fast elimination of disturbances.

.................................=... ....=... ....=... ....=... ..

~ ~ ~ ~~~~======~

"'~"
Operating statuses of the module
Initialization and bootstrapping with user lists
Initialization is accomplished either by plugging the module
into its slot or after connection of the voltage.
The initialization process causes the module to assume a de-
fined initial state. Light-emitting diodes ST and SG light dur-
ing this process.
No user program is available when the module is started up
for the first time. As a result, the module signals "Processing
disturbed", and the light-emitting diodes ST and SG light.
As a first step, it is necessary to transfer the user program from
the PDDS, via the bus, to the RAM of the module. If this opera-
tion is started with the structure list, the PDDS calls all other
lists automatically. To avoid the transmission of incorrect lists,
the PDDS checks the place of installation and the address be-
fore each transmission job. The module checks every incom-
....
~.
ing list for plausibility.
Now, the complete user program can be transferred to the EE-
PROM by a command from the PDDS.
Following this, the module is ready for operation, and the
light-emitting diodes ST and SG are deenergized.
Normal operation
The module processes the user program filed in the EEPROM.
In normal operation, the signals arriving over the bus and the
process interface are processed in accordance with the
instructions contained in the structure list.
In line with these instructions, commands are output to the
switchgear, and checkback signals indicating the process sta-
tus are transmitted via the bus.
Modification of the parameter and limit value lists
The parameters and limit values can be changed from the
PDDS and, if configured through the POS, from the POS (see
"Limit value list" and "Parameter list").
•• -;> .........
83SR04jR1210
Modificatlion of the structure and address lists
The structure and address lists can be transferred to the
PDDS, modified there and transferred back to the module. To
do so, the following procedure should be followed:
- The module should be in the EEPROM mode
- copy the complete user program from the EEPROM to the
RAM, using the PDDS command "KOP"
- transfer the list to be changed from the EEPROM (or RAM)
to the FDDS, modify
- transfer the modified list to the module, which involves auto-
matic storing in the RAM
- switch tl1e module from EEPROM operation to RAM opera-
tion, using PDDS command "UMS", test new list
- to make new changes, switch again to EEPROM operation,
repeat procedure.
Upon successful completion of the test, the complete user pro-
gram can be transferred from the RAM to the non-volatile EE-
PROM, us ng either of the following commands:
- PDDS cDmmand "Save" (SAV) or
- PDDS cDmmands "Copy from RAM to EEPROM" (KOP)
and
"Switch over from RAM to EEPROM"
(UMS)
"Save" effE!cts copying of the lists and subsequent automatic
switch over to EEPROM, without impairing processing on the
module and command output.
Following a switch over operation with command UMS (from
RAM to EEPROM and from EEPROM to RAM), the user lists in
the RAM and EEPROM are compared. Should any deviation
be detected, the controller and the binary group controls are
switched to "Manual", the memories and timers are reset, and
the commands present at the process interface are deacti-
vated. For changed addresses of module inputs (EGn), the
associated entries in the shared memory are set to zero until
new data Clre received for the first time aft,er switchover.
Simulatiofl
The PDDS permits constant values to be specified to the mod-
ule for a maximum of 32 individual module input signals which
in normal IJperation arrive from the transfer system. In this
case, the sink registers entered in the allocaltion list for module
inputs are overwritten by constants. These simulation data and
the previously entered sink register numbelrs are stored in the
EEPROM in the case of EEPROM operation, and in the RAM in
the case of RAM operation.
The simulation data are also copied when the user lists are
transferred from RAM to EEPROM and vicle versa.
On cancellation of a simulation process via the PDDS, the sink
register number is written back into the allocation list, and the
module continues to operate with the value transferred by the
bus.
7
83SR04/R1210

Command functions Operating modes

Actuation from the control room
The module does not incorporate control room interfaces.
Actuation by a higher-level automatic system
A higher-level automatic system controls the module via the
bus.
The module incorporcites all function blocks required for the
binary control, analog control and signal processing tasks on
the drive, group and unit control levels. A set of function blocks
is specified as "Operating mode" for a particular application.
This is done by mean~; of function block TXT1 which must ap-
pear at the top of the structure list. Next follow text elements
TXT for main function and function designations as well as
processing functions.

Release and protective commands Operating mode Module cycle time Input TXT1

The logic combinations for release and protective commands

I Binary control variable up to STR
i (and analog max. 700 ms
are specified as required for the plant involved. basic functions)
Analog control I fixed:50, 100 REG, x
Command output (and bin. control) 150, 200 X= 50 rns
or 250 ms x= 100 rns
The commands for the drive control functions (binary control
I x =150 rns
or step control) to which the process interfaces were assigned
;x =200 rns
are output via relay outputs B11/B12 ... 841/B42. These actu-
x =250 rns
ate, in conjunction with the command outputs BV1 ... BV4 com-
mon to both command outputs, coupling relays on a two- Signal condl- fixed: 250 ms MWV
channel basis. tlonlng with dis-
turbance bit out-
The voltage for the command outputs B11 /B12 ... B41/B42 is put i
derived for each function unit from a separate, module-inter- ~------~-------~----~
nal voltage. The module cycle time is determined by the number and type
The outputs are short-circuit-proof, protected against mutual of function blocks entered in the structure list. The cycle times
interference, and provided with a protective circuit. indicated as "fixed" am minimum times. They apply whenever
the time resulting from the structure list is shorter.
Checkback signals from the process The actually required time is filed in register 205 and can be
read out via the PODS.
The drive-related checkback signals from the process are The following set of functions can be implemented for each
connected in the case of the drive control functions, to the module:
hardware inputs of the module (see Function diagram and/or
Connection diagrams). - 4 group control functions, e.g. GSNGSV functions or
- 4 drive control funclions, e.g. ASI/ASE/ASS/ASM functions
or
- combinations of drive and group controls are permissible.
The module cycle time should be considered.
In the analog control mode, the following combinations are
possible, depending on the module cycle time chosen:

Operating mode I REG REG REG T REG

150 inS 100 ms 150 ms 200/
Analog control 250 ms
(and binary con- :
trol)
ASI 1 1 2 i
1 2 3 1 i,2 31 4
ASE, ASM, ASS i - <3 - <3 - <3 ',-
The module cycle timE! should be considered.
The 4 process interfaces of the modules including command
outputs are assigned tJ the drive control functions ASE/ASS/
ASM/ASI whose inputs annunciations from the process,
(PRO), are marked "VPn" in the address list. The following al-
location applies:
n =1 Proce~;s interface 1
n = 2 Process interface 2
n = 3 Proce~;s interface 3
n = 4 Process interface 4
The module is connected to the control room through the pro-
cess operator station.

8
 83SR04/R1210

Function blocks for the operating mode Function blocks Abbrev.

Binary control (STR)
LIMIT SIG\lAL ELEMENTS

This operating mode provides the function blocks for all binary Limit signal element for upper limit value GOG
control functions on the drive, group and unit control levels. Limit signal element for lower limit value GUG
Additional analog basic functions are available.
Limit signal generation GRE
The module cycle time is variable, i.e. it is strictly determined
by the function blocks used. ANALOG FUNCTIONS
In this operating mode, no disturbance bits are transmitted, ex-
Absolute value generator ABS
cept in the standard checkback telegrams.
Limiter BEG
Divider DIV
Function blocks Abbrev.
Function generator FKG
BINARY FUNCTIONS Factor variation KVA
Maximum value selector MAX
Switch-off delay element ASV Minimum value selector MIN
•• -.;-•....-0; •• 2 of 3 selection, binary B23 Multiplier MUL
2 of 4 selection, binary B24 Monitoring and select function MVN

M of N selection, binary BMN Delay element, first order PT1

Square root extractor RAD
Extended Bit marshalling BRA1
Summing multiplier SMU
Dual- BCD converter DBC1
Disturbance bit suppression SZU
Dual-Decimal converter DDC
Time variation TVA
Dynamic OR gate DOD Change-over switch UMS
Switch-on delay element ESV
PUSHBUTTON SELECTION FUNCTIONS
Monostable flipflop "Break" MOA
Monostable flipflop "Constant" MOK Pushbutton selection TAW
OR gate ODR Pushbutton selection and target value presetting TAZ
RS flipflop RSR
ORGANISATION FUNCTIONS
AND gate UND
Text element for designation and note TXT
Counter ZAE
Text element for operating mode TXT1

GROUP CONTROL The exact specification of the function blocks as well as the
procedure for structuring are shown in the function block de-
Group control function for sequential control GSA2 scriptions.

Group control function for logic control GSV

Criteria indication KRA1
Criteria indication without watchdog KRA3
Step function SCH1
Preselect function, 2-fold VW2
Preselect function, 3-fold VW3
Preselect function, 4-fold VW4
Select switch, 4-fold WS4

DRIVE CONTROL

Drive control function Unidirectional drive ASE1

Drive control function Solenoid valve ASM1
Drive control function Actuator ASS1

.. ... ... ... ... ...

~~~~~~.~.~====== ..=...=...=...=...=...=...=........ =... -~~--
83SR04/R1210

Function blocks for the operating mode Function block Jllb b rev.
Analog control (REG)
ANALOG FUNCTIONS
This operating mode provides the function blocks for all ana-
log control functions for single variable and master control. In Absolute value generator ABS
addition, the function blocks for drive and group control are Limiter BEG
available.
Divider DIV
In this operating mode, no disturbance bits are transferred, ex-
cept in the standard check back signal telegrams. Function generator FKG

The module cycle time can be preset in steps as fixed mini- Integrator INT
mum time (see inputs in text element TXT1). Factor variation KVA
When implementing several control loops on one module, it
should be noted that the cycle time of the module increases Maximal value selectcr MAX
accordingly. Minimal value selector MIN
To ensure precise positioning in the case of single variable Multiplier MUL
step controllers, the regulating time of the actuator (from 0 -
100 %) must correspond to 200 times the module cycle time, Monitoring and select function MVN
e.g. Differentiator with P-DT1 action PDT
Regulating time > 10 s for a cycle time of 50 ms Delay element, first order .......-.:-.
PT1
Square root extractor RAD
Function block Abbrev.
Summing multiplier SMU
BINARY FUNCTIONS Time variation TVA
Switch-off delay element ASV Change-over switch UMS
2 of 3 selection, binary B23
2 of 4 selection, binary B24 ANALOG CONTROL
M of N selection, binary BMN
Manual station HST
Extended bit marshalling BRA1
PID Controller PID1
Dual-BCD converter DBC1
PI Controller PIR1
Dual-Decimal converter DDC
P Controller PRE
Dynamic OR gate DOD
Switch-on delay element ESV Differentiator with dert.ative action PTV

Monostable flipflop "Break" MOA Setpoint integrator SWI

Monostable flipflop "Constant" MOK Setpoint adjuster SWV1
OR gate ODR Disturbance bit suppression SZU
RS flipflop (with reset input dominant) RSR
AND gate PUSHBUTTON SELECTION FUNCTIONS
UND
Counter ZAE Pushbutton selection TAW

DRIVE CONTROL
Pushbutton selection and target value presetting TAl

Drive control function Unidirectional drive ASE1 ORGANISATION FUNCTIONS

Drive control function Incremental output
with expanded capabilities Text element TXT
ASI2
Drive control function Solenoid valve ASM1 Text element for operating mode TXT1
Drive control function Actuator ASS1

LIMIT SIGNAL ELEMENTS

Limit signal element for upper limit value GOG

The exact specification of the function blocks as well as the
Limit signal generation GRE
procedure for structuring are shown in the function block de-
Limit signal element for lower limit value GUG scriptions.

10
 83SR04/R1210

..-:-"""'"'"-.
Function blocks for the operating mode Function bl()ck Abbrev.
Signal conditioning (MWV)
ANALOG FUNCTIONS
This operating mode provides analog computing functions
and basic binary functions. A separate complete function Absolute value generator ABS
block "ENT" is available to calculate the enthalpy. In addition, Limiter BEG
binary and analog control functions are available.
Divider DIV
In this operating mode, any disturbance bits set to "1" in in- Enthalpy function ENT
coming telegrams are taken over into data telegrams which
are calculated from them and subsequently transmitted. Function generator FKG

The minimum module cycle time is permanently set to 250 ms. Integrator INT
Factor variaton KVA
Function module Abbrev. Maximal value selector MAX
Minimal value selector MIN
BINARY FUNCTIONS
Multiplier MUL
Switch-off delay element ASV Monitoring and select function MVN
2 of 3 selection, binary 823 Differentiator with P-DT1 action PDT
"'~"'" 2 of 4 selection, binary B24 Delay element, first order PT1
M of N selection, binary BMN Differentiator with derivative time
Extended bit marshalling BRA1 Square root extractor RAD
Dual-BCD converter DBC1 Summing multiplier SMU
Dual-Decimal converter DDC Time variation TVA
Dynamic OR gate DOD Change-ovm switch UMS
Switch-on delay element ESV
Monostable flipflop (Break) MOA ORGANISATON FUNCTIONS
Monostable flipflop (Constant) MOK Text element TXT
OR gate ODR Text element for operating mode TXT1
RS flipflop (with reset input dominant) RSR
AND gate UND
Counter ZAE

LIMIT SIGNAL ELEMENTS

Limit signal element for upper limit value GOG

"~'.
The exact s~ecification of the function blocks as well as the
Limit signal generation GRE
procedure for structuring are shown in the function block de-
Limit signal element for lower limit value GUG scriptions .

..;:-. ..
...."

11

..m...m...m...m...m...=
· ............ ·.·.·.·.·.m ...m...m...m...m...=...=.. .=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...~..".=
...=...=.. ======.. ~ = -...
... =...=...=...=...=...=........ ...
~~-.~~~~- .. ~ . -... ~. ........................ ... ...
~~~.~~
..... r X-l
f\) ~ f\)';J' "if}
., "Tl
C ~
Station-bus :-,,(1) en
~ ~ "0 3 :::J :n
o
_ _.+,.;U;.;SI!. USA Z Z
>--
ZO ZO ZD_ SRA * _ ~~ _ _ _ _ _ _
~

:r
co
S-
!!. "0'
r+
.:t.
X11 d30 d32 b32 z32 b02b14 d26d1B I 0. a.
III
:::J
Dl
~
f\)
.....
I
Q, III
0 cD o
'L-

+
83SR04-E/R1210 c:
;::;:
0'
0
..
::J
II)

5"
Q.
ill'
(0
-.
I I III ::J
""
0. III Dl
" User User iii' 3
Processor Shared Parallel/S,enal Opera~lonal Stan~ard functions functions III
memory conversion functions functions EEPROM RAM .0
c:
'C.
"0
I I (!)
0.
:E
;::;:
';J'
0
0
:l
:l
I I (1)
0
.....
0
iii
~
III
:J
I I 0.

I OJ \7 I I Monitor I (1)""
@ 0 0
d::J:J

®0
:l :l :l

ust
(Q(!)(!)
<UU
000
I U!11 U!31 U!41 I
SG ST iifx~
(Q ..... f\)
(1) ..... .....
en 0 _.
Process interface 1 Process interface 2 Process interface 3 Process interface 4 CO:J
CJ>3.Q

f~ f~ f~
» !!!,-§

: .I T
V
,J T4
V
,I J
\7
.I J
\7
:
III ~
:l .... ""
o.';J'e
c(!)(1)
en!!l.en
~a~
ci"
:J
"0
I 0
0

l
0'0
c: (!)
en ~
s· -.
o-+:l
_><21 z02 Z04~06 bOB zOB b.£2 bO~ bOO _ z10 z12 :,14 b16 z16 b!..D b12 b14 _ z1B Z20 Z22 b24 Z24 b1B b20 b22 _ Z26 Z2B z30 b32 z32 b~~ b2B b30 (1)"0
~c
III 0-+
n en
(!) III
811 8128Vl US11STA1E11 E12E13 821 8228V2US21STA2E21 E22E23 B31 B32BV3US31STA3E31 E32E33 841 8428V4US41STA4E41 E42E43 III :l
:Ju.
0.
0
o-+c:
';J'_
(1)"0
* To ensure proper functioning of the module, terminal Xll/d18 has to be connected with ZO (once per sub rack) , o c:
"9~

l
:1
::'
 :'j ;i :'! '\l
:~

oo
::J
::J
Station - bus CD
Q.
o·
::J
Q.

SS IUSA!US8IZ
ni·
SRAIZD ce
m
3
83SR04-E/R1210 c::J
0:
811 81218Vl STAl US11 Ell E12
CD
Q.
Disturbanc hV Lll o·
Plant L21 ::J
L31 ~
F2
f! ~1-f-1!- -IH~g I
I
Q.
....
~.

q
I
I
C
::J
Q.
o·
I
I
::J
C
::J

I~ 1.1--. r
I I
L., : Fl ,1", ~/1
~

.......
....L

1- t-1~2tt tt.-~7~
Al

Al
Switchgear

~
--D .---- A1/2
K1
12
, L12(N) A1 \ 11
K1A K1E
M
~
CXl
Plant w
en
JJ
~
?t
..... ~
w o
-" CXl
() W
"'" 0
:J
en
::D
:J 0
CD ~
Station-bus
....0"
0 ::D
-"
~
:J 0

0-
al"
SRAIZD SS IUSAIUSBIZ ec
.....
Pl
3
83SR04-E/R1210 »
U
c
B11 IB121BV1 STA1 US11 IE13 E11 E12 a
0
.....
Disturbanc • U1 q;
Plant C
~1 :J
~1
F2 U
A1 2 9 8 10 0"
r
I
+ + --I ::J
C
:J
;::;:
I
I
-'-

I
I

I I I I
l : I
F1
I_L_
11 fil
112534 fj7
-.J A1/1

Switchgear

K1 ~
~ , - - . A1/2
K1
ZU U2 A1
12
p p
M

Plant

~
)
 ....:~
.:j
) .~

oo
::J
::J
Station-bus CD
n-
o'
::J
Q.
~-
...,
!l>
3
83SR04-E/R1210 en
o
CD
::J
B121BV1 o
0.:
Disturbance
Plant ~
<
(1)
A1 1 2 9 8 10
I +--1--1 -=+:
c
::J
I
n-
o·
I
I
::J
C

I
::J

F1j-=r
;::t:

l1u
......
I

I I
I 1)..-, r.L, I

1- t-1~J;t i41. r7-1

Switchgear
A1 \..,.
6
LAW
FAl/2
----{--- A1

OJ
Plant Col
(J)
:Il
~
~
~
(]I o
...... () (Xl
OJ w
0 en
:::J :n
::J 0
~
I"
.,.
Station - bus
'".. -
CD
C)

0"
:::J
~
~
0

_r;: zo SS USA USB Z

,
Q.
$i)"
(Q
.....
~
3
83SR04-E/R1210 to)
I
( $!l-
Bl1 B12 BVl Ell E12 CD
STA1/ US11 E13 "C
C)
0
:::J
.....
.-+

0
CD
.....
q;
C

t :::J
C)
.-+
0"
:::J
~ Power unit
C
:::J
;::;:
.......
II 'If

BUS

t Pas 0-\

M ---------------------------~-- -0-1
Pi PI
~ /"1

Plant

J :1
 83SR04/R 1210

....-;-;•. ..
"':"

Mechanical design Contact allclcatlon of process connector )(21

View of the contact side:

Board size: 6 units, 1 division, 160 mm deep
i

Connector: to DIN 41 612 b i

Z

1 x for station-bus connection, 02 E11 B11 I

48-pole, edge-connector type F 04 E12 B12
(connector X11)
06 E13 BV1
I
1 x for process connection, 08 US11 STA1
32-pole, edge-connector type F 1
(connector X21) 10 E21 B21

Weight: ca, 0,55 kg 12 E22 B22

14 E23 BV2
16 US21 STA2
View of the connector side:
18 E31 B31
20 E32 B32
j
-'
22 i
E33 BV3
I
....•~...
X
11
24 I US31 STA3 1
26 E41 841
28 E42 842
30 E43 BV4 j
32 US41 STA4

X
21

17
83SR04/R1210

Side view and view of module front

r::P

[]
ST SG
ST Distturbance
SG Modlule
disturbance

X11

X21

........-.-... ....

ABS
83SR04
Co

OJ EPROM programmed, order number: GJR2390242Pxxxx

xxxx = Position number corresponding to the applicable revision status

'~'.

18
 83SR04/R1210

Technical data

In addition to the system data, the following values apply:

Power supply

Operating voltage Module USNUSB = :~4 V

Current consumption IS = 145 mI-'. + output currents
Power dissipation PV = 3.5 W
Reference potential Process section Z = 0V
Reference potential Bus section ZD = OV

Input values

Direct connections for 4 function units (FU)

Ex1 - Process checkback signal (ENEZ) OFF/CLOSED 5mAat48V
Ex2 - Process checkback signal (EE/EO) ON/OPEN 5mAat48V
Ex3 - Torque monitor CLOSED/OPEN 5mAat48V
.... ~ .. STAx - Disturbance in switchgear 5mAat48V

x from 1 to 4

Output values

CONTACT VOLTAGES
Contact voltages Process section US11 = 48 V / < 30 rnA
for the inputs Ex1, Ex2, Ex3 and STAx US21 = 48 V / < 30 rnA
US31 = 48 V / < 30 rnA
US41 = 48 V / < 30 rnA
x from 1 to 4

Tha outputs are short-circuit-proof and non-interacting.

PROCESS INTERFACE
Voltage supply of the 4 function units
for the command outputs Bx1 and Bx2 24 V
The outputs are short-circuit-proof and non-interacting
and are provided with a protective network
Loading capacity
Bx1 - Command output for OFF/CLOSE IS < 80 rnA
Bx2 - Command output for ON/OPEN IS < 80 rnA
BVx - Common command output IS < 80 rnA
for Bx1/Bx2 (wired return line)
For the connected load resistor
the following limits apply 360 Q < RJoad< 15 kQ
Service life of the relay output stages >20 million switching cycles

COUPLING RELAY AND POWER DRIVERS

IN THE SWITCHGEAR
Wiring:
The wiring from the 83SR04 to the switchgear is laid down
in a cable specification to suit the plant.
The max. length of the line (outgoing and return lines) is 600 m
for a cross-section of 0.5 mm 2 .
The following coupling relays and power drivers
can be used:
Coupling relay R513
Power driver with semiconductor LU370
or coupling relays and power drivers
with the same technical data.

19
83SR04/R1210

Noise Immunity

ESD acc. to IEC 801/2 8 kV to front panel

EMC acc. to IEC 801/4 1 kV burst
Destruction acc. to IEC 801/5 1 kV to reference potential

ORDERING DATA

Order No. Complete module:

Type designation: 83SR04-E/R1210 Order number: GJR2390200R1210

Technical data subject to change without notice!

jlllil
jI,• •
ASEA BROWN BOVERI

ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH

p. O. Box 100351, 0-6800 Mannheim 1
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 3814372
Telex 462411 107 ab d

Printed in the Federal Republic of Gennany (KWI.jE69 0293 0,5 BID)

 Module description PROCONTROl P
"'~"'" Communication

Coupling Module
Serial Interface on the Station Bus

Publication No.
o KWl 6309 90 E, Edition 10/92
Replacing 0 KWl 6309 90 E, Edition 09/90 87T501 - E/R22 ../R23"./R2S ..

Application Module design

Module 87TS01 is a coupling module used for connecting
computers or external systems to the PROCONTROl system.
For this purpose, the module is equipped with a serial interface
••?,,"' type RS 232c or RS 422 through which a POS process opera-
tor station, a PDOS programming, diagnosis and display sys-
tem, a COS control diagnosis system, or another type of com-
puter can communicate with the PROCONTROl system.
The module's scope of action extends over the entire PRO-
CONTROL system.
The application of the various module versions is described in
the relevant application descriptions.
Features
The module can be plugged into any multi-purpose proces-
sing station belonging to the PROCONTROl bus system, and
is equipped with a standard interface for the PROCONTROl
station bus.
This module requires 2 divisions for mounting space. It can be
plugged into subrack slots with address wiring 1 through 58
for the station bus.
The module uses a standard interface for participating in data
communication within the PROCONTROl system.
The telegrams received from the station bus are checked for
error-free transmission.
Using a serial RS 232c interface, the module is capable of
receiving instructions and data coming from a computer in
accordance with a defined protocol, as well as transferring
instructions and data to a computer.
The module essentially consists in:
- Station-bus interlace
- Processing section
- Serial interlace in accordance with RS 23:;:~c or RS 422
Station bus Interface
The station bus interface is responsible for conditioning the
telegrams to be received and transmitted through the station
bus interface.
The module lIses two shared memories:
One shared reception memory for the tE!legrams to be
received and one shared transmission memory for the tele-
grams to be transmitted.
The use of a standard station-bus interface limits the number
of sink telegrams which can be received at the same time to a
maximum of 230, using addresses 0 ... 229 of the shared recep-
tion memory.
The number of source telegrams is limited to a maximum of
200 at addresses 0 ... 199 of the shared transmission memory.
The exact number of sink and source telegrams is given in the
application descriptions for the individual software versions.
The entire data exchange taking place between station-bus
interface and processing section is handled by the shared
memories.
Processing section
Technical fealures are described in the relevant application
description of the individual software versions.

••••-;<.--:-•.••

................ ......=.....=.
~ =~ ..=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=... ....=..
~
87TS 0 1/R22../R23 ../R25 ..
Serial interface
Two 25-pole connectors X1 and X2, both wired in parallel, are
located on the module front.
They both contain one RS 232c interface and one RS 422
interface. However, only one type of interface may be active
per connector.
Each one of these two interfaces contains two channels: chan-
nel 1 and channel 2.
The RS 232c interface is used to connect a computer to the
module. This is done through channel 1 of the RS 232c inter-
face. Either one of the two connectors, X1 or X2, can be used
for this purpose.
Channel 2 of interface type RS 232c cannot be used for inter-
facing a computer.
The RS 422 interface serves the purpose of parallel-connect-
ing up to five 87TS01 modules and connecting them jointly to
the computer using an RS 232c interface.
2
For this purpose, the modules are given a certain module
address specifically for the computer, a so-called coupling
module number.
This coupling-module number helps the computer to distin-
guish the modules jointly connected.
Connection of a computer or parallel connection of several
87TS01 modules requires the use of taylored standard cable
sets.
Among other things, these cables contain circuitry for auto-
matic switchover frorr the RS 422 to the RS 232c interface.
In the absence of specific circuitry, interface type RS 422 will
be active in both connectors, X1 and X2.
Changeover from interface type RS 422 to interface type
RS 232c takes place via the ENABLE line which, in both con-
nectors, is linked to contact 13.
As soon as the BUSEN signal from the ENABLE line is applied
to GND, a switchover to the RS 232c interface will take place in
the connector concer1ed.
 87TS01 /R22 ../R23 .. /R2S ..

The following figures show the contact assignments of con-

nectors X1 anc:! X2 wired in parallel.

Contact assignments of connectors X1 and X2:

-0 SL PE conductor
! +5V +SVpower.upply(m"".1 A)
0
'"0 '!J TxO-l TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL 1 acc.lo RS232C
TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL 2 acc. to RS232C
0 TxO-2
"'0 <D RxO-l RECEIVE DATA CHANNEL. 1 acc. to RS232C
0- RxO -2 RECEIVE DATA CHANNEL. 2 ace. to RS232C
"0 ~ +CO-l CARRIER DETECT CHANNEL. 1 acc.lo RS422 (+)
0- -CD-I CARRIER DETECT CHANNEL. 1 ace. to RS422 (-)
"'0 :D +CTS -1 CL.EAR TO SEND CHANNEL lacc.la RS422 (+)
0- -CTS -1 CL.EAR TO SEND CHANNEL 18ce. to RS422 (-)
<DO + OTR-l DATA TERMINAL READY CHANNEll ace.lo RS422 (+)

....0
0- '" - DTR-l DATA TERMINAL READY CHANNEL 1 ace. to RS422 (-)
0 GNO DV
0'" GNO OV
COo + RTS-l REQUEST TO SEND CHANNEL 1 ace. to RS422 (+)
O~ - RTS-l REQUEST TO SEND CHANNEL 1 ace. to RS422 (-)
.-p:'>.
"'0 +TxD-l TRANSMITDATACHANNEL.laec. to RS422(+)
ON '" -TxO-l TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL. 1 ace. to RS422 (-)
0
-0 .., +RxO-l RECEIVE DATA CHANNEL 1 ICC. to RS422 (+)

-0
0'"
0'"
.. -RxO-l
+TxO-2
-TxO-2
RECEIVE DATA CHANNEL 1 ace. to RS422 (-)
TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL. 2 acc. to RS422 (+)
TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL 2 ace. to RS422 1-)
'"-0 +RxO-2 RECEIVE DATA CHANNEL 2 acc. to RS422 (+)
.., 0'" '" -RxO-2 RECEIVE OATA CHANNEL. 2 acc.la RS422 (-)
ENABLE RS422 _ RS232C. RS232C _ RS422

~
tBUSEN

Active contact assignments for interface type RS 232c:

0
-0 SL PE conductor
!
0
'" 0 ~
TID -1 TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL lacc. 10 RS232C
0 TID -2 TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL 2 acc. to RS232C
"'0 <D RxO-l RECEIVE OAT A CHANNEL 1 ace. to RS232C

0~1
RxO -2 RECEIVE DATA CHANNEL 2 ace. to RS232C
·0
o :
'"0 "'.
0
<DO
.... 0- '"
0 0 GND DV
0'"
"'0
0'"
"'0 '"
0'"
0
-0 ..,
-0
0'"
0'"
.
'"-0
.., "'
0'"
-0 IBUSEN ENABLE RS422 _ RS232C. RS232C _ RS422

3
87TS01 /R22 ../R23 ../R25 ..

Active contact assignments for interface type RS 422:

o
~o
:!
.... 0
0 '!!
0
"'0 <D
o~

"'0 ~ +CO-l CARRIER DETECT CHANNEL' ICC. to RS422 (+)

o~ -CD-I CARRIER DETECT CHANNEL' ace. to RS422 (-)
'"0 o~ '"
+CTS - , CLEAR TO SEND CHANNEL I acc. to RS422 (+)
CLEAR TO SEND CHANNEL' acc. to RSC22 (-)
-CTS-'
"'0 +OTR-l DATA TERMINAL READY CHANNEL 1 ICC. to RS422 (+)

~O
O~ '" - DTR - I DATA TERMINAL READY CHANNEL I acc. to RS422 (-)
0 GNO OV
ON GNO OV
"'0 + RTS - I REQUEST TO SEND CHANNEL I acc. to RS422 (+)
oN - RTS - I REQUES, TO SEND CHANNEL 1 acc. to RS422 (-)
"'0 N +T.D-l TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL I ICC. to RS422 (+)
0
0 .... -T.O- I TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL I ICC. to RS422 (-)
-0 M <I- RxD-l RECEIVE DATA CHANNEL I acc. to RS422 (+)
ON -R.D- I RECEIVE DATA CHANNEL I acc. to RS422 (-)
-0
ON
... + Tx 0 - 2 TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL 2 acc.lo RS422 (+)
N -TxO-2 TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL 2 acc.\o RS422 (-)
-0 +R.0-2 RECEIVE DATA CHANNEL 2 ICC. to RS422 (+)
M
"'
ON - RxO-2 RECEIVE DA Til. CHANNEL 2 ICC. to RS422 (-)
-0 .'BUSEN ENABLE RS422 _ RS232C. RS232C _ RS4~<

.--:"'-''';''.

4
 87TS01/R22 ../R23 ../R25 ..

Annunciation functions Diagnosis

Faults within the module or communication errors are detected
by the module and are signalled appropriately.
For this purpose, the unit can use two ways of fault annuncia-
tion:
- Visible fault annunciation on the module by means of light-
emitting diodes on the module front panel.
- Fault message transferred over the station-bus line for
"SST - general station disturbance".
Throughout the entire PROCONTROL system, it is possible to
diagnose and indicate the status of any module within this
system from a control system operator station.
Module settings
All module-specific and application-specific settings are im-
plemented on the module either by uSing dual in-line
switches or jumpers, i.e. either plug-in type jumpers or wire-
wrap conneGtions are used.

Setting the coupling-module numbers

Annunciations on the module
Up to five 87fS01 modules may be connected in parallel to the
Two red and two green light-emitting diodes are located on
serial interface.
the module front panel:
The couplinq-module numbers are used by the computer to
- Light-emitting diode ST identify the individual modules. This number may be assigned
only once p~r computer.
Red light-emitting diode ST will emit a steady light when-
ever a disturbance has been detected in the area of the The numbers are set at switch S1 using contacts 1 through 4.
station-bus interface.

- Light-emitting diode STV Coupling- Switch settings

module Nc.
Red light-emitting diode STV will emit a steady light when-
ever a disturbance has been detected on the processing S1 :1 :2 :3 :4
•
• .Bj
section of the module. ON
I
Light-emitting diodes are operated by the station-bus inter- 2 S1 :1 :2 :3 :4
face. ON • .~
ST or STV are indicated to the station bus in the form of a •I
"general disturbance" signal transmitted overthe SST bus line. 3 S1 :1 :2 :3 :4

Green light-emitting diodes M1 and M2 indicate operating

ON • • .Iij
statuses of the processing section and are operated by the I I
processing section. 4 S1 :1 :2 :3 :4

M1 indicates that serial output is activated. M2 indicates that

ON
• • I
.=tij
job processing is activated.
5 S1 :1 :2 ::1 :4
For disturbance signalling on the station bus, the "general
disturbance" signal is issued on the station bus using the SST
ON •
•I
:
I
.=tij
bus line .

•• -;0;";-;>••

5
87TS01/R22 ../R23 ../R25 ..

Setting the baud rate Memories and jumpers for memory interfacing

The serial interfaces are capable of operating at different baud Diverse types of memories may be used on memory positions
rates. Ai04 through Ai09 and on position A401.

The basic factory setting for both channels is 9600 baud.

For the various memory types, the appropriate jumpers are
Both channels of the serial interface can be set separately, the provided on the module for interfacing these memories.
respective setting then also being effective for the appropriate
channel of the RS 422 interface.
For each position, the memory-specific jumper assiqnments
Jumpers X7 (wire-wrap connection) and X16 (plug-in are given below.
jumper) apply to channel 1.

Possible settings for channel 1: Position A40i:

This position houses the memory for the bus program of the
Baud rate Jumper Wire-wrap station-bus interface. There are no jumpers assigned to it.
[baud] X16/1 - X16/2 connection

300 open X7/9 - X7/6 Module type: ! Jumper:

600 open X7/9 - X7/5 27256/27C256 ! EPROM 32 K x 8 bit

1200* open X7/9 - X7/4

1200 closed X7/9 - X7/6
Special settings
2400* open X7/9 - X7/3
2400 closed X7/9 - X7/5 The two plug-in jumpers X4 are located on the module (see
also "Mechanical de~;ign").
4800* open X7/9 - X7/2
4800 closed X7/9 - X7/4
They have no application-related purpose, and are used for
9600 closed X7/9 - X7/3 factory-testing of the station-bus interface only.

19200 closed X7/9 - X7/2 Attention: During normal module operation, these two jump-
ers must always be plugged in.

Jumpers X7 (wire-wrap connection) and X15 (plug-in jump-

ers) apply to channel 2. Positions Ai 07, Ai 09:

Possible settings for channel 2: These two positions are used for the variables memory (Ai 07
lOW-byte and Ai 09 high-byte) of the processing section. The
assigned jumper is jumper X6.
Baud rate Jumper Wire-wrap
[baud] X15/i - X15/2 connection
Memory type: : Jumper:=:]
300 open X7/1i - X7/6
62256 RAM 32 K x 8 bit I X6/1 - :<6/2 !

600 open X7/1i - X7/5 ! X6/3 - :<6/4

I

1200* open X7/1i - X7/4 Both positions need to be equipped with the same type of
1200 closed X7/11 - X7/6 memory.

2400* open X7/1i - X7/3

2400 closed X7/1i - X7/5
Positions Ai 06, Ai 08:
4800* open X7/1i - X7/2
4800 closed X7/1i - X7/4 These positions are intended for the program memory (Ai 06
lOW-byte and Ai 08 high-byte) ofthe processing section. The
9600 closed X7/1i - X7/3 assigned jumpers are jumpers X8 and X9.

19200 closed X7/1i - X7/2 Memory type: Jumper:

27256/27C256 EPROM 32 K x 8 bit X8/2 - :<8/3
* Both settings possible. : X9/1 - :<9/2

Plug-in jumper Xii refers to the transmission rate and must 27C512 EPROM 64 K x 8 bit X8/2 - :<8/3
always be plugged in. , X9/2 - :<9/3

6
 87TSO 1/R22 ../R23 ../R25 ..

.....-.-..,.•...

Position A105: Basic module settings and assignments of other jumpers

and connectors

This position is intended for the shared memory. There are no Connector~;:
jumpers assigned to it.

X1 Connector, 25-pole
I Memory type: Jumper: Serial interface acc. to RS 232(: or RS 422
6264 I RAM 8 K x 8 bit -- X2 Connector, 25-pole
1
Serial interface acc. to RS 232(: or RS 422
I 62256 I RAM 32 K x 8 bit -- X3 Connector, 48-pole
Standard station - bus interface SS
i X40 Connector, 50-pole
I
Position A 104: Testing of processing section and processor
i 80186
This position is intended for the user memory. The assigned i 1 - i Male testing connector, 16-pole
jumpers are jumpers X20 and X21. i 16* I Testing of station-bus interfaCE!
I Male testing connector, 22-pole
Memory type: Jumper: I
I Testing of station- bus interfaCE!
i 60* I Male testing connector, 20-pole
2764/27C64 EPROM 8 K x 8 bit X20/2 - X21/4
I
I
i Testing of station - bus interfaCE!
I
I
X21/2 - X21/4

27128 i EPROM 16 K x 8 bit X20/2 - X21/4

X21/2 - X21/4 ,
i I

27256/27C256 EPROM 32 K x 8 bit :X20/2 - X20/1 Jumpers:

I X21/2 - X21/4 I

27C512 EPROM 64 K x 8 bit :X20/2 - X20/1 I No. Meaning i R22 ../R25 .. R23 ..
i X21/2 - X21/1 I X4 Basic setting for I X4/1 - X4/2 X4/1 - X4/2
station-bus I X4/3 - X4/4 ,X4/3 - X4/4
For versions R23 .. and R25 .. this position remains unused. [ interface (clock) I
X5 I Basic setting for I X5/1 - X5/4 X5/1 - X5/4
, processor 80186 : X5/1 - X5/5 X5/1 - X5/5
Basic equipment of the memory positions
I X5/2 - X5/3 X5/2 - X5/3
I X5/2 - X5/12 X5/2 - X5/12
X5/14 - X5/1!5 X5/14 - X5/15 .
i
R22 .. R23 .. R25 .. X6 Variables memory i X6/1 - X6/2 X6/1 - X6/2 I
(see memory I X6/3 - X6/4 X6/3 - X6/4
A104 27C256 interface) i

X7 Baud rate of chan- •X7/9 - X7/3 X7/9 - X7/3 I

A105 6264 62256 62256
nel1 and channel2, I X7/11 - X7/3 X7/11 - X7/3
9600 baud each
A106, A108 27C512 27C256 27C512 (see baud rate ,
i
I
settings) I
A107, A109 62256 62256 62256
X8 Program memory I X8/2 - X8/3 X8/2 - XB/3 i

A401 27C256 27C256 27C256 (see memory i

interface) i ,

X9 Program memory I X9/2 - X9/3 X9/1 - X9/2 I

(see memory
interface) I , I

X11 Baud rate iX11/1 -X11/:~ IX11/1 -X11/2 i

(always plugged in) ,
X15 Baud rate of chan- I X15/1 - X15/:~ I X15/1 - X15/2 :
nel2 (see baud rate I ' .
settings) I 1
X16 Baud rate of chan- X16/1 - X16/2 I X16/1 - X16/2 i
nel1 (see baud rate
I
se·ttings)
..•7"'...,..•.
X20 User memory (see X20/2 - X20/"1 I X20/2 - X20/3 i
i memo~ interface)

I X21 IUser memory (see X21/2 - X21 /4 X21/2 - X21 /4 I

* Interface between station bus and processing section. ~lmory interface) ,

..=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=
--- .. =========~~================
•.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~ ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~ ~~=======~==~.--------
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• r
87TS01/R22 ../R23 ../R2S ..

Function diagram

The module consists of a printed-circuit board (see "Mechani- The two connectors X1 and X2 are located on the front panel.
cal design").
They contain the serial interface and are given the designa-
Connection designations tions SS1 and SS2.

For communication, the module is equipped with three con- Connector X3 comprises the SS standard interface with the
nectors. station bus as well c.s the voltage supply for the module.

Station bus
X3 55
uo+ uo+ ZO 20 ZO
d02 d20 b02 b14 d26

ST Station bus Parallel/serial

5TV adaption conversion

Operating program
Bus adaption
I Address memory

Shared
memory

87 TS01-E
Processing
program

M1 Parallel/serial
M2

Ttl!
Sl : 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 Baud
Rate

X2 5S2 X1 5S1

Connector 2
Serial interface C- - - - _ - - - /
Connector 1
Serial interface

.. ~ ..

8
 87TSO 1/R22 ../R23 ../R25 ..

.... ~ ..

Standard accessories Mechanic:al design

The standard cables and connectors listed below belong to Board size: 6 units, 2 divisions, 160 rnm deep
the 87TS01 module.
Connector: acc. to DIN 41 612
Correct functioning of the possible module combinations is
guaranteed only if the standard accessories are used. 1 x for station-bus connection
48-pole,
891P03 connecting cable edge-connector, type F
(connector X3)
The 891P03 connecting cable is used to connect two 87TS01
modules to the bus. The cable length is 40 mm. 2 x for serial interface
The cable is plugged onto connector X1 or X2 on the module 25-pole,
front panel. edge-connector, type D
(connectors X1 and X2)
The cable is provided with two 25-pole screw-on D-pin
connectors. Weight: approx. 0.55 kg
RS 422 is the type of interface to be used in conjunction with
the 891P03 cable.
View of connector side:
891P04 resistor array
The 891P04 resistor array is designed to ensure defined signal
levels when several 87TS01 modules are connected in parallel. X3
The 891P04 resistor array consists of 20 resistors which are
mounted on a miniature printed-circuit board.
This miniature p.c.b. is accomodated in a 25-pole screw-on
D-pin connector with protective cover. This pin connector is
screwed onto the last free connector, X1 or X2, of the module
configuration used.

891POS connecting cable

The 891P05 connecting cable serves as the connection
between a 87TS01 module and an RS 232c interface device.
The cable is linked to the module by means of a screw-on
25-pole D-pin connector.
Contact with the computer is established by means of a
screw-on 25-pole D-socket connector.
The connecting cable is available in four lengths:

Designation Cable lengths

.. '~".

891 P05/ROO05 5m
891 P05/ROO 10 10 m
891 P05/ROO 15 15 m
891P05/R0020 20 m

Due to the special cable design, switchover to the RS 232c

interface is made automatically.

••••<;';>;"; •••

9
87TS01/R22 ../R23 ../R2S ..

Positioning of adjustable components and memory modules

0
Cl
"'''
[;t] X4

Disturbance,

[ @ST

@STV
station bus intelface
Disturbance,
processing section
+ X3
.. , .....:e ........ ~ <>
.. c
• e •••••• ... ..........
........ ... 0 •••••••••
::>

!f
@Ml
Light-emitting eiiodes,
OJ processing section
@M2
M.
X2l
N .....

ro-
-.X20 ..;:
~~ [ZJ ····:
X1 ····· X1
·.·.
Serial interface SS1
~~ 11l
~
X40
~f I±l 0
~-

ro-
~ X5
... .......
........ .
- ~r ffil I;::
,
~.. .
:. :
I ••

~~
:e
X2 rID ··: X2 Serial interface SS2
Xll
E!l
~f [1J
I~
··.:
X7
............. E!J E:J
;:
XlI; X15 ~
1. .. 4
.-
X9

M
-
X8
M
-
X6 --01
8'r TS01-E
J

For state and position of jumpers, refer to "Basic module settings".

Memory modules (for order numbers see "Application description")

OJ Memory module A401 (EPROM) Bus program, station-bus interface

[ZJ Memory module A 104 (EPROM) User program
I]J Memory module A1OS (RAM) Shared memory
I±l Memory module A106 (EPROM) Operating program of processing section, low byte
ffil Memory module A 107 (RAM) Variables memory of processing section, low byte
lliJ Memory module A108 (EPROM) Operating program of processing section, high byte
[1J Memory module A109 (RAM) Variables memory of processing section, high byte

10
 87TSO 1/R22 ../R23 ../R25 ..

.. ~ ..

Technical data ORDERING DATA for the 87TS01 modul,e

In addition to the system data, the following values apply: Type designation: Ordering number:
87TS01-EIH22 .. GJR2368900R22 ..
Power supply 87TS01-EIR23 .. GJR2368900R23 ..
Operating voltage: UD+ = +5 V 87TS01-EIR25 .. GJR2368900R25 ..
Current consumption, typical: IDtyp = 1.9 A
Power dissipation: Pvtyp = 9.5W This module description also applies to module version
Reference potential, station bus: ZD OV GJR23602C>OR20 ..

Module interfaces Note:

These ordering data refer to the basic module firmware. Func-
SS - Standard interface, station bus, tional differences are described in the individual application
connector X3 description:;.
SS1 - Serial interface acc. to RS 232c or RS 422,
connector X1
SS2 - Serial interface acc. to RS 232c or RS 422, ORDERING DATA for standard accessories
connector X2
871P03 connecting cable
Serial interface acc. to RS 232c
Type designation: Ordering number:
Application: Computer connection
891P03/R0040 GJR2363100R0040
Transmission: Serial transmission
acc. to RS 232c
Transmission rate: 300 - 19200 baud 891P04 resistor array
Transmission distance, max.: 20 m
Type designation: Ordering number:
Input and output values of the serial interface acc. to 891P04/R0100 GJR2363200R0100
RS 232c
891POS connecting cable
Input voltage, max.: +/- 25 V
Output voltage, max.: +/- 12 V Type designation: Ordering number:
Output current: 10 mA
891 P05/ROOOS ... R0020 GJ R2363300R0005 ... R0020
Short-circuit current, max.: 150 mA
Designation of version depending on cable length, see page 8.
Permissible temperature ranges
Operating temperature: o 'C ... 70 ·C
Storage temperature: -40 'C ... 85 ·C Technical data are subject to change without notice!

11

......................................................................................................... , .................. ...

~.,-.=.- ~.,~~,.=,~.,~ ...................
-~.=======~.
87TSO 1/R22 ../R23 ../R25 ..

a 1111
jill_II'
ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH
p. O. Box 100351, D-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 3814372
Telex 462411 107 ab d

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany (KWLlE69 t94 0.5 BID)

...................... ... ...

.~---~ ~~~~~~~~--------------
 Application Description
•• -;O;.~';>••••
Publication No.
D KWl 6321 92 E, Edition 10/92
Replacing D AT 1709 88 E, Edition 04/88
Application
The 87TS01-E/R2313 module functions as a master clock in
the PROCONTROl system, and is set by a radio clock (recep-
tion from the DCF77 time transmitter) and needs to be syn-
chronized. The time received from the radio clock is made
available to the entire PROCONTROl system and serves as
system time. It is transmitted cyclically in the form of time tele-
grams.
The time telegrams containing the system time may be re-
ceived and processed by modules designed for this purpose.
Features
The time telegrams are transmitted cyclically. The current time
is transferred through the RS232c interface from the DCF77
time receiver. Modules which conform to the prescribed time
data format and transfer protocol are suitable for use as
DCF77 time receivers.
The master clock is synchronized by the time receiver every
60 s.
..'~"
Description
Modes of operation
In the R2313 version, the 87TS01 module can be used as a
master clock only. Use of the 87TS01 module's other modes of
operation is not possible.
PROCONTROl P
Communication
Coupling Module
Time Master
87TS01- E/R2313
Every 59th second, a DCF77 time receivElr coupled to the
87TS01 -E/R2313 module through an RS23~!c interface, which
conforms to the prescribed time data format and transfer pro-
tocol, sends the complete time telegram for the subsequent
full minute and, in the 60th second, sends a synchronization
character. Tilis synchronization character is Elvaluated, and the
internal cloc:k of the 87TS01-E/R2313 m()dule is synchro-
nized.
The master clock follows a 5 msec rhythm and is synchronized
to the DCF77 time receiver every 60 sec. Disturbance signals
are generated if the time receiver or the internal clock fail. If
synchronization takes place every 60 sec, the master clock
tends to go slow by < 5 msec. In the event of a failure of the
time receivE,r, the typical inaccuracy of thl~ internal master
clock is 3.4 sec/24 hrs. If a slight inaccuracy is detected, the
master clock is set ahead when synchronization takes place.
Processing
With its internal timer, the processor of the 87TS01-E/R2313
constitutes the master clock. Via the internal timer, the proces-
sing section receives an interrupt every 5 msec which causes
it to increment the time units in the memory. This internal timer
contains the complete data record for the year, month, day,
hour, minute, second and millisecond in 5-msec-increments.
The master clock is synchronized internally by a crystal oscilla-
tor and externally every minute by a synchronization data re-
cord and a control character from the time n~ceiver. Synchro-
nization is carried out by the time receiver only if the data re-
cord is valid. The monitor ensures that the ma.ster clock can be
set ahead only by < 2 min in the event of an inaccuracy. In the
event of a pcsitive inaccuracy within 5 msec to 2 min, the cur-
rent time is obtained by "soft" synchronization of the clock.
This means that the master clock is made to go slow until the
master clock's time agrees with the current time again.
,~====.= ...=.... ... ... .. =
~.~~~ ... =
... ~~----~~-------~------
87TS01/R2313

A distinction is made between the following cases: Initialization

The module is initiali2:ed upon reception of the first data record

! Inaccuracy Synchronization measure
from the time receiver which also sets and synchronizes the
negative .:).t < 0 Clock synchronization with master clock. The module does not send any time tl~legrams
the current time as long as the time receiver is not connected and no valid data
positive 0 > .:).t < 5 ms Clock synchronization with record has arrived.
I the
current time
The module's state of waiting for the first data record from the
positive 5 ms <.:).t < 2 min Soft clock synchronization by time receiver is indica.ted by alternate flashing of the two light-
making the clock go slow emitting diodes M1 and M2.
positive ~t > 2 min Clock synchronization
with the current time

The inaccuracy without external master clock synchronization

corresponds to a typical deviation of 3.4 sec/24 hrs. A consis-
tency code is added to each time data record. The consis-
tency code identifies the system time to be received in the
PROCONTROl system as a single entity.
Changeover from winter time to summer time (daylight-saving
time) and vice versa is done by means of the time data
records sent by the time receiver to the master clock and by
means of the time telegrams sent to the entire PROCONTROl
system.

Addressing and allocation

Allocation of the time and module data to the registers is fixed.

Time data are represented in binary code.

Source register allocation

IRegister Information Telegramm Data I

No. type
I

I Ii 15 14 13 12 11 10
Bit position
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Time value o- 995 msec (1 bit = 5 msec) 0 0 0 0 x x x SB 29
1 Time value 0-59sec 0 0 I) 1 x x x SB 29
2 Time value 0- 59 min 0 0 1 0 x x x SB 29
3 Time value 0- 23 hrs 0 0 1 1 x x x SB 29
4 Time value 1 - 31 days 0 1 I) 0 x x x SB 29
5 Time value 1 - 12 months 0 1 I) 1 x x x SB 29
6 Time value 0- 99 years 0 1 1 0 x x x SB 29

SB = disturbance bit
X = consistency code

2

..... •...
~
Annunciation and diagnostic functions
Faults in the module, in the DCF77 time receiver, and in the
RS232c interface are detected and annunciated by the mod-
ule's diagnostic functions (for details see also the
87TS01-E/R23 .. module description).
Annunciations on the module
Two red and two green light-emitting diodes are located on
the front of the module:
- Light-emitting diode ST
The red light-emitting diode ST emits a steady light when-
ever a disturbance has been detected in the area of the bus
interface and if - after synchronization of the master
clock - no valid synchronization takes place within 5 min-
utes. After time synchronization is resumed again by the
time receiver, light-emitting diode ST will go off again.
- Light-emitting diode STY
.. ~.. The red light-emitting diode STY emits a steady light, if a
disturbance has been detected in the processing section of
the module or if there is a disturbance present in the master
clock
- Light-emitting diodes M1 and M2
The green light-emitting diodes M1 and M2 indicate oper-
ating states of the processing section.
The following states are indicated:
- M1 and M2 continuously off indicates idle state
- M1 and/or M2 continuously on indicates an error status
- M1 and M2 flashing alternately indicates that the module
is in the initialization phase and awaits the first data re-
cord from the time receiver.
Messages in the time telegrams
In case data-related disturbances do occur, the disturbance
bit is set in the time telegrams.
Possible diagnosis functions
The diagnosis cycle interrupts the current processing cycle
when a period of 160 msec to 320 msec has elapsed since the
last diagnosis cycle.
87TS01/R2313
The followin!~ module-specific operations are performed and
the results are filed in the diagnosis registers:
- Function check of the master clock
- Check of the RS232c interface and of thl~ DCF77 time re-
ceiver
- Evaluation of faults and messages, and the relevant entries
in the dia9nosis register.
The 87TS01·-E/R2313 module is capable of generating three
diagnosis telegrams which are filed in regis1ers 246, 211 and
210 of the shared memory.
The diagnosis registers can be read from the control system
operator station. They contain information on the status of the
module and of the connected DCF77 time receiver.
Data contents of the diagnosis register under register address
210:
- The data register provides information on the status of the
DCF77 time receiver transferred last
Data contents of the diagnosis register under register address
211 :
- In the event of a failure of the DCF77 time receiver, the data
register provides information on the dura1ion of the failure.
This is stated in minutes displayed in HEI( code.
Data contents of the diagnosis register under register address
246:
- The diagnosis register provides information on the status of
data communication with the station bus and on the internal
status.
- The diagnosis register contains the standard diagnosis data
of the stat on-bus modules with module addresses GA =
1 ... 58.
Data conten::s of the status register under register address
248:
- The status register contains the standard status messages
of the station-bus modules with module addresses GA =
1 ... 58.
Operation of the module from the process operator station or
the programming, diagnostic and display system is not pro-
vided.
3
87TS01/R2313

Format of the diagnosis telegram under register address 246:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
D D D D D D D
I I I I I I I I I I I I I L I

I Invalid request telegram

Module fault, transmit section

Event mode disturbance

Module fault, subsystem (DCF77 time receiver)

Sink monitor responded

No reception release in the multi-pur-

pose processin!l station

Invalid bring telElgram

Module fault, receive section

Bus interface de,fective

Module restart

Module fault "Time monitoring defective"

Module fault, program memory

Module fault, processing section

The bit positions marked "0" send out dynamic diagnosis messages.

Dynamic: The message is present until the next transmission takes place,
even if the cause of the message no longer exists.

Static: The message is present only as long as

its cause exists.

.................. ... ... ... ... ..

~~~~~~~~~ .. =... =... =...=...=...=...=...=.. ~~==~==~
 87TS01/R2313

Format of the diagnosis telegram under register address 211 :

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ? 6 5 4 3 2 0

1°:°:°:< 0:<0:0:0:0:0: 0:0: 0: 0'< OK status: No module-related fault present (in diagnosis reg-
ister 246, bit 3 is also 0).

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ? 6 5 4 3 2 0
Fault status: The duration of a failure of the DCF7? receiver is
indicated in HEX code.
I :;:I:;:I:;:I :;: I Failure time in minutes (45 days maximum can be indicated).

O-F O-F O-F O-F

.•••?:':".••

Format of the diagnosis telegram under register address 210:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ? 6 5 4 3 2 0

000 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Announcement
Switch-over - - > summer time / winter time
or - - > winter time / summer time

log. 1: summertime
log. 0: winter time

o 0 Code 0: time/date invalid

o 1 Code 1: quartz crystal operation
1 0 Code 2: mdio operation (simple accuracy)
c'Jntrolled by DCF7?
Code 3: Radio operation (high accuracy)
c'Jntrolled by DCF7?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ~~~-~=~~~~~~---~
87TS01/R2313

........-.;>.-••

Module settings, connection diagram

//DCF77
The PROMs A401 , A 106, A 108 used for the R2313 version are
plugged unto the positions provided. ~~
The time receiver is connected to the module front using con-
(~\ Time receiver
nector X1 or X2. with RS232c
~I;/ Interface

In the example depicted on the right, the time receiver is con-

C:able
nected through connector X1 with interface SS1. connection

For fault-free operation, the time receiver is to be set as fol-

lows:
X1 SSl X2 8S21
Interface selection: RS232c
Transmission rate: 9600 baud 87TS01
Module No.1 ... 5
Transmission format: Parity even
1 start/stop bit X3 S8
8-bit word length
Output format: Every minute,
sends time/date
with control characters
< Station bus "
v

32-pole SL X1 1
connector L. ~

3a RxD T-D-l 2
II)
2a TxD R-D-l 3 :::I
_.Q
Radio clock 87TS01 c
HOPF6020 R2313 -~as
7a GND GND 7 ;;;
31a,c 32a,c '-'
;.
Lfr
+5V GND
""

6
 87TS01/R2313

..... ...
~

Cable connection Active contac:t assignments for interfaces type RS232c:

Pin assignments on module 87TS01 at connector X1

("0" type connector, 25-pole) as shown on the right. o
Active contact assignments for interfaces type RS232c
~ SL. PE conductor
-0 ;!
achieved by mounting a jumper connecting contacts 13 and N 0
0 T--D-1 TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL 1 ace. to
20. ~
0 RS232C
"'0 R.. D-1
0- '" RECEIVE DATA CHANNEL 1 a,;e. to RS232C
Pin assignments on the time receiver: ·0 ....
O-
"'0 lD
Cable specifications depend on the time receiver used. 0-
"'0
....0
'"
0-
0
GI~D OV
ON
"'0
o~
"'0 N
0
ON
-0 ...,
-0
N
ON
ON
.
-0
., '"
ON
{BUSEN ENABLE RS422 __ RS232C, FlS232C ___ RS422
L/
0

Data format

I
Consecutive bit position Meaning i

character No. I 7654 321 0 i

I
!
1 i 0000 i 0010 STX (start of text)
status (see diagnosi8 register 210, bit 0 - 3)

===J
I
2 I XXXX I
3 XXX X XXXX Day of the week (not used here)
"'~'"

4 001 1 Tens unit position (A8CII) I

==
5 001 1 Units position, hours (ASCII)
6 001 1 Tens unit position, minutes (ASCII)
7 001 1 it
Units position, minutl3s (ASCII)
0011 Tens unit position, seconds(ASCII)

===
8 I
9 001 1 i Units position, seconds (ASCII)
10 001 1 I Tens unit position, day (ASCII)
11 001 1 Units position, day (ASCII) I

12 001 1 Tens unit position, month (ASCII)

I!
I
I
13 001 1 ! Units position, month (ASCII) I

l 14 001 1 Tens unit position, year (ASCII)

I 15 001 1 Units position, year (ASCII)
16 0000 1 01 0 LF (line feed)
17 0000 1 1 01 CR (carriage return)
18 0000 I 001 1 ETX (end of text)

The data are sent in 8-bit ASCII format, and are secured with parity even.
X = any (not used)

.............................................. .. ...
~~~~~
87TS01/R2313

Technical data

The data for the 87TS01-E/R23 .. module (see module de-

scription) are applicable with the following additional specifica-
tions:

Timer connection Radio clock (e.g. HOPF 6020) acc. to GKWN00025Ei

with reception from the DCF77 time transmitter
via the RS232c serial interface

Transmission rate 9600 baud

Cable type for connecting line RD-Y(St)Y, 4 x 0.22 mm 2

Master clock

Deviation from current time 1 msec

with synchronization

Inaccuracy
with synchronization, every minute typo 2.2 msec/ max. 4.8 msec
upon loss of synchronization, T = 25 DC typo 3.4 sl max. 6.9 s: in 24 I1rs.
T = 70 DC typo 5.9 sl max. 13 s in 24 hrs.

Time resolution 5 msec

ORDERING DATA

Order No. for the complete module:

Type designation: B7TS01 - E/R2313 Order number: GJA2368900R2313

Order No. of plug-in memory modules:

Memory module, position A 106 Order number: GJA2352B09Pxxxx

A108 GJA2352810Pxxxx
A401 GJA2352804Pxxxx

Pxxxx = Position number indicating the

applicable program version.

Technical data subject to change without notice!

ASS Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH

p. O. Sox 100351,0-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462 411 107 ab d

Printed in the Federal RepubliC of Germany (KWUE69 t 193 0.2 BID)

 Application Description
Publication No.
D KWl 6317 92 E, Edition 10/92
Replacing D AT 1721 88 E, Edition 09/90
Application
The module 87TS01 is a coupling module, which serves to
connect computers to the PROCONTROl system. By means
of the module version R2340 it is possible to couple a Process
Operator Station (POS) to the PROCONTROl station bus via a
serial interface type RS 232c. The whole PROCONTROl sys-
... ~.".
tem is within the module's sphere of action. Data exchange
with the PROCONTROl system has to be activated by the Pro-
cess Operator Station POS.
Features
The module is designed to load a maximum of 230 addresses
of sink telegrams to be received. The addresses of the sink
telegrams are assigned to addresses O.. .229 of the receiving
shared memory.
If the number of addresses to be loaded simultanously is not
sufficient, it is possible to connect in parallel a maximum of 4
modules 87TS01 via standard interfaces RS 422.
The number of the modules which may be used in parallel is
determined by the application with the connected Process
Operator Station.
Description
.......,.,.......
Processing
The coupling to the Process Operator Station is effected by the
processing section of the module in conjunction with the serial
interface to standard RS 232c.
The entire data exchange between station bus adaption and
processing section is effected via the shared memories.
The connection to the station bus can be accomplished in any
PROCONTROl connection station. It is possible to connect up
to 4 modules 87TS01 /R2340 in parallel and to the Process Op-
erator Station via a serial interface to RS 232c.
"'~"
PROC:ONTROL P
Communication
Couplling Module
Connection of Process Operator Station
to the Station Bus
87TS01 - E/R2340
All transfer procedures via the V 24 interface are initiated by
the Process Operator Station in the form of jobs according to
a specified protocol.
With each c::lUpling module it is possible to perform the follow-
ing data exchange within the entire PROCONTROl system:
- listening in to a maximum of 230 PROCO NTROl telegrams
The listening-in address list provided by the Process Oper-
ator Station is secured against data corruption by means of
a CRC checksum.
- Modificat on of threshold values for listening-in telegrams
of analog values with individually adjustable time-out.
The threshold of modification is adjustable within 0 % ... 6 %
in steps of 0.05 %, the time-out within 0 s ... 10 s in steps
of 80 ms.
The basic setting for threshold values is 1 % and for the
time-out 1 S.
- Suppression of analog values with frequently changing dis-
turbance bit.
Analog values, whose disturbance bit cha.nges more than n
times in m seconds are not transferred to ·the Process Oper-
ator Station.
nand m are specified by the Process Operator Station;
n = number of changes from 1 to 127; m is adjustable be-
tween 80 ms and 10 s in steps of 80 ms.
Analog v8.lue changes exceeding the modification threshold
and the time-out are transferred even in case of activated
suppression.
After the end of the suppression (the disturbance bit of the
corresponding analog value has returnee to changing less
than n times in m seconds) the current analog value tele-
gram is transferred to the Process Operator Station.
Basic set1ing: no suppression.
The setting values for the suppression are specified by the
Process Operator Station.
 87TS01/R2340
- Suppression of binary value signals with frequently chang-
ing binary values (disturbance suppression).
Binary value telegrams whose contents changes more than
i times in k seconds, are not passed on to the Process
Operator Station.
i and k are specified by the Process Operator Station;
i = number of changes from 1 to 127; k is adjustable be-
tween 80 ms and 10 s in steps of 80 ms.
In case of activated suppression the corresponding binary
value telegram is, however, transferred once every k sec-
onds.
After the end of suppression (the contents of the respective
binary value telegram has returned to changing less than i
times in k seconds) the current binary value telegram is
transferred to the Process Operator Station.
Basic setting: no suppression.
The setting values of the suppression are specified by the
Process Operator Station.
- Reading registers of PROCONTROl modules.
- Writing into registers of PROCONTROl modules, e.g. for
command outputs with and without check-back of the
transferred data.
- Reading lists of PROCONTROl modules, e.g. limit value
lists and parameter lists.
- Writing lists of PROCONTROl modules, e.g. lists of limit val-
ues and parameters.
- Display of signals and simulation.
Addressing
The addressing of the module is carried out in two directions,
because of its interface to two systems.
- The addressing in the direction of the PROCONTROl bus
system is carried out automatically as a function of the in-
stallation slot of the module.
- The addressing in the direction of the serial interface is done
by setting the coupling module number at module 87TS01.
If several modules are connected in parallel via interfaces
RS 422, different coupling module numbers must be assigned
so that the computer is able to distinguish between them.
Addressing in the direction of the bus system is still carried out
automatically, based on the new different installation slots of
the module.
For detailed information on addressing see the chapter "Mod-
ule Adjustment" in the 87TS01 module description.
...................................................................................................................
Initializing
Initialization of the module is carried out in two phases which
are both passed through automatically.
In the direction of the bus system the module is initialized
automatically when it is connected to the power supply; this
happens when the module is plugged into its slot.
While the initialization is under way all light-emitting diodes of
the module are on. After successful initialization the lED's go
out.
Initialization of the module in the direction of the computer is
also automatic; it is carried out by the Process Operator
Station via the serial interface.
Allocation of the shared memory
The module is provided with two shared memories.
A receiving shared memory for telegrams which are to be re-
ceived and a transferring shared memory for telegrams which
are to be transferred.
Due to the use of a standardized station bus adaption, the
number of sink telegrams to be received simultaneously is lim-
ited to a maximum of 230 at the addresses 0 ... 229 of the re-
ceiving shared memory.
In the POS application, only system-internal data - e.g. for
diagnostic purposes - are transferred from the transferring
shared memory.
Sink Register Allocation:
- A special feature compared with other station bus modules
is that no permanently specified bus addresses stored on
an EPROM are used here.
- The bus address list of the module is stored in a RAM and
specified by the computer via the processing section.
Command outputs to the bus system
Commands from the Process Operator Station are transferred
to module 87TS01 together with destination address and data.
Module 87TS01 passes them on to the bus system as an
event.
Transfer of lists of parameters and limit values
lists of parameters or limit values can be read and modified
from the Process Operator Station in the PROCONTROl mod-
ules according to a specified protocol.
 87TS01/R2340

Annunciation Functions and Diagnosis The two green light-emitting diodes M1 and M2 indicate the
operating status of the processing section:

- Light emitting diode M1

Malfunctions of the module and of the RS 232c interface are
detected and signalled by the diagnosis function (see Module The green LED M1 comes on when a data transfer with the
Description 87TS01/R23xx). Process Operator Station via a serial interface RS 232c
takes place.
- Light emitting diode M2
The green LED M2 is alight when job processing is under
way in the operating section of the module.

Signals appearing on the module In addition, the light emitting diodes M1 and M2 indicate the
following statuses:

Two red and two green light-emitting diodes are provided at

the front side of the module. - M1 and M2 permanently off indicates the idle status.
- M1 and/or M2 emitting a steady light Signal indicates a fault
- Light-emitting diode ST status.

The red LED ST emits a steady light signal when a distur- - M1 and M2 flashing alternately once every second indicates
bance is detected in the area of the station bus adaption or a fault status during initializing.
when the sink time monitoring responds.
The monitoring function of the processing section ensures a
- Light-emitting diode STV re-initialization by the Process Operator Station in the event of
The red LED STV emits a steady light signal when a mal- disturbances in the proceSSing program. The transfer via the
function of the processing section of the module is detected. serial interface is safeguarded by a checksum; if transfer errors
occur the disturbed telegram is repeated.

The light-emitting diodes ST and STV are controlled by the The diagnostic functions of the bus adaption are specified in
station bus adaption. Module Description 87TS01/R23xx .

.•••7'"": ••.

'.~ ......=... =
....=... =....=...=....=...=....=...=....=...=....=...=....=...=....~ ....=... =....=..".=
....~.~~~~=== ....=...=....~
...=....=...=....~..~.=
.. ~~.. .~,~.
87TS01/R2340

Connection Diagrams

The specified standard cables shall be used for connection of

the module.

Combination of one module 87TS01 and one Process

Operator Station at the station bus By using standard cable W1 it is ensured that an interface ac-
cording to RS 422 is present at the connector. For access by
The Process Operator Station can be connected either to con- the Process Operator Station any of module numbers 1 .. .4
nector X1 or to connector X2. may be selected.

,,--- o1 W102
Process
Operator
Station
.------....,

RS232 ~/
-'l Line amplifier
~RS42~
l W1

X1 SS1 X2 SS1 I
87TS01
Module No.1 ... 4

X3 SS

A
Station bus "
v
"

4
 87TS01/R2340

Combination of several 87TS01 modules with one Process
Operator Station at the station bus
The following example shows the connection of three 87TS01
modules in parallel and their common coupling to one Process
Operator Station. Up to four 87TS01 modules may be coupled
in this way.
For coupling the Process Operator Station with the standard
cable W1 connector X1 with interface SS1 is used in this case.
The connecti::m to the next 87TS01 module is established by
means of standard cable 891P03 via connector X2 with the in-
terface SS1. 13y the use of standard cable 891P03 it is ensured
that an interface according to RS 422 is present at connector
X2.
The modules connected in parallel have to be assigned differ-
ent couplinfl module numbers (see module description
87TS01/R23)(x) in order to enable the Process Operator Sta-
tion to distin~luish between them. If several modules are con-
nected in parallel the last free connector of this combination
must be fitted with a bus termination module in the form of
plug 891P04. This plug includes the necessary resistor net-
work.

",,--'
o W102
Process
Operator
Station
~--...,

RS 232 ..-;.:-/
~ Line amplifier
~RS422
W1 891P03 891P03

(I 11 (r 11 891P04

X1 SS1 X2 SS1 X2 SS1 X1 SS1 X1 SS1 X2 S81

87TS01 87TS01 87TS01

Module No.1 Module No.2 Module NO.3
X3 88 X3 S8 X3 8",)

•• -7'"'"•.•
"
Station bus
:>

5
87TS01/R2340

Ordering Data

Ordering data of complete module Type: 87TS01-E/R:2340 Order No.: GJR2368900R2340

Ordering data of the plug-in memory modules

(Basic firmware Rxx40)

Memory module Order number

i Bus adaption section . GJR2352816Pxxxx
. Processing section low ·1GJR2352812Pxxxx
Processing section high GJR2352813Pxxxx

Pxxxx = Position number according to the respective valid re-

vision status.

Ordering data of standard accessories

Connecting cable 891P03 Type: 891P03/R0040 Order No.: GJR2363100R0040

Resistor network 891P04 Type: 891P04/R0100 Order No.: GJR2363200R0100

Signal cable W1 max. length 500 m Type: W1 (RS 422) Order No.: GKWE601 ~j27R .... *

Signal cable W102 max. length 50 m Type: W102 (RS 232) Order No.: GKWE602052R .... *
* Version number = cable length in cm.
For ordering prefabricated cable longer than 99.99 m
= 9999 cm, the length of the cable concerned has
to be indicated in clear text.

Line amplifier MFI Type: MFI-GN24/ Order No.: GKWNOOO:~03R0001

RS422/2/D/O/U/S

Technical data are subject to change without notice!

6
87TSO 1/R2340

ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH

p. O. Box 100351, D-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462 411 107 ab d

Printed ,n Germany (KWLJE69 1194 0,3 BID)

 Module and Application PROC:ONTROL p
.:...~...
Description Communication

Control Room Coupling

Module
for Operating Sections of Groups and
Drives, 4fold, Lamp Output ~~.4 W or
Publication No.
LED Display
OAT 171088 E. edition 09/90
Replacing 0 AT 171088 E. edition 06/88 87WF01-E/R1515

Application The operatirg voltage US and the lamp outputs are related to
the referenCE! conductor Z.
The operating voltage UO + is related to ttle reference con-
The module serves to couple control modules to the control ductor ZO.
room. It is used whenever the push-button commands to the
control modules or lamp signals from control modules are The operating voltages US12 and US34 are short-circuit-
transferred via the bus . proof with typically 100 mA at 24 V and thElrefore require no
•••:.0;0:-;.•..
separate fusl~s.
(he module incorporates four function units with three push- .
button inputs and three lamp outputs each. Two function units The lamp or LED outputs are short-circuit-proof and are free
can in each case be interconnected. Such a combination en- from interaction.
ables the module to communicate with control modules hav-
The following malfunctions are indicated 011 the front of the
ing four pushbutton inputs and four lamp outputs.
module by light-emitting diodes:
Pushbutton commands and lamp testing can be released ei-
- Module disturbance (ST)
ther jointly for all function units through hardware inputs or
- loss of thl~ voltage US12
separately for each function unit through the bus.
- loss of thl~ voltage US34
By altering a plug-in jumper each module output can be indi-
vidually changed over from lamp operation to lED operation
(see "Annunciation functions").
Operatin~l modes

The module's four function units can operate either in the

single or in t1e double mode. Changeover between operating
Features modes is effHcted with switches.

The module may be plugged into any multi-purpose process-

...=.. :ng station of the PROCONTROl bus system. It incorporates a
standard interface to the PROCONTROl station bus.
The module checks telegrams received through the station
bus for error-free transfer on the basis of their parity bits. The
telegrams sent by the module to the station bus are assigned
parity bits to ensure error-free transfer.
Single modI!
In single mOje, each function unit operates separately. Three
push buttons Tx1, Tx2 and Tx3 and three lamps Lx1, Lx2 and
Lx3 can be connected to each function unit (x = No. of the
function unit:.

For communication with the operator's console. the module
requires the following voltage:
US Operating voltage + 24 V
Split internally into the power supply for
US12 push buttons of function units 1 and 2
US34 push buttons of function units 3 and 4
Double mace
In the double, mode, function units 1 and 2. and/or 3 and 4 are
combined. In this way, a fourth pushbutton input or a fourth
lamp output is assigned to function units 1 and 3. The fourth
pushbutton input corresponds to pushbutton input T21 and/or
T 41 while thE! fourth lamp output corresponcls to lamp output
L21 and/or l41 of function units 2 and 4.

ASEA BROWN BOVERI

 87WF01

Mode selection The following table srows the allocations of data types to
standard functions.

The operating mode to be selected depends on the type of Standard functions Data type
standard functions to which the function units are connected.
Allocation of the operating modes to the standard functions is ASS. ASE. ASM. ASI, ASP 12
shown in the following table. GSV. GSA. 12
SI;W. HST. P1R2. PID2. SWI 14 (High Byte)
VW2, VW3. VW4. WS4 14 (low Byte)
Use of individual pushbuttons 12
Standard functions Operating mode
Single Double The data type is selected by means of switch contacts
ASS. ASE. ASM. ASI. ASP x S106/1-4
GSV. VW2. VW3
SWV. HST. PIR2. PID2. SWI
GSA. VW4. WS4
x
x
x
Data
type
Function
unit
..
1 •I 2'• 3'I 4'•
Use of individual pushbuttons x S601: : 1: 2: 3: 4:

For activating the standard functions TAW and TAZ. the oper-
DA 12
DA 14
Ol\j
OFF t[IIIIIIE
ating mode to be selected depends on the standard function
to be activated. Activation of the signalling lamps LM (Lx3)

The modes are selected by means of switch contacts S601/5 The LM signalling sel,~or switch is active for data type 14
and S601/6. only. It ensures conneGtion of the Signalling logic to Ul;t (Lx3).
Refer to the table below tor the settings applicable to the vari-
ous function modules:

Operating mode Function 112: 3/4

unit Standard function LM signalling Data type
+' + ON OFF
S601: 5 6 SWI, HST, PIR2. X 14

I I I fI I M
: Single mode PID2, SWV1, SWV2 High Elyte
ON :
i Double mode OFF
I VW2, VW3, VW4, WS4 X 14
Low Byte

The defined operating mode is stored as binary information in

Note:
a particular memory location and is made available to the
control system operator station. Since the switch S601 f7 acts on all function units, one and the
same 87WF01-E/R1515 may not activate VW2, VW3, VW4,
WS4 and the above-mentioned control functions, too.
Data type selection
LM signalling with da:a type 14 is achieved by means of the
switch S601/7.
In PRO CONTROL. the standard telegrams belonging to data
types 12 and 14 are used to transfer the pushbutton com- Command issuing
mands through the bus. The data typedepends on the type of
S601: 7
standard function to be activated.
LM signalling
on
Attention should be paid to the tact that. when using the stan-
dard telegram of data type 14. various other functions are also off
activated depending on whether the pushbutton commands
are located in the high byte or in the low byte.

The data type, and thus the assignment of the pushbutton in-
puts to the bit positions in the standard telegram. can be set
for each function unit.

, ................................................ . .......................
 87WFQ1

Command functions Alternatively, it is possible to preset the puSh-button com-

For all tour function units, the pushbutton commands Tx1, Tx2
and Tx3 are always connected directly to the module (x =
number of the function unit). In the double mode, the pushbut-
ton Input T21 and/or T41 is connected to function unit 2 and/
or 4 as the fourth pushbutton input of function unit 1 and/or 3.
The pushbutton commands TF and TL may be connected
jointly to the central inputs TF and TL for all function units. To
connect a continuous release Signal to the input TF. this input
must be linked to US.
mands TF, TL and TO separately for each function unit via the
bus. In this case, the central pushbutton input TF has no effect
on the function unit concerned.
The pushbutton commands Tx 1, Tx2, Tx3, TO and TL are
converted into standard telegrams of data ::ype 12 or 14 de-
pending on the data type selected, and are written into partic·
ular registers of the shared memory (see "data communica-
tion").
Allocation 01 the pushbutton commands to the bit positions in
the standaro telegram is shown in the following table.

Type 01 Intorma- 8A DA
Address word Data Wo,d IBIt Add'''''SI
lion

Sy' Sta· MOd· Regl·

IS 14 13 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I 0
stem tlon ule Sler

PUShbutton Input
Isingle mOdel E 12 a a a 0-3 0 0 0 TF TO TH T20 Tl0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S8
..? .........

MOdule· spectllc
deslgnallon
0 0 0 0 TF TO T13 r12 111 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 S8

I 0 0 0 TF TO T23 T22 T21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S8

2 0 0 0 TF TO T33 T32 T31 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S8

3 0 0 0 TF TO T43 T42 T41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S8

pusbunon Input ',20

E 14 a a a 0-3 0 0 0 TF 0 TH 110 0 TF T4 T3 T2 T1 0 S8
Islngle mOdel

MOdule· speclrlc
0 0 0 0 TF 0 T13 "12 Tll 0 TF 0 T13 Tl2 TIl 0 S8
designation

I 0 0 0 TF TO T23 ~'22 T21 0 TF 0 T23 TZ2 T21 0 S8

2 0 0 0 TF TO T33 1"32 T31 0 TF 0 T33 T32 T31 0 S8

3 0 0 0 TF TO T43 1"42 T41 0 TF 0 143 r42 T41 0 S8

Pushbutton Input
(double mOde) 0 14 a a a 012 0 0 0 TF 0 TH ,.20 TlO 0 TF T4 T3 T2 11 0 S8

Module-specIfic
designation
a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TF T21 T13 TI2 TIl 0 S8

FEI +2

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a a TF T41 133 'r32 T31 0 S8

FE3+4
I

DA = Data type
SA = Mode
a = Address may be chosen freely
(depending on installation location)
SS Disturbance bit
E Single mode
D Double mode
FE Function unit

~=~.= ~ ... ............... ,.......... .

87WF01

Annunciation functions

Lamp/LED activation
Each module output (L 11 ... L43) is converted separately to The lamp telegrams received are stored for each function unit
LED mode by altering a plug-in jumper. according to the aljdress. The lamp telegrams include all in-
formation about thEtlamps' desired operating state. Each item
The LED output signal (default 10 mNUS = 24 V) can be al- of information con~ists of up to 3 bits:
tered by means of a resistor (Rl10. R120 ... R430) fitted onto
solder pins.
- No bit set Lamp off
Pin settings (Xl1. X12 ... X43):

-
- BLS set Flashing disturbance light
Jumper inserted between 1 and 2:
Lamp operation 100 mA/US = 24 V t 2
• I 3
- Bll set: Running light

- Dl set: Steady light

Jumper inserted between 2 and 3:
LED operation 100 mA/US = 24 V
--. I•
2
+3
These control signals are used to switch the flashing frequen-
cies to the lamp OL tputs via a lamp logic.

Annunciations to the operator's console To this effect a suitable flashing voltage must be connected Il
input BlS. The running light voltage Bll is derive.j from BlS
The lamp outputs Lx 1, Lx2 and Lx3 of each function unit are within the module.
allocated permanently to the bit aSSignments of the lamp tele-
gram of data type 24. In double mode. the lamp output L21
and/or L41 of function unit 2 and/or 4 is connected as a fourth
lamp output of function unit 1 and/or 3.

The allocations are shown in the following table.

Type 01 Inlor· DA 8A
Address word Dala WOrd (1111 Addresst
mallon

Sy·
stem
Sla·
110n
Mod·
ule
Regl.
ster
15 14 13 12 I 11
1
10 9
I I 8
7
6
I I
5 4 3
I 2
11
0

Lamp
OUlpulS 24 E a a a 6<1-67 0 0 0 8LL4 8lS4 014 8LL3 8LS3 D1.3 8LL2 8LS2 DL2 8LL1 8LSl DL1 58
l4 l3 L2 L1

Module
speclnc 6<1 0 0 0 0 0 0 L13 l12 111
designation

65 0 0 a L23 L22 L21

66 a a 0 1.33 1.32 1.31

67 0 a a 0 0 0 L43 L42 l41

Lamp
OUlputs 24 0 a a a 6<1-67 0 a a BLL4 BLS4 DL4 8LL3 BLS3 0:..3 8LL2 BL52 DL2 8LL1 8LSI DL1 58

Module
specifiC 6<1 a a a L21 L13 L12 111
designation

66 0 0 0 l41 1.33 1.32 L31

DA = Data type
BA = Mode
a = Address can be chosen freely
(depending on installation location)
S8 Disturbance bit
E Single mode
o Double mode

•••• 0;<;....-:-••
pecial functions of signalling lamp Lx3
The disturbance annunciation lamp LM is allocated to annun-
ciation lamp Lx3 for all standard functions with the exception
of the preselection functions and the selector switch. Distur-
bance signalling by annunciation lamp LM is regardless of
whether the lamp has been activated via the control room in-
terface of a control module or by way of a control room cou-
pling module. To ensure uniform signalling, annunciation
lamp Lx3 is therefore provided with a special logic.
The annunciation lamp responds when:
- the module's diagnosis circuit responds
- the disturbance bit is set in the lamp telegram
- the voltages US12 and/or US34 fail
Whenever the annunciation logic responds. the annunciation
lamp Lx3 is set to emit a flashing disturbance light unless a
steady light is demanded in the lamp telegram. The two ra-
1aining lamps stay dark. The annunication lamp set is the
one associated with the function unit to which the disturbance
relates.
When a function unit is connected to the standard functions
'preselection' or 'selector switch', the annunciation logic is
disabled by means of S601:7 (off).
Disturbance annunciations on the module
A light-emitting diode ST is provided on the front of the mod-
ule to indicate disturbances: these are filed simultaneously in
the diagnosis register.
Loss of the operating voltage US12 or US34 for the pushbut-
ton commands for function units 1 and 2 and/or 3 and 4 is
signalled by means of two further light-emitting diodes.
"'~'o
0·'7"""""'0
87WF01
Data communication with the module
Data exchange between the module and the bus system takes
place via a shared memory. Here, the incoming lamp and re-
lease telegrarns [TF, TQ, TL) to be received by the module,
and the pushbutton telegrams (DA 12, DA 14) to be sent out by
the module, are buffered. The shared memory is equipped
with source mgisters for telegrams to be sent and sink regis-
ters for telegrams to be received. The register numbers 0... 3
are defined as source registers. The allocation of lamp and
release telegr,;lms to the shared memory's sink registers is de-
termined by tile control system operator station on the basis of
user parameters. These user parameters are entered in the
form of an address list.
Pushbutton c:ommands
Depending on the operating mode (see operating modes), the
allocation of pushbutton commands to the source registers is
set permanertly.
The following correlation applies:
Function unit Register number
single mode double mode
1 0 0
2 1 0
3 2 2
4 3 2
The bit positions of the individual pushbutton commands with-
in the source register are defined by way of the selected data
types (see d",ta type selection).
Lamp signals
The lamp OLtputs of each function unit arE! allocated in the
form of an acdress list to the standard telegram 'lamp signals'
which is to bE~ received. In this case, the source address of the
lamp telegram to be received is allocated to each function
unit.
 87WFOl
'-:<""'':'''.

Release telegram The release telegram is generated on an additional control

room coupling module. For each function unit. the allocations
The release telegrams (TF. TO, TL) arriving through the bus
listed below also apply to the conversion of pushbutton com-
system are also allocated to the pushbutton telegrams to be
mands Tx1 ... Tx3 into a release telegram.
output. in the form of an address list. In this case, the source
location address of the release telegram to be received is allo-
cated to each function unit.

Type or Inror· DA 8A
Addres. WOld Dala Word (8 II Address)
illation

Sy· SEa· Mea· Regl.

stem lIon ule ster
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 e 7 6 5 4 3 2
I 1 0

Release 12 E a a a 0·3 0 0 0 TFI 0 TO TL TF a 0 0 0 0 0 0 58

letegram

Module
specltlc a a a 0 0 a 0 TF 0 T13 112 Til C 0 a 0 a 0 0 58
designatiOn

a a a 1 0 0 0 TF 0 T23 T22 T21 0 0 0 a a 0 0 58

a a a 2 0 0 0 TF 0 T33 T32 T31 a 0 a 0 c a 0 S8

'~'"

a a a 3 0 0 a TF 0 T43 T42 T41 a a a 0 0 0 0 S8

DA Data type Addressing

BA Mode
The address list for the lamp signals and release telegrams
a Address can be chosen freely
has the following fOlmat
(depending on installation location)
SB Disturbance bit
Addressina Function unit
TFl Pushbutton release for release telegram

1}
~
AWl 1,120.54.2
AW2 Lamp telegram
Note:
AW3
The disturbance bit of the received release telegram is not AW4 4
evaluated.

~}
EW1
EW2 Release teleg",rr
EW3
EW4

Where:
..........-..:..
1st number: System No. (0 ... 3 )
2nd number: Multi-purpose
processing station
number (1 ...249)
3rd number: Module No. (1 ... 58 )
4th number: Register No. (see function
block description
"register allocation")

AW Memonics for addressing

EW

........................................................................................................
 87WFOl

... ..
-~

\ddress generation Disturbance bit

The system and station addresses are specified jointly for all
modules in a multi-purpose processing station by means of a
station bus control module. The module address is also set
automatically by plugging the module into the slot provided
within the multi-purpose processing station.
The module incorporates a feature for monitoring the incom-
ing telegram:, for cyclic renewal. If a telegram has not been
renewed for a certain period of time, the module interprets this
as a fault anc a disturbance annunciation is stored in the diag-
nosis register (ST responds).

Reaction of lamp telegrams

Event generation
It a disturbar:ce bit is set in a lamp telegram or if the monitor
for cyclic renewal of the input telegrams responds. annunci-
Normally, the module is requested cyclically by the PROCON-
ation lamp l>:3 (LM) of the corresponding function unit emits a
TAOL system to transfer the data stored in the shared
flashing disturbance light.
memory's source registers.

If values change within the cycle time, this is treated as an

Reaction of pushbutton telegrams
"event".

The module recognizes the following occurrences as an The disturbance bit of a pushbutton telegram is set if:
went:
- the monitcr for cyclic renewal of the release telegram re-
- Change in status of binary values (pushbutton commands
sponds
and disturbance annunciations)
- the voltagEI US12 or US34 fails
Depressing of the release pushbutton TF alone is not recog-
- the process voltage US fails.
nized as an event.

If an event occurs, cyclic operation is interrupted and the new If the voltage,s US12 or US34 fail, the disturbance bit of the
values are transferred to the bus with priority. two pushbutton telegrams whose pushbutton commands are
powered witt'l the voltage concemed is set.

If the process voltage US fails, the bits in the standard tele-

grams allOCG.ted to the pushbutton commands are deleted
Diagnosis and the disturbance bit is set.

The received telegrams and the generation of the telegrams to

be sent, as well as internal signal processing. are monitored in
the module for error-free operation (self-diagnosis).

In the event of a disturbance, the type of disturbance is stored

in the diagnosis register and a disturbance annunciation is
...
~.'.
~ent simultaneously to the PROCONTROL system. After bus
,;ranting, the module transfers a diagnosis telegram contain-
ing the data stored in the diagnosis register.

It is also possible to scan the current status of the module and

the data at any time from the control system operator station
(remote diagnosis).

The diagnosis register can be called by specifying the com-

plete address and the data type. The diagnosis register has
the register number 246 and data type O.
 X:} ~
!'JCD
Ou
..,
2- "
c
:::J
11
a ~.
:J :J
:J ~
:J
2!.
g.
0
~ l3. 0. :::J
o'"' Q.
....
(I)
(II

cO 0.
xC) :J
5)'
-' S.
;1-
~ ~.
~

g-
III
c: .,
<0
o III
a p.) :J
.... '""'
Uo.
(II
3
a _.
!'-:;'--Xiti:n-'--'--'--'--'--' ss + ~~6'--'--~~'~iru~'1 @ (fl
-CD
CD.o
(fl c
p.) -.

-------------.-.----~~~~~~~~~-----------------------lI
=u
I Monitoring
I I I ,.
UU
a~
£~
I~. facility TST
Re<J 0
TST
Rov I
RST
Reg 2
TST
Reg 3
Si k .
n regis or
t
_
(J)
(fl
_. C)
:J a
;:::+"
:T

U512 U534
+l H:fTo tITO tI Lamp signals LS 1
Release telograms (TF. 11.. TO)
'1 U :J
~ :J

d- ® '-'---, (fl CD
• U< U<
~~~
p.) n
I"
I :J a
II (Address list)
o.Ul
...
l
a x
, ~
Xl I Up.)
mm I ~:J
. 0.

~I
~i'
CD :J
g
4::J

I~
p.) CD
C)
CD C)
_
~o

I I p.) '""'
.+
-, :J X

I
Ll4 LL4 UN
--,
II I 5- 5'
. I ~ Q-
I i ~ ua.
CD CD
@
:=. :r
(fl

~
uS
II
(I)

I - _.
< !:!l
Q.~
p.) a

l2.1!~. Ib06fbO' ~26/~' t".'" J

lO :J
CD
(flO'

U512 ~ TI2
/012.
TIl
Ib22 Ib?4
1lliITz21iiJ IF 5J TJl
.1. ••_- .1.".l!'.'.J"'----.J..,j,...I..... b"J..,-----.k..••
~ f14Ifl42~ l ' l l l T ' fLi2lUJ-P! W
"W"I",.Ifti2tL3~
L2J l
... I.!. 1.".1."
LJI ~4J
1.1 c~
(flC)
p.) a
:J ::J
o.:J
c~
0-.
. a
::;

"§:
p.)
:J
0.
p.)
a.
J
 87WF01

'::;onnection diagrams
Single mode connection diagram
(standard function ASS)

us US

I I
\) '\ J
~

TZ
US1l TIl
~

TO TH
~

12 lT13
zt, .~
LZ
L11
La LM 1
112 /113 l 1T21 1T22 IT23 1L21 !L2. IL23
I
TL
------'--............,
T I
I
I
Function unit 1 Function unit 2 I
I
: I
I
- --------1
US Z ss UO+ ZD
- - - _.- -----'

'j
StatJon-bu5

Double mode connection diagram

(standard function VW4)

US US

~
I I
T ,

FunCl10n unit 1 Function unit 2

1-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _....1-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ •_ _ _ _ _1 - _ - - - - --- ----i

l.....-----------,---,,-------r....,...---r-----,.--------
US l SS UO+ ZO
----- - ----'

~---------------------> Station-bus

.. ...
-.~
 87WF01

Mechanical design
View of connector side:
Board size: 6 units. 1 division. 160 mm deep
Connector: x for station-bus connection.
48-pole. edge connector type F
(connector X2)
x for control room connection.
32-po1e. edge connector type F
(connector Xl)
Weight: approx. 0.6 kg

o
c::::J

~
Light emit1ing diode

LJ
for disturbance
annunciatie.n ST

X2

~ A601 [gJ

@US12 Failure voltage US 12

XJ' E!J . (Function units 1 and 2)
I 2 l
xII E!J.
, 2 J @US3~
Failure voltage US34
(Function units 3 and 4
X32 C!:!J
, 2 •J
X12 C!:!J
, • 2 J
[!3.
Xll , 2 J
X13 l:!:!J •
I 2 J
X41 ~.
J 2 J X1
X21 l:!:!J •
I 2 l
1(2 E!J •
I 2 l
X22 C!:!J •

!
I 2 J
ON l:!:!J
XC3 , 2 •l
11. ..... 8\ S601
x23 l:!:!J
, •2 J
OFF

87 WF01·E
=0

..
.-~

!1 [ Memory module. user program A 10 (addresses) Note: A PROM of type 2732A is used as memory module fa.
the user program. This module must normally bel plugged in
I~l Memory module. operating program A60l even if no user program is required.The positions of all jump-
ers are marked on the printed circuit board (lamp operation).
 Module and PROC()NTROL P
.. ~ .. Application Description Transfer

Coupling Module
for Renlote Bus
Publication No.
D KWL 6315 92 E, Edition 01/94
Replacing D KWL 6315 92 E, Edition 09/92 88FTO!i/R1200

Application Features

This module is used in conjunction with the 88TK05 station This module Gan be used, together with the 88TK05 station
bus coupling module to couple the PROCONTROL station to bus coupling 'T1odule, in any PROCONTROl cabinet.
the remote bus. The module i~, equipped with
It is coupled to the 88TK05 station bus coupling module via an - a standard interface
RS485 interface. for the PRCCONTROL remote bus branch line
Coupling to the remote bus can be done using one channel or - an RS485 interface
two channels ( see block diagram "Station connections"). for the 88Tf\05 station bus coupling module

The RS485 interface is suitable to connect a maximum of four - a module data interface
PROCONTROL stations located in two mechanically coupled for the 88TK05 station bus coupling module
cabinets. The module transfers station bus data to and from the remote
bus.
The 88FT05 module does not use any modulE! address in the
PROCONTROl station,
Via the RS485 interface, it is supplied with its operating voltage
US (+24 V). The external terminating resistors of the RS485
interface are fad by the 88FT05 module,
The telegrams received from the remote bus al'e monitored for
distorted characters. This guarantees fault-free transfer.
The telegram transmitters are monitored for Eixcessively long
telegram sending, and the noise transmitters are monitored for
excessively long noise signals.
....
~ ... The transmission levels of telegram transmittE!rS and of noise
transmitters are measured and are transferred through the
RS485 interface to the 88TK05 station bus coupling module.
The 88TK05 monitors these transmission leVE!ls.
The module generates the baseband (within 0.1 ... 2 MHz) re-
quired for tele!gram transmission on both remote bus chan-
nels, as well as the noise signal (within 5 ... 7 MHz) required for
acknowledgernent and event detection. It converts the
bi-phase signals ofthe remote bus into the series-mode sig-
nals (TTL level) of the RS485 interface and vice versa.
The 24 V supply of the transmitter output sta';jes can be dis-
connected by an ESP signal of the RS485 interface using a
relay.

... ~.".
88FT05/R 1200
Module design
The module mainly consists of:
- Channel selection circuit
- Remote bus modem
- level multiplexer
- Manchester encoder/decoder
- Noise signal logic
- RS485 interface
- Module data interface
Channel selector circuit
The channel selector circuit allows to connect two (redundant)
remote bus channels to the bus coupling module.
Channel selection is permanent as soon as a complete receive
SYN symbol is recognized. This symbol indicates the begin-
ning of a data telegram arriving via the remote bus. This way,
the selector circuit is switched to the respective channel.
An incomplete receive SYN symbol does not effect any chan-
nel change-over.
Remote bus modem
This modem is used to condition and adapt the data signals to
the PROCONTROl remote bus.
The modem generates the noise signals required for acknowl-
edgement and event detection.
At the remote bus modem inputs DA 1N, DA2N (for remote bus
channel A) or DB1 N, DB2N (for remote bus channel B), the
transmitted signal is taken over by the Manchester encoder
and is transferred further - through an output stage with data
filter - to remote bus modem outputs FAA, FAB for remote
bus channel A, or to outputs FBA, FBB for remote bus line B.
Through a data filter, the received signal is forwarded to a fol-
lowing equalizing amplifier.
From remote bus modem outputs lEA (for remote bus channel
A) or IEB (for remote bus channel B), the received data are
transmitted to the Manchester decoder carrying out the Signal
conversion required for the RS485 interface.
The noise signal for telegram acknowledgement and event in-
dication is transmitted by the noise signal logic using remote
bus modem inputs RA 1N, RA2N (for remote bus channel A) or
RB1 N, RB2N (for remote bus channel B).
These signals are amplified, filtered through a bandpass filter,
and superimposed - using an output stage at the remote bus
modem outputs FAA, FAB (for remote bus channel A) or FBA,
FBB (for remote bus channel B) - to the signals of the tele-
gram transmitter output stages.
2
Using outputs SPA and RPA (for remote bus channel A) or
SPB and RPB (for remote bus channel B), the remote bus mo-
dem transmits the transmission levels of the telegram transmit-
ters and noise transmitters back to the level multiplexer of the
module.
Signal ESP of the RS485 interface activates the 24 V supply of
the transmission output stages, jOintly for both remote bus
channels, using a hi!lh signal level. For this purpose, using re-
mote bus modem input NA, it energizes a relay which will
switch on the output stages.
Level multiplexer
The level multiplexer applies the transmission level and the
noise level of the active remote bus channel to signal SP and
RP of the RS485 interface. Evaluating the transmission level
and signalling the fault to the PROCONTROl system takes
place on the 88TKO!> station bus coupling module.
.....-......
Manchester encod4!r/decoder
For each remote bus channel a separate Manchester encoder/
decoder is provided.
The Manchester encoder converts signals RA, DA and TA,
which are received from the RS485 interface, into the remote
bus modem signals DA1 N, DA2N, DB1 Nand DB2N. Addition-
ally, these signals are given SYN symbols.
Signals DA1N, DA2N or DB1N and DB2N will become active
only after they have been released by the 88TK05 station- bus
coupling module together with signals SE1 or SE2 respectively
from the RS485 interface and if the transmitter monitoring
function did not respond.
The Manchester decoder converts signal lEA or IEB received
from the remote bus modems into signals RA, DA, TA for the
RS485 interface. In addition, the SYN symbols ofthese signals
are removed.
Signals RA, DA, TA will become active only after they have
been released by the channel selector circuit.
Furthermore, a chara.cter distortion in the received data signals
causes the reception monitoring function to render signals RA,
DA, TA inactive. This is recognized by the 88TK05 module and
the data are not beinq evaluated. Instead, the 88TKO~i prompts
repeated output of tile telegram. Thus, no data are lost.
NoIse signal logic
The noise signal logic generates the noise signal (5 .. 7 MHz)
as required for ever,t Signalling and telegram acknowledge-
ment.
remote bus modem signals RA1 N, RA2N or RB1 N, HB2N are
generated from a noise Signal of limited frequency and ampli-
tude, signal RE (noise transmitter ON) of the RS485 interface,
and a control signal issued by the channel selector circuit.
 88FT05/R1200

RS485 Interface Transmitter monitoring on the 88FT05 and the 88TK05

In this circuit section, conditioning and adaptation of the sig-
nals to the 88TK05 station-bus coupling module take place. The 88TK05 station bus coupling module which controls the
telegram transmitters and the noise transmitters on the 88FT05
All signals of this interface will be transmitted with their true module, monitors the telegram transmitters of the active re-
and inverse values. mote bus channel for absence of the transmission signal level
and excessh/ely long telegram transmission, i.e. telegram
This interface according to RS485 includes the following sig-
frames exceE!ding 63 Ils. It also monitors the noise transmitters
nals:
of the active remote bus channel for absencEl of the noise sig-
SE1 +, SE1-, Telegram transmitter remote bus nallevel.
channel A ON
SE2+, SE2-, Telegram transmitter remote bus The transmi1ter monitoring function of the 88FT05 module
channel BON monitors the telegram transmitter of the active remote bus
RE+, RE -, Noise transmitter ON channel for E'xcessively long telegram transmission, i.e. trans-
DA+, DA-, Telegram data mission of more than 64 telegrams without interruption by re-
RA+, RA-, Telegram frame ception of a complete telegram. It also monitors the noise
TA+, TA-, Telegram clock pulse transmitter 0" the active remote bus channel for an excessively
SP+, SP-, Checkback signal for transmission level of the long noise siqnal, i.e. any occasion where the noise transmitter
active remote bus channel remains ON for more than 10 ms without any interruption.
RP+, RP-, Checkback signal for noise level of the active An excessivElly long transmission telegram, overly long tele-
"'~"
remote bus channel gram transmission, or an excessively long noise signal causes
FS+, FS-, Signal "Remote bus coupling disturbed" the 88FT05 module to permanently disconnect the drivers of
ESP+, ESP-, Inhibit output stages the disturbed telegram transmitter until the end of the cycle,
ANB+, ANB-, Signal "Active remote bus channel" using the si~lnals SE1 or SE2.
(channel A = 1, channel B = 0)
SGD, SGD, Reference conductor RS485 interface Reconnection of the drivers through the 88TI{05 using signals
US, US, +24 V for 88FT05 SE1 or SE2 will be effected after the telegrarr "Start cycle" has
Z, Z, Reference conductor for +24 V. been received.

After the transmitter monitoring function for the telegram or

Module data Interface noise transrr itters has responded three consecutive times, the
drivers of the disturbed telegram or noise transmitter will re-
This interface is used for transmitting internal module data to main disconlected.
the 88TK05 station bus coupling module.
Each of the disturbances described above is indicated by the
When several 88TK05 station-bus coupling modules are con- entry "Transmit path fault" (bit 9) in the diagnostic register
nected to one 88FT05 remote-bus coupling module, this inter- (GA60/61) 0': the 88TK05 module.
face may be connected to the first 88TK05 station-bus cou-
pling module only.
DisturbancE' signals to the annunciation system

The annunci:ition system and the CDS control diagnostic sys-

•• <;";"':"•••••

tem receive ':he disturbance Signals from thH station bus cou-
pling module via the PROCONTROl bus.
Diagnosis and annunciation functions It includes all disturbances which are recognized by the trans-
mitter monitoring functions on the 88FT05 module.
The module is not equipped with any light-emitting diodes for
disturbance annunciations. Disturbances are indicated on the
88TK05 station-bus coupling module. Status annLlnciatlons

The signal coming from the general disturbance line and the
Green light- emitting diodes on the front panel indicate the fol-
signals transmitted to the CDS are shown in Figure 1.
lowing operating statuses of the active remote bus channel:
TS TE!legram transmission
Reception monitoring on the 88FT05 and the 88TK05
QES AGknowledgement and event transmitter active
The reception monitoring function on the 88FT05 monitors the A RI~mote bus channel A active

telegrams received for distorted characters. B RI~mote bus channel B active.

When the reception monitoring function responds, transmis- Annunciation lamp TS Signals transmission of telegrams to the
sion of frame, data, and clock pulse (RA, DA, TA) is canceled remote bus.
on the RS485 interface between 88FT05 and 88TK05 until the
next valid SYN symbol is received. Annunciation lamp QES indicates acknowledgement of re-
ceived remote bus telegrams and signalling of events from sta-
Then the cancel detector of the reception monitoring function tion-bus modules to the master station.
on the B8TK05 will respond. The 88TK05 module indicates the
presence of this disturbance by entering" Acknowledged error Annunciation lamps A and B indicate activity on the respective
on remote bus" (bit 8) into its diagnosis register. remote bus channel.

"".,.,........-.~•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• O;<;';";O;·."'.<;~~'77';"'.~•......,,'"'"7.--,..-;-7;-;-.-•..,...,..--.-...-•...,..~~
••• ~~~
 Q)
-I'- 1"Tl Q)
10'
c:
ro Transmitter monitoring Transmitter monitoring 21
o
(]1
Overly long telegram transmission
Q)
Overly long transmission
of telegram
---
:n......
Q) FS I\.)

21
0
Overly long noise signal ----j ~ 1 Absence of transmission level --
~1 o
o

(]1
c. Voltage monitoring --- Absence of noise level --
Di'
(0 ~-~---

:::J
0
~
0'

I I
Jll
3 Reception monitoring
CD
en Telegram reception canceled Reception
en
d""o d;,,,rte' ,h",,'em
III

Jl
(0
CD
monlto"""
en
Diagnostic register 246

F"me
Data I DA
RA
TA
II Cance-
lation
detector
including module address 60. 61

Bit IType

Pulse SST
CDS messages *)
Group malfunction
10 S station detected -----4405
9 S - Transmit path fault 3401
Telegram 8 S Acknowledged error
cancelation on remote bus

!elegram
Invalid
---j ;;;1
L......

Other messages from

the 88TK05
1
'J
SG

~ r--

~~
~
G1

----- -~1

*) The control diagnostic system provides a description for

each message number.
This description includes:
- Explanations regarding cause and effect of the disturbance
- Recommendations regarding its elimination
This makes for fast elimination of a disturbance,
 88FT05/R1200

Length of the remote bus lines

The maximum permissible length of the remote bus line is de-

pendent on the number of the remote bus junction modules
88FK05 used and on the dimensioning of the noise receiver in
the master station modem module 88FV01 /R01 00/R0200.
The bus range chart shows the permissible remote bus length
in relation to the number of remote bus junction modules
88FK05 for the versions R0100 and R0200 of the master sta-
tion modem module 88FV01.

Number of
remote bus junction modules
88FK05
32
30

\"" "'-
•.••y;-•..•

25
\

~FV01IRO'~
20
88FV01/R0200
15
\ \

': j
0 500 1000
\ 1500
\

2000
\
' ....
Length of
remote bus [m]

Figure 2: Bus range chart

..:.v.-;.....

..-:''";'';'';''.

........................................................................... -~~-.--~~-
 88FT05/R1200

Function diagram X11 includes a standard interface for the remote bus branch
line.

Terminal designations X21 includes an RS485 interface, a module data interface for
station-bus couplin~ module 88TK05, as well as an UD volt-
The printed-circuit board is provided with connectors X11 and age supply for the external terminating resistors of the RS485
X21. interface.

«ID IDID IDID IDID IDID IDID IDIID 00 ~iOO 0000 0000 00 00 0000 0000 Cl 00 00
IDOO IDID 0000 0000 OOID IDOO
u.. u.. u.. u.. u..u.. u.. u.. u..u.. u.. u.. fElfE u..
00
u..ILE LELE LELE LE LE LELE LELE ~~ LE LE
I - ... ;:--;x)' ~ coco OC\l vCO OC\l vCO
C\I C\I C\I C\I MM C\IC\I MM
C\I COIC\l
0 0 00
vCO coc
o~ 0
c.:i r; coo C\lv
0 o~
~) co
...
0
---
00 00
X ~c.:l M
.J:J.J:J .J:J.J:J ~~ ijo .J:J .J:J .J:J.J:J N N
.J:J
" "" "" N .J:J"
I " " "" '" N
N
88FT05/R
FBAFBB FAA FAB
I
FB MODEM

I NA
RPB, RPA
SPB,SPA
DB1N, DB2N
DA1N, DA2N IEB, lEA
RA1N,RA2N
RB1N,RB2N d30 ICC
Module data
~j32 ICD
I interface

I
f'
B
I
'--
Channel selector Level Manchester Noise channel [",",m""" moo;tori09,
I circuit MUX encoder/decoder logic
reception monitoring,
voltage monitoring :<21
I UD

~
d02
I
II
I ~TS<fl aES I, t t
I «j04 UD

I d06 ZD
I «jOB ZD

71
DC/DC
I I ESP I con-
verter

I ....
~!~ v co CD 0 C\I V co colo
RS485 interface

0
I
v co co 0 v co
~ .... 1f~';; C\lvCO~1
~
C\I C\I CD

ilit'
~ .J:JI.J:J :D :0 :E
~~~
C\I C\I C\I C\I
N N N N N ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ o oog
~ - c.:l c.:l
.J:J .J:J .J:J .J:J 0000
- +1 - r-- N N N N

~
.J:J .J:J .J:J.a+-
I---- + 00I +1 ~!UJ ::l::l
UJUJ

~I~I
+ I + ~I+ I 00 + I C\I C\I + I a. a. + I Cl Cl + I ::l,::l N N NNI
~!~ C3 Cl!~ ~ «
z z UJa. a. w w UJ
UJ UJ UJ u..
UJ UJ UJ
u.. w
W UJ C!l C!l a. a.
a: a: UJ r:n a: a:
« UJ

............."'
......",
...... ... ... ... ... ... ...=...=...=...=...=...=...=. . .=
~.~~.~~~~~~ . . .=. . .=... ==~= ..=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=....=.....",
... =.. =
 88FT05/R1200

·..~....

Block diagram of station connections

Single-channel station bus coupling

I
Remote bus A Out- Remote bus B
In- In- Ou:-
coming going coming going
,,

88FK05/R0100 88FK05/R0100

Remote bus branching cable

88FT05/R1200

... ..-.
~

RS485

1-------,
88TK05/R1210 I 88TK05/R1210 :
L _ _ _ •_ _ _ J

ill ..
~ __ Io.o_'"
Stationsbus Stationsbus

Dual-channel station bus coupling

Remote bus A Remote bus B

In- Out- In- OLt-
coming going coming gong

88FK05/R0100 88FK05/R0100

Remote bus branching cable

88FTOS/R1200 88FT05/R1200

RS485 RS485

~-------------- ... -------------,

I, 1-------, r------,
88TK05/R1210
891K02
88TK05/R 121 0 I 88TK05/R1210
L _ _ _ •_ _ _
H
J
88TK05/R1210 :
L _ _ _ •_ _ _ J

Station bus
....-- .... ------.-- .......
Station bus
---~

® A maximum of four stations can be connected

in two neighbouring cabinets.

7
88FTOS/R1200

Mechanical design Contact assignmen·.ts of connector X21

Board size: 6 units, 2 divisions, 160 mm deep View of contact side:

Connectors: X11, X21 acc. to DIN 41 612

u~=l
, d b
2 x 48-pole edge-connector, type F
02 UD Z
Xl acc. to MIL-C-24 308
04 UD Z UC'
,)
I
1 x 37- pole female connector, type HDP 20 : UC'
i
06 ZD Z ,)
I
Weight: approx. O.S kg i 08 ZD Z UC'
,) 1
I
i
i 10 RA+ FS+ i
i
View of connector side: I
12 RA- F~~
.dl. i
I 14 DA+ ESP+ I

16 DA- ESP- I
i
18 TA+ RE+ i
X
11 20 TA- RE- I

sc~
I.

22 ANB+
i 24 ANB- scm
26 SP+ RP+
28 SP- RP-
30 ICC SE2+
SE~
32 ICD SE2- SE1-
I

X
21
Contact assignment of connector X11

View of contact side:

d b 2 I
02 FAB FAB FAB
04 FAB FAB FAB
i
06 FAB FAA FAB
08 FAB FAB FAB I

I 10 FAB FAB FAB

i
12 I
!
14 I

16

~i
18
20
22 I
24 FBB FBB FBB I
I 26 FBB FBB FB~ I

28 FBB FBA FBB I

30 FBB FBB FBB i
i

32 FBB FBB I
FBB I

8
 88FT05/R1200

.... ~ •...

View of module side and module front

r::::P

ASS I

X11
D
0 0 TS Telegram
TS QES transmission
0 0 QES Acknowledgement/
.... ':".~ .. event transm. active
A B
A Remote bus
channel A active
B Remote bus
channel B active

X21

o ASS I
88FT05
..... •...
";";";"
0

....."""""'"..

9
88FT05/R1200

Technical data

In addition to the system data, the following values apply:

Power supply (on the module)

Operating voltage 24 V +/- 25 %

Current consumption max. 1.1 A
Power dissipation typo 20 W
Power dissipation max. 33 W

Standard interface for remote bus branch-line module 88FK05 (FBA, FBB, FAA, FAB)

Transfer rate 1 MBaud

Terminating resistance 50 Ohm
Data transmission voltage 15 ... 30 Vss
Input sensitivity ::; 12 mVss
Noise signal voltage 3.5 ... 6 Veff
Max. length: for use outside of cabinet 50 m. cable type RG 58 with additio'nal shield
for use inside of cabinet 10m. cable type RG 58

RS485 Interface for station bus coupling module 88TKOS (RS485 standard)

Transfer rate 1 MBaud

Terminating resistance 100 Ohm
Passive differential signal voltage 400 mV
Max. length of connection between 88TK05/88TK05 10m (total).
cable type RD-Y(ST)Y 16 x 2 x 0.22 mm
or standard wiring
Max. length of connection between 88TK05/88FT05 1 m, cable 891K01
Max. number of stations
in two mechanically coupled cabinets 4

Noise Immunity
when installed according to instructions

ESD acc. to IEC 801/2 8 kV to front panel

EMC acc. to IEC 801/4 2 kV burst coupled into remote bus cable

ORDERING DATA

Order no. for overall module:

Type deSignation: 88FT05/R1200 Order no.: GJR2393100R1200

Accessories:
Cable 891K02 for dual-channel station bus coupling Order no.: GKWE 60~~380R0090

Technical data are subject to change without notice!

10
88FT05/R1200

II
1-
ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH
p. O. Box 100351, D-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462 411 107 ab d

Printed in Germany (KWLJE69 894 0.3 BID)

 Module and PROCONTROl P
Application Description Transfer

Bus termination
Publication No.
D KWl 6324 93 E, Edition 01/94
Replacing D KWl 6324 93 E, Edition 08/93 88QB03 - E/R01 00

Application Design and connection of the module

The module 880B03- E/R01 00 is always installed in the PRO- For the hardware architecture of the module refer to the Func-
CONTROL cabinets 89MS01 /R01 00/R0200/R0300/R0400 and tion and connection diagram. The connections to 880T03 and
89MS02/R0100 in connection with module 880T03- E/R2111. to the PROCONTROl-PS bus are separate. This is to ensure
The module is required to installed directly on the right of the that the connection is interrupted when the module is un-
module 880T03- E/R2111 seen from the front of the cabinet. plugged and the input circuit of the 70BT01 module de-ener-
Both modules shall be installed in a 24 V subrack. gized and thl3refore undefined conditions caused by the mis-
sing termina1ion resistors and the power supply are avoided.
Installation of the module in the subracks together with
Interruption is monitored and Signalled by module 880T03.
89NG03, i.e. 89MS01 /R01 00/R0200, BGT:D and 89MS01/
R0300/R0400, BGT:G is not permissible(standard). Connection to the 70BK01 module is by means of cable
891K05.
If in contrast with this standard further subracks are retrofit with
89NG03 in these subracks, too installation of this module is not The shield 01 the connecting cable shall be wired separately
permissible. from contact b30 of the process connector to the A busbar in
the cabinet.

Features Diagnostics and annunciation functions

The module incorporates the bus termination for connection of Two red lEDs - ST and SG - are located en the front panel
880T03 to the PROCONTROl-PS bus and/or the input/out- of the module. They are activated when the monitor for the
put station and the central clock-pulse supply for 880T03. 10 V power ~ upply unit has responded. At the same time the
SME signal is generated which is evaluated by the 880T03
It is supplied by a dual 24 V (USA, USB) supply. module.
Power supplies of the termination resistors and the circuit sec-
tion for the central clock pulse are generated on the module
.•••;-;<;>; ••
from 24 V by separate power supply modules. The voltage for
the termination resistors is monitored.
Connection to 880T03 is by means of the process connector.
If several 880B03 modules are installed in a subrack the cen-
tral clock pulse can be disconnected by removing a plug-in
jumper on the module.
For use in the subracks of the different PROCONTROl cabi-
nets the module is provided with an additional plug-in jumper
by means of which the termination resistors for the central
clock can be switched on or off (see 'Module adjustment').

'-.=
... =
... =
... ~
... ~
... ~
... ~ .. =.=
... ~ ...~
...~
.. ,.~
...~ ...=...~
...~ ... =
...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...~.~.=... =
... =
... =... =.. ~, .......................................... .
 --n co
..'"/
I\)
/' C co
station bus 0
::J OJ
" 0
r-+
0
w
0' :Ii
c :J
~ ~ ~
C N N N 0
~
~

~
(j) ~ 7
OJ m 0
0
a. a. a. 0-
:J
...~ t'>
0- 0- 0-
w w C-
~
~
W 0
0 I\) I\) I\) I\) +> en
O
0

, 'Z -. '-----. - ----

I"'\,,\ IT~
clock
pulse
8
o X100

~] 8
o X104
:J
:J
<D
51
0'
cable
---<
-1 :J

B91K05
X21
o-}- ~ C-
Ol'
,......... 10 V eo
r DI b02 --.
1.. m

.~
I~- 3
I~%I
f- ---
i2Q_'L

000
r- [)N b06

kL- - _ _ _ _ 0-- RQIL 1.. X21

z02 DI
--.J
-l- AD b10 _. ~-
-- - --
0
OJ
-l
0
.....
-

/
r- CK - - - - -

----
-
b12
b14
b16 L.
1__ ~-

_.
--- -
------~

-- ----
-
z04
z06
zOB
ON
AD
CK
} 00","\;00 \0
connector X21
(to be wired additionally)
J
z10 SME
r- SMEO _12.HL
~~
- ---

-/
/ SME3 b20
v ~ '- " '- " '- ~ ~
z12
.-
X

r- US1 b22 I z14 Y

~~- ---- -- I b24

r-
-----r -
US1 b26 -- 1 Moni-
t~~~ cr>

L0:;
u28 I I
~--Y;; PTC I
.shield b30
7
880803 - E/R01 00 880T03-E/R2111

connection to A busbar
in the cabinet
(to be wired addtionally)

.~

-"
 88QB03/R0100

.. -.=:-~ •.

Module setting

For modules with hardware index b For modules with hardware index a 1

Two plug-in jumpers are located on the module. X100 con- Modules of hardware index a1 do not have plug-in jumper
nects/disconnects the central clock pulse and X1 04 the apper- X104 and plug-in jumper X100 can be plu£lged in only one
taining, internal termination resistors. position. The following setting applies:

When the module is installed in the subracks (BGT) of the

PROCONTROl cabinets the plug-in jumpers shall be set as I I
I Type of cab net Subrack Jumper X100 I Remarks I
follows: I '
I 89MS01/R0100 A open
G inserted 1)
K inserted 2)
i Type of cabinet i Subrack! Positions of Remarks D not permissible
, plug-in jumpers
89MS01/R0200 A,K inserted 2)
I ! I X100 I X104 G inserted 1)
D not permissible
89MS01 /R01 00 A B B
A A 1)
~ ~
G I 89MS01/R030D inserted 2)
K A B 2) I /R0400 inserted 3)
D not permissible ) G not permissible
89MS01/R0200 A,K A B 2) I 89MS02/R0200 A, D,G,K inserted
i G A A 1)
: D not permissible I
i
89MS01/RC300 A B 2)
/R0400
I,

I
}

G
~ A B
not permissible
3)

89MS02/R0100 A,D,G,K A I
I
A

1) In addition, remove resistors R1 on the connection p.c.b.'s

of the station bus cable on the left and the right in this sub-
rack. -
2) In addition, remove resistor R1 on the connection p.c.b. of
.. ~.--
the station bus cable on the left in this subrack.
3) In addition, remove resistor R1 on the connection p.c.b. of
the station bus cable on the right in this subrack.

The settings X100:A and X104:A are the settings on delivery.

.-:~..--

3
 88QB03/R0100

.'~""

Mechanical design Contact assignment of the process connector X:21

Board size: 6 units, 1 division, 160 mm deep

View of connector side:
Connector: acc to DIN 41612
1 x for station bus connection,
48-pole, edge connector type F
(connector X11)
1 x for process connection,
32-pole, edge connector type F I
b I z
(connector X21)
!
02 DI DI
Weight: appro 0.5 kg I
04 Z i DN
06 ! DN i AD
View of connector side: I I

I
08 i Z I CK
I
10 I AD I SME
I
12 Z I X
X 14 I
CK Y
11
16 I
Z
18 I SMEO ,,
II 20 SME~! I
i
I
22 US1 I

24 Z
26 US1
28 Z
X 30 Shield *)
21
32 *)

*) Do not connect.

.............................................................................................................
 BBQB03/R0100

"';:"~"

Side view and view of front panel of the module

r::::P
ASS

~
5T disturbance

A~ v
ST 5G 5G module
0 disturbance
B x
•
A~
B x
0
0
X11
•

.... ..
~

)(21

"'~"

ASS
88Q603
0

"~"

...=...=...=... ... ... .. =...=...=...=...=... ... ... .. =...=...=...=...=...=...=...=.. =...=.....=........

~= ~~~ ~~~ ... =... =... =
~=====~.~ ...=...=...~...~...=.. =...•...,.=
...=...=...=...=...=.. =
... =...=...=...~
...........~
.. ==~=,===~===============,~======~
 88QB03/R0100

Technical data

The following values apply in addition to the system data:

Power supply

Operating voltage USNUSB 24 V

Current consumption 210 mA
Power dissipation SW

Output values

Power supply 24 VI$; 100 mA

(contacts X21 :b22 and b26)

Noise immunity

ESD acc. to IEC 801/2 8 kV to front panel, ~;everity 3 (air discharge)

EMV acc. to IEC 801/4 O.S kV, severity 2

ORDER DATA
Complete module:
Type designation: 88QB03-E/R0100 Order number: GJR':;::393800R0100

Cable:
Type designation: 891K05 Order number: GKWE602416Rxxxx
(xxxx = length of cable in cm, max. 3,000 cm)

Technical data subject to change without notice!

...............................................................................................................................................................
88QB03/R0100

.";--"'7"0.

,.'1_-
jlltll

ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH

PO. Box 100351, D-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372
Telex 462411 107 ab d

Printed in Germany (KWl./ES9 1194 0.3 BID)

 Module and PROC:ONTROL P
Application Description Transfer

Bus Coupling Module

to Input/Output Station
Publication No.
o KWL 6322 93 E, Edition 10/94
Replacing 0 KWL 6322 93 E, Edition 06/93 88QT03 - E/R2111

Application Features

The bus coupling module 88QT03 connects the station bus The module can be plugged into any station of the PROCON-
and the input/output station. The following input/output station TROL bus system. It requires two divisions.
modules can be connected:
It uses:
- 70EA01-E!R1 Analog input module
(one data telegram per function unit)
•• -::","""0. - One SS ~;tandard interface to the station bus
- 70EA02-E!R1 Analog input module
(one data telegram per function unit) - One SEA standard interface to the input/output station
- 70EB01 - E/R1 Binary input module - Connections provided for hardware inputs.
(one data telegram per module)
- 70EB02-E/R4 Binary input module
(one data telegram per module) As with all other station bus modules, the station bus address
of this module is related to the place of installation.
- 70EB03-E/R1 Binary input module
(one data telegram per module) However, the module may only be plugged onto even module
- 70ER01/R1 Input module for checkback signals addresses. The next higher (uneven) module address will be
(one data telegram per module) used automatically by the module and needs not be wired.
- 70AA01/R1 Analog output module However, it must not be assigned to another station bus mod-
(four data telegrams per module) ule.
- 70AA02/R1 Analog output module It transmits data from the input/output modules to the station
(four data telegrams per module) bus.
- 70AB01-E/R1, R2 Binary output module
(one data telegram per module) It transmits the data received from the station bus to modules
connected to the input/output station.
- 70PR03-E/R1, R2 Computing module
- 70AS04/R1 Compact drive control module The connected input/output station modules are monitored for
- 70AS06/R1 Compact drive module proper function.
••• -;0:0:-;-.
for motor-driven actuators
Disturbances are signalled to the PROCONTFIOL system in the
- 70WB01/R1 Control room coupling module form of diagnosis telegrams. They are indicated additionally
(two data telegrams per module) on the front panel of the module by means of LEOs (see "An-
- 70BK03-E!R1, R2 Bus coupling module nunciation functions").
(RS232, RS485 interfaces)
The module ::an simulate output data destined for the input/
Connected to the station bus, the module behaves like a com- output station.
bined input!output module which is able to receive max. 255
telegrams from the station bus and transmit max. 200 tele- The module merely requires a 24 V supply (voltages required
grams to the station bus. additionally are generated inside the module).
In relation to the input/output station the module acts as a pro-
User lists are loaded into an EEPROM by means of the PODS.
cessing module. It receives and transmits a total of up to 256
telegrams. The standard interface to the input/output station is available
In conjunction with the module 88QB03-E/R0100 the bus both on the ~;tation bus connector X11 and the process con-
coupling module can be installed in the PROCONTROL cabi- nector X21. The interface on connector X11 can be disabled
nets 89MS01 and 89MS02, too. by means of plug- in jumpers.

.. ... =...=... ...=...=...=.. =

~~"'~"="'="'="'="'~"'~"'="'="="'="'="'="'=".'~.'.".=~~~= ~ ... = .. =
...=...=...=.. "" ~ ... =
...=...=... ...=...=.. = ......,....... ...
= =.. =
... =
... =
... =.. ~~~==~~ .. ...=...........................
~~~-~~---------
88QT03/R2111
Description
General basic functions
The module comprises the following three function blocks (see
"Function diagram"):
- section for specific station bus functions (processor I)
- processing section (processor II)
- section for specific function of the input/output station.
These functions cooperate via two shared memories. The sta-
tion-bus shared memory is a assigned to the station bus and
the input/output-station-bus shared memory to the input/
output station.
Section for specific station-bus functions
This section performs the following main functions:
- Handling the overall data communication with the station
bus using the SS standard interface. The data exchange is
handled following the instructions given by the 88TV01/
88TK05 station-bus control module.
- Monitoring the internal functions of the module and output
of appropriate annunciations if a disturbance occurs (see
"annunciation functions ").
- Handling the internal data exchange between the station
bus and the station-bus shared memory.
The shared memory assigned to the station-bus-specific
section is composed of a receiving shared memory and a
sending shared memory.
All data telegrams received from the station bus are buffered in
the receiving shared memory. From there they are forwarded
to the processing section for further processing.
All data telegrams provided by the processing section are buff-
ered in the sending shared memory. When the module is
called the telegrams are transmitted from here to the station
bus.
The tasks assigned to the station-bus-specific section are
performed by processor I.
2
Processing section
This section performs the following main functions:
- Marshalling input/output station telegrams from the input/
output station shared memory to the station bu~; sending
shared memory bit by bit or telegram by telegram.
- Marshalling station bus telegrams from the station bus re-
ceiving shared memory to the input/output station shared
memory telegrarr by telegram or bit by bit.
Input signal monitoring of data telegrams transferred from
the input/output ~:tation.
Generation of (a~,plication-specific) limit value telegrams
from those analo~ telegrams received from the input/output
station
Plausibility limit m:mitoring (programmable) of analog value
telegrams transferred from the input/output station to the
station bus
Monitoring of the internal module functions including out-
put of annunciations signals in case of a disturbance ("see
Annunciation func:tions")
Simulation of output data to the input/output station
- Event processing.
The tasks assigned 10 the processing section are performed
by processor II. For this purpose the processor is provided
with a user program which contains the user data required.
The user program comprises (see "Initialization"):
- Bus address list (BAL)
Marshalling list station bus - input/output station (RAN)
- Marshalling list input/output station - station bus (RAN)
Limit value list (GRE)
- Measuring range expansion list.
Upon entry of the USI~r-specific address and limit vc.lue data,
the lists are generated automatically by the PODS (program-
ming, diagnostic) and display system and are stored on the
module in a non-volatile memory (EEPROM) (see "Operating
modes: Initialization").
User data stored in tle user EEPROM can be chanCied "on-
line" by means of thl~ PODS. -
Section for specific hput!output station functions
This section comprises the following functions:
- Handling the data communication with the input/output sta-
tion via the standc.rd interface SEA. Data communication is
handled following the instructions given by the input/output
station control module 70BV01.
- Handling the intenal data exchange between the input/out-
put station and thl~ shared memory of the input/output sta-
tion.
These functions are Jerformed by a control section:
The input/output station shared memory buffers all data tele-
grams which have to be transferred between the input/output
station and the processing section (in sending and receiving
direction) .
The module function:> are described in detail in the following.

.'-~'.
Initialization
Initialization puts the bus coupling module in a defined starting
position.
Initialization is as follows:
- Voltage connection (plugging in the module)
Reception of the "Reset processing" instruction telegram.
The STEA disturbance LED is flashing for about 4 seconds
during initialization.
Loading and saving user lists
The user loads the required marshalling, limit value and mea-
suring range expansion lists via the bus into the RAM of the
module by means of the PODS. The PODS ensures that the
lists match. After further plausibility checks the module starts
processing the user data stored in the RAM.
The user program is transferred from the RAM to the EEPROM
with the instruction "save" (SAV) entered on the PODS to store
":"~"
the user data in the nonvolatile EEPROM. From then on the
module uses the lists in the EEPROM. Now the data in RAM
can be changed or complemented.
Plugging modules Into the Input/output station
The bus coupling module 880T03 and the input/output station
modules may be plugged during operation.
When the bus coupling module is plugged in it will be initial-
ized automatically (provided that the user lists have been
loaded in the EEPROM) and after completion of initialization
the input/output station is coupled to the station bus.
................
880T03/R2111
Processing
The procesE;ing section including the micro:Jrocessor II is the
central part of the module. The station-bus and the input/out-
put-station shared memories are the internal interfaces of the
microproceE;sor. The transmission time between these shared
memories is ::; 20 ms (without limit value formation or mea-
suring range expansion::; 10 ms).
The following applies to data exchange between these shared
memories in general:
- In the station bus receiving shared memory 255 registers
are available (for the data exchange station bus - input/
output station)
- In the station bus transmitting shared memory 200 registers
are available (for the data exchange input/output station -
station bJs)
- In the input/output station shared memory a total of 256
registers are available (for data exchange in both direc-
tions).
The addres~;es of the input/output station (input and output)
telegrams and the register addresses of the input/ output sta-
tion shared memory are identical. But they can be assigned as
desired.
The processing section performs the following (application-
specific) functions:
a) In input jirection (input/output station -. station bus)
- Binary value telegrams:
Marshalling from the input/output station shared
memory to any register of the station bus transmitting
memory telegram by telegram; event processing. Mar-
shalling can be either telegram by telegram or bit by bit.
- Analo,~ value telegrams:
Marshalling from the input/output station shared
memory to any register of the station bus transmitting
sharej memory; input signal monitoring; limit value
formation; modification of plausibility limits; event pro-
cessing.
b) In outpu: direction (station bus - input/output station)
- Binary value telegrams:
Marshalling from the station bus receiving shared
memory to any register of the input/output station
shared memory (= input/output station output address).
Marshalling can be either telegram by telegram or bit by
bit.
- Analoq value telegrams:
Marsralling from the station bus receiving shared
memory to any register of the input/output station
share,j memory (= input/output station output address).
Measuring range expansion may be programmed for
each analog value.
A data telegram (analog or binary) received from the station
bus may be output to several input/output station outputs
(= input/output station output addresses) at the same time,
depending on the user-specific programming .
,~==~""""""" ••~".~~~~~~-
88QT03/R2111

Input signal monitoring
The analog values of the analog input modules connected to
the input/output station are not monitored for plausibility.
Monitoring for plausibility may be programmed for the 70EAxx
modules individually for each input signal, depending on
user-specific requirements.
If the monitor responds bit 14 (process disturbance) will be set
in diagnostic register 246.
The disturbed measured value, however, is transmitted to-
gether with the set disturbance bit. The disturbance LED ST is
activated additionally,
Any change of a limit signal is signalled to the station bus as
an event.
When input signal monitoring responds all limit signals (GOXX,
GUXX) belonging to ·:he measured value are set to "a" and the
disturbance bit (MXX, SMX) is set to "1" (see "Telegram as-
signment").
In the station bus serding shared memory two successive reg-
isters will be used for the analog value and limit values (even
if no limit values arE programmed by the user). The analog
values are always w1"itten into registers with even addresses,
the limit Signals are mitten to the odd register following. Un-
programmed limit values are not transmitted to the station bus.

Limit signal generation
In the processing section max. 4 limit signals can be gener-
ated for each analog value received by the input/output sta-
tion.
The limit value telegram, thus generated is written into the reg-
ister of the station bus sending shared memory directly follow-
ing the analog register.
This is to ensure the logic allocation "analog value telegram/
limit value telegram" in the PROCONTROL bus system.
The limit value telegrams are composed according to data
type 3.
Max. 3 values can be programmed for limit signal generation,
depending on the user-specific requirements:
- the actual limit value (0 % - 110 % of the measuring range
selected)
- one out of four possible hysteresis values per limit value
- a maximum or minimum selection for each limit value.
These values are stored in the user EEPROM.
One out of the four following hysteresis values may be as-
signed to each limit vaiue:
HY1 = 0.39 %
HY2 = 1.56 %
HY3 = 3.12 %
HY4 = 6,25 %
The hysteresis may be above or below the limit value depend-
ing on whether violation of the minimum or maximum value
has been selected (see Fig. 1).
Event processing
Since input/output nodules are not provided with an event
feature this function will be carried out by the processing sec-
tion of the module.
Normally, the couplirg module is interrogated cycliceJly by the
PROCONTROL bus system to transmit its data. If values
change within the cy'cle time this fact will be treat,ed as an
"event".
The coupling module recognizes the following occurrences as
events:
With analog input siqnals:
Change of limit s gnal
Response of the Input Signal monitor
- Change of a measured value by an adjustable value within
an adjustable timB since the last transmission to ttle station
bus (see "Operating modes").
With binary input signals:
- Change of any bit in the data telegram.
If an event occurs lhe new values are given priority when
transmitted to the PfmCONTROL bus system.
Measuring range eltpansion
When analog values are transmitted from the station bus to the
input/output station lhe measuring range can be expanded.
The expansion parameters )(1 (= 0 %) and X2 (= 100 %)
stored in the user EEPROM provide the processinq section
with the information I·equired for a particular case (user-spe-
cific).
This makes it possible, for instance, to output only the range
10 mA (= X1) ... 15 mA (= X2) of a 0 ... 100 % signal received

1 from the station bus in the form of a new 0/4 ... 20 mA Signal
to the input/output station.

~
GW
I I Hy The following condition applies to the expansion parameters:
--+-f -:--- 1--

.
, .. 1
GOll
I I
I X2 - X1 I> 6.25 %.

If this condition is nJt fulfilled "parameter error" will be sig-

Upper limit value
Fig. 1: Possible settings of the limit values
nalled inside the mo::lule.
Lower limit value
Data transmission with measuring range expansion increases
the internal transmis~;ion time for all values transmitted to a to-
tal of 20 ms.

4
 88QT03/R2111

•••;;c;o;-:-••

Addressing and data communication Telegram allocation

The data telegrams to be received from the station bus are The following table shows the significance of the bits in all tele-
specified to the module under their source location addresses grams whieh are generated by the input/output station mod-
and written to the sink registers of the station bus receiving ules.
shared memory. Specification is user-specific. In the form shown (not marshalled) they am written (from the
If no telegrams are received from the station bus the module input/output station shared memory) into the station bus send-
reacts as follows: ing shared memory (after user-specific marshalling). From
When data are marshalled telegram by telegram to the in- there they C.re transmitted to the PROCONTROL bus system
put/output station shared memory either the last valid value as source data telegrams (their source addresses are specified
or zero is transmitted (see "Operating modes"). In tele- during pro~lramming). The column "Reg. No." denotes the
grams with data types >0 the general disturbance bit (bit register address in the station bus sending shared memory (as
position 0) is set additionally. a component of the overall source addres~;).
When data are marshalled bit by bit to the input/output sta- As to their composition and bit significance the analog and
tion shared memory either the last valid value or "zero" is binary teleg -ams which are generated inside the module (ace.
transmitted (see "Operating modes"). to the user or firmware program) by the 70PR03 computing
If the general disturbance bit is set in a data telegram received module, the 70BK03 coupling module or 70AS04/06 compact
from the station bus the response of the module depends on control module connected to the input/oJtput station and
the position number of the processing program: which are transmitted to the PROCONTROL bus system corre-
If the position number is smaller than or equal to P0005 zero spond to the analog/binary structure shown in the following
will be transmitted to the input/output station shared memory. table.
If the position number is bigger than or equal to P0006 the
value will not change.
If the input/output station receives no telegrams the corre-
sponding station bus telegrams will not be transmitted to the
PROCONTROLbussy~em.

Aeg Informa1ion Telegram . DA

. ..
No

bit position

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
I I i I I

n Analog value VZ 100 ! 50 25 12.5 6.25 3.125 1.56 I 0.78 I 0.39 0.195 0.097 I 0.048 a 0 SB 5
, i
, 70EAOl I %
i
0/0 °'0 % I % % I
I
% % % % OJ.;, % I
, FEX (1...4)
i I ! I i I
n+l ! lImItvalue ! 0 0 I, a GOX4 GUX4
I
MX4 GOX3 :
I
GUX3 MX3 I GOX2 GUX2 MX2 GOX1 I GUXl MXl SMX 3
! FEX (1 .. .4) I !

n j Analog value i VZ 100 50 25 12.5 6.25 3.125 1.56 0.78 0.39 ! 0.195 : 0.097 0.048
!
0 a SB 5
! 70EA02 I ! % % % % %
I
% % % % % % %
i FEX (1...4) II
I
I
n+l I Limit value 0 0 0 ! GOX4 GUX4 MX4 GOX3 GUX3 I
MX3 GOX2 GUX2 MX2 I
I
GOXl : GUX1 MXl SMX 3
FEX (1...4) I 'I
I I !

Binary value
70EBOl
EB14
,
I
I
EB13 EB12 EB11 EB07 I EB06 EB05 EB04 EB03 : EB02 EBOl
*)
..)
I
FE (L16)

Binary value
170EB02
, EB15 I EB14 ! EB13 EB12 EB11 EB10 EB09 EB02 EBOl
*)
.. )

! FE (1 .. 16)

Binary value
70EB03
A52 ASl M05 R42 A41 M04 R32 R31 A22 A21 M02 R12 All ! MOl SB ..)
FE (L5)

Ab b reviati on s: GOXX = violation of limit value X

(E.ctual value above upper limit)
GUXX = violation of limit value X
SMX general disturbance bit for telegram
(2ctual value below lower limit)
SB disturbance bit for telegram
FEX function unit
MXX individual disturbance annunciation for limit value X
EBXX binary input signal XX
MOX individual disturbance annunciation for change-
DA data type in station bus telegram
over contact X
RX1 contact input (normally closed contact) *) not to be used for station bus (~ general disturbance bit)
RX2 contact input (normally open contact) **) for mar~;halling telegram by telegram: (I
VZ sign for mar~.halling bit by bit: 1

'~"="'="'="'="'="'="'="'="'="'="'="'="'="'="'="'='."= =.....=...
.... ~~== ....=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=....... ·····················.·.·.m.·...
~~~=
880T03/R2111

..
~'-';-'.

Input/output station: shared memory and input/output sta- Simulation memory

tion allocation
The input/output station shared memory uses a total of 256 All (analog or binary:, output data to be transmitted to the in-
registers (as already mentioned) for data telegrams from and put/output station can be simulated by means of thl~ PDDS.
to the input/output station modules.
The simulation values specified by the user are writte:1 into the
All input/output station modules require a start address under simulation memory by microprocessor II (after they have been
which they can be addressed by the bus control module received from the station-bus-specific section).
70BV01 (see module description "Bus Control module
70BV01 ", HESL 400 423). The real data - belonging to an output address of an input/
The bus coupling module requires no address on the input/ output station- are c::mtinued to be received nevertheless and
output station. written into the input/output station shared memory. Therefore
The addresses of the user modules connected to the input/ both values are always available on the module.
output station are set with the address switches S2 and S3 Simulated values are specified and cancelled by means of the
(see module descriptions). appropriate instruction issued by the PDDS.
An input/output station address (set with S2 and S3) can be
assigned to one input module only. 880T03 signals the double
use of addresses for input modules as error.
Irrespective of the number of module inputs actually used the
total number of the addresses required for an input module
(acc. to the total number of inputs) shall be considered for in-
put/output station address allocation. Otherwise inadmissible
double address allocation will occur.
In the section "Processing" it has been explained that output
telegrams can be output to several output addresses of the
input/output station simultaneously. Therefore, the condition
mentioned above (avoiding double address allocation) bears
no significance regarding data output to the input/output
station. (As regards 70BV01) merely the input/output station
address of the output modules is required to be set with the
address switches. The module is informed about the possible
multiple output of telegrams to output modules of the input/
output station by the user program.

6
 88QT03(R2111

...~ ...

Operating modes Switch settings

Initialization Switch casillg S1 housing four contacts is located on printed

circuit board 1.
During initialization the user program is transferred from the
EEPROM to the main memory (RAM). Contact 4 must be in the OFF position.

When the module is connected the first time the user lists The following module functions can be set with the contacts
(data) need to be loaded into the EEPROM by means of the 1 - 3:
PODS. - Signal output
The value to be output to the input/output station if the
Plug-in jumpers and switches disturbance bit is set in the station bus telegram is set with
contact ·1. The following assignment applies:
A switch and plug-in jumpers are located on the printed
circuit boards of the module (see "Mechanical design"). Output cf the last valid value S1 : 1

ONtj
Inserting the plug-in jumpers

Some plug- in jumpers are used only by the manufacturer for Output cf zero 81 :1
tests and therefore shall be inserted for operation as shown in
"'~'"
"Mechanical design". ON@
The plug- in jumpers X60 ... X63 and X65 ... X67 switch off the
input/output station bus signals at connector X11 when the
- Time for event processing (for analog values):
module is installed in the cabinets 89MS01 (R01 OO(R0200 and
89MS01/R0200. Moreover the dual supply of US and Z is The adjustable time mentioned under "Event processing"
implemented with these plug-in jumpers. can be set on the module. The following assignment ap-
plies:

Jumper Signal Module installed Module installed Event tringering after 40 ms S1 :2

i in the cabinets in the cabinets *)
II ZS1/ES1 89MS01/89MS02 ONt]
X62 ,01 inserted open
X61 ION inserted open Event tringering after 200 ms S1 :2
X65 CK inserted I open
II
X66 SME inserted open
i ON@
X67 Z open inserted
X63 AD/USB position 1 - 2 position 1 - 3
I X60 inserted open Disturbance signal processing:
Contact 3 is directly assigned to modu e input STX (see
*) Condition as delivered. "Function diagram"). The external disturbance annuncia-
•••:-;-;0;-;-.,
tion signal which can be connected to STX is input into the
background diagnostic register 211 as clisturbance signal
SMX on the module. The type of input int:l register 211 can
be selected with contact 3. The following assignment
applies:
SMX equals STX logically. S1 :3

ONtj

SMX is logically inverted to STX S1 :3

ON@

7
 880T03/R2111
Diagnosis and annunciation functions
Disturbance annunciations on the module
The LEDs on the front panel of the module indicate the follow-
ing disturbances:
- Disturbance
- Disturbance input/output station
The LED ST signals all disturbances of the module and of the
data communication with the module.
The red LED STEA can either emit steady light or flash:
- Steady light: Disturbances of the input/output station or
the input/output station interface inside the
module.
- Flashing light: For appro 4 s, either when the voltage is con-
nected or data is copied internally from the
EEPROM to the main memory (RAM). If
STEA is switched off after appro 4 s, the
module is ready for operation. If STEA con-
tinues flashing a disturbance is present.
Disturbance annunciation signals to the alarm annuncia-
tion system
The alarm annunciation system and the control diagnostic sys-
tem CDS receive disturbance signals transmitted by the bus
coupling module via the bus.
The disturbances are stored and transmitted to the bus system
as general disturbance signal via the interface SS (SST data
line). In that event the bus system reads the internal diagnosis
registers of the module for further evaluation.
Status signals
The yellow LED SIM is emitting steady light as long as at least
one output value of the input/output station is being simulated.
The LED will be activated, too if user data (e.g. address list,
limit values) are changed "online" by means of the PDDS dur-
ing operation or the module is using the lists stored in RAM.
The green LED EAVE is emitting steady light as long as the
88QT03 module is participating in the data transfer of the
input/output station.
.....................................................................................................................................
Diagnosis
A number of internal diagnostic functions are available on the
module which form Jart of the basic module program (firm-
ware) which is proce~;sed cyclically. These functions comprise:
- Functional test of the input/output station inc!. thi3 internal
input/output station interface and monitoring the reception
Designation of the input/output station telegrams.
of the LED
- Mutual check of the microprocessors I and II
ST
STEA - Check of internally generated data lists by means of parity
bits (internal data protection)
- Sink time monitoring checks whether all station bus tele-
grams the module requires (acc. to the address list) are
received on a regular basis. Sink time monitoring will
respond (as is the· case with all other station bus modules)
if these telegram~; fail to be received.
- Annunciation of external disturbances
The disturbance signal inputs SME1, SME2, SME3, SMS
and STX on conr'ector X21 are used for the diaqnosis of
external disturbance signals and are stored in the diagnosis
register (register address 211). See Fig. 3.
When a disturbance occurs the type of fault is stored in the
diagnosis register and a disturbance annunciation signal is
transmitted to the PHOCONTROL system.
Upon request the module outputs a telegram containing the
data stored in the diagnosis register (register 246). s'ae Fig. 2.
The contents of the diagnosis register, the signals from the
general disturbance line, the annunciations on the CDS and
the indication ST are shown in the Figs. 2 to 4.
Connection of the input/output station using
70BT01
The bus coupling module is connected to the input/output
station by means of the 708T01 bus isolation amplifier. If the
module is intended to be installed in the cabinets ZS1 and ES1
the 891010 connecting cable shall be used (max. length 5 m).
If the module is inlended to be installed in the cabinets
89MS01 and 89MSO:2 the cable 891K05 shall be used.
 88QT03/R2111

.... •...
~

Module in operation

Diagnosis
register 246
Bit 'Type; CDS annunciations *)
15 S'- parameter fault 6615
14 S - process channel fault 6600
13 S - processing fault 6601
12 S i_ checksum error detected 6602
11 0 i
10 I S !- time r defective 6604
9 D l_ mod ule restart executed 6605
8 S - bus deactivation defective 6606
7 0
6 0
5 0
,
4 S :- sink monitoring responded ----_H---'--+-+-+------- 6610
3 S1- bus coupling fault **) 6611
2 S :- even t mode fault 6612
1 0 :
0 0

Module out of operation ST

wrong firmware PROM
hardware defect processing section - - - - -
EEPROM not valid
® I

P-L~
processing initialization ON

Module cannot accessed from the bus

station bus reset from 88TY01 present
module transmitter disconnected by 88TY01 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
module address not even or not within 2 - 58
hardware defect bus interface

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled when the contents of the diagnosis register has been transrnitted
S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation
o = not assigned

Fig. 2: 88QT03 diagnosis signals, register 246

Signalling "process channel fault" in the diagnosis register
may have the following reasons:
- Reception of a disturbed data telegram from the input/out-
put station
- Plausibility monitoring has responded
*) The control diagnostic station (CDS) provides a description
for each annunciation number. This description includes for
instance
- Expla nations of the cause and effects of the disturbance
- Recommended remedies.
This makes for fast disturbance elimination
**) If "bus coupling fault" is indicated in the diagnosis register
the caus e of the disturbance is located in the input/output
station and indicated in the additional diagnosis register
(register 211). See Figs. 3 to 4.

9
88QT03/R2111

Diagnosis
register 211
Bit: Type: CDS annunciations *)
15 i S ~
14 I S
error code 1: SME without reason present --------------- 6616
13 S
12 S then:
11 0
10 i 0 I

~'e
I'~I~
7 0
60.
I 5 I 0 I
i 4 I S SMS - general annunciation "simulation"
, 3 IS, SMX - general disturbance "Xi monitoring"
2 I S f-- SME3 set
, 1 I S I-- SME2 set
o . S r- SME1 set
~'.

Diagnosis
register 211
! Bit Type
,
15 S 0
I 14 S
l 13 S 1
! 12 S
0

0 then:
}
error code 2:

11 : 0
10 i 0
I 9 I 0
I 8 I 0
7 0
,
I 6 0
I 5 0
I 4 0
I
I 3 S l - error EEPROM detected 6659
,
I 2 S f-- error RAM detected 6638
I 1 0
I o I S I - error module PROM detected 6636

S = Static annunciations are cancelled automatically upon deactivation

o= not assigned

Fig. 3: 88QT03 diagnosis signals, register 211

*) The control diagnostic station (CDS) provides a description If several errors occur at the same time the error with the high-
for each message number. This description includes for est error code will bE! indicated.
instance:
- Explanations of the cause and effect of the disturbance
- Recommended remedies.
This makes for fast disturbance elimination.

.-;"••• 0:-••

10
 88QT03/R2111

....•-........

Diagnosis
register 211
I Bit [Type CDS annunciations *)
1 15 I S
14 I S I/O bus telegrams missing 6624
error code 14:
13 S
12 I S then:
11 0
10 0
9 I 0
8 0
7 S
6 I S
5 I S I
4 S address of module connected to the I/O bus
3 S
2 S
1 S
0 S I

Diagnosis
register 211
I
Bit Type
15 S
14
13
S
S } error code 15:
I

=ni=!
12 S then:
11 I 0
1

1010
I
I
9 I, S - bus signal ClK or ADR error -------- 6631
8 S - I/O bus adapter defective 6630
7
6
0
S :-- continuous transmitter I/O detected ~ 6628
5 0 ~ I I I
4 0
3 S SME signal set
Ii! 6635
, I
2 0 !
o
o o
STEA

I'1,------Y»)-----i(~
Copy RAM < - - > EEPROM **)

S = Static annunciations are cancelled automatically upon deactivatior

o= not assigned

Fig. 4: 88QT03 diagnosis signals, register 211

*) The control diagnostic station (CDS) provides a description **) Flashing light
for each annunciation number. The description contains for
instance:
- Explanations of the cause and effect of the disturbance
- Recommended remedies. If several errors occur at the same time the error with the high-
This makes for fast disturbance elimination. est error coce will be indicated .

•••••-:=;••..

11

=.. =
... =...=...=...=..=...c. 7••
..........................................................................................................................................•....................... .......................m...m.. = ... =
...=...=...=...=...=...=.. ~~~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~_
88QT03/R2111

Function diagram dard interface SEA to the input/output station. The latter can
be disconnected by means of plug-in jumpers. X21 incorpo-
Terminal designations rates five binary inputs, via which single disturbance signals
The module includes the connectors X11 and X21. X11 con- can be input into the PROCONTROl bus system, and the
tains both standard interface SS to the station bus and stan- standard interface SEA to the input/output station.

I---------------------------~
I.

:i if E~
'(jj EwE
EO)
~~
~w
d ~? X21
t--
<0
z10 SME1 X
I 7' z06 SME2 I
z04 SME3 ~

I z02
z08
SMS
STX
<0
X
rJl
Oi
c.
E
.:2..
L. (f) r>" .~
:J
.0 I
c OJ
0 :J
b02,Ol
~ 0..
W b0410N en "6
I "S OJ
('I) b08 CK c. c
o b10 I SME "S E0)
~ 0 rJl
I b061 AD :;:,

"
0)
:J
CO ! ~
CO I I SEA §- 0)

I I ",-;r
0
rJl
.0

I "0
0)

IX11~
I
en
" .~
<ti

2 X62 1 z28 101 .~

I
..92
~
Q)(f) :J
u~ 2 X61 1 b2810N
X111 {goO ~ "0
2 X65 1 b30
I 0
c Q)c CK E
o r----r-v cO ~ ~

~ ssl .~~
~­
2~X66~1 z30 I SME rJl
0)
:5
.o(f) 2 X63 1 d30 :J
AD / .0 .c

I u ...
I ~

• 0
USB c
:.c
!3 0 5:
I SEA E .~

i
i
I -
B
rJl C)
c
:is
ro
:J u
,
I
I

I X11 g 0...

US / c~
-l
d32 0
a:
I USA I-
Z
b321 Z 0
! 1 U
I 2 X67 1 z32 I Z 0
a:
1
•
V" ~

I
0...
c
0
I OJ
c
iJ
\I -
0
(f)
(f)
=
o
(f)
I
I
c
0)
c.
0)

~~
(f)
Q) 0) "0
u u c
0
0..
o
0.. I
I
.£1
U0)

~ c
7 L_~(f)_
I-
- -
I '"
., c
0
'" - -- - - - - - - - - - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -
U
"

12
 88QT03/R2111

.'~"

Connection diagram

Use in the cabinets ZS1/ES1

A
station bus
"I

~II
88QT03-E/R2111

C') C\I
W
]
«
UJ Z 0 ~
UJ
~ (j)
x
I-
(j)
~
UJ
~
UJ
~ ~
(j) 0 Ci « () (j) ::l (j) (j) (j) (j) (j)

cable
891Q10 ( )
(max. 5 m)

....•~.... I 70BT01 j
A I l "
input/output station bus
"I ...
PROCONTROL P (station bus) input/output station

bus p.c.b. 70BT01

10V
(UH)

•.••.o;-;-;v; ••

rear of cabinet front of cabinet

Use in the cabinets 89MS01/89MS02

=>
A

station bus
"I

~II~ X11

X21 SEA* X21

88QT03-E/R2111 88QB03-E/R01Qi

.«
UJ (j)
X21

(j) ::l
cable 891K05 (
(max. 30 m)
• For connections and the connecting cable
refer to the Module and Application 70BT01
Description 88QB03- E/R01 00

A J I
input/output station bus
...

13

" .................................................................... ,." ............................ .........................-.•.

~ =-~,~. ,
88QT03/R2111

Mechanical design View of connector side:

X
Board size: 6 units, 2 divisions, 160 mm deep 11

Connector: 1 x for station bus and input/output t:

station bus connection
48-pole, edge connector type F
(connector X11)

1 x for external disturbance signals

32-pole, edge connector type F X
(connector X21) 21

Weight: appro 0.83 kg

, ::d:=u
Both boards are mechanically and electrically connected. CD®

14
 88QT03/R2111

"'~"

Position of switches, plug-in jumpers, memory modules on p.c.b. 1 and the front panel

0
c::::r

88QT03-E/R2111 IT1
@ST

@SIM @STEA

~ @EAVE
~
81

·B
.~.

~ m A243

~ [ZJ A244

o ABS
•• _~r..'.
88QT03E
0
® CD

Memory modules: Order number: Order number: ;

(component) (programm€~
mProcessing program, A243 HETN 400 839 P1 GKWE 857 012 Pxxxx I
(low-byte)
!1l Processing program, A244 HETN 400 839 P1 GKWE 857 013 Pxxxx I
(high-byte)

xxxx = position number depending on the applicable version .

..
~.'.

15

m
.. .. =...=...=....~.======~================~~~==~.==========
=...=...=...=.~.~ ................................................... .......................................
................................................................................... ..
,~~~~~~
88QT03/R2111

Position of plug-In jumpers and memory module on p.e.b. 2

[TI 88QT03-E/R2111

Xll

r-l~
I!J><
X63~·
I A145
31 2

X61 X62

GJ. Q.
f:4, ~C!]
tJ >< •
~C!]
>< •
gC!]
>< •
X21

Memory module: Order number: Order number:

(component) (programmed)
[l] Station bus program, A145 HETN 400 829 P1 GKWE 857 011 Pxxxx

xxxx = position number according to the applicable version.

16
 8:30T03/R2111

"'7'~"

Technical data

In addition to the system data the following values apply:

Power supply
Operating voltage us = 24 V
Current consumption IS = 0.5 A
Power dissipation, typo P = 12 W
Reference potential Z = 0V

Module interfaces
SS - standard interface to the station bus
SEA - standard interface to the input/output station

Input values
SME1, SME2, - external disturbance annunciations 1 input each
SME3, SMS,
STX

....
~.

ORDER DATA

1. Complete module:
Type designation: 880T03-E/R2111 Order number GJR2374500R2111

2. Cable:
Type designation: 891010 Order number GKWE602215Rxxxx
(xxxx = length in cm, max. 500 cm)

3. Memory modules:
see "Mechanical design"

Technical data subject to change without notice!

"~'"

,,·7~·.·.

17

................................................................................
88QT03/R2111

1111
1_-
ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH
PO. Box 100351, D-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 381 4372 ..
~;-; ...
Telex 462411 107 ab d

Printed In Germany (KWl.IE69 1194 0.3 BID)

 Module and
....="""'.. Application Description
Publication No.
D KWl 631693 E, Edition 07/94
Replacing D KWl 6316 93 E, Edition 07/93
Application
The module is used in stations of the PROCONTROl system.
In conjunction with the remote bus coupling module 88FT05
this module couples the PROCONTROl station to the remote
bus.
Moreover the module controls all operations which are
required for data exchange inside the PROCONTROl station.
Connecting the station bus to PRO CONTROL remote bus
can be either single or dual-channel (see block diagram
'Connecting the stations').
When installed in an autonomous station the module per-
forms the functions of the bus control module.
Features
The module is equipped with
- one standard interface (SS) to the station bus
- one RS485 interface to the remote bus coupling module
88FT05
- one module data interface to the remote bus coupling
module 88FT05
- one isolated monitoring interface
- one interface for dual-channel station bus coupling
- one input to operate the transmitter high-level stages in
the remote bus coupling module 88FT05.
The module occupies the module addresses 60 or 61
(depending on whether it is used in the single or dual chan-
nel mode) and the module address 62 (see chapter 'Setting
the station, system and module addresses').
The module can be plugged in any slot of the PROCONTROl
cabinet. In the standard cabinets, however, slots are reserved
for the module.
A faultless transfer of telegrams between 88TK05 and older
PROCONTROl modules located in the same station is only
ensured if the older modules were produced after 1987 (se-
rial numbers 9xx8 and later) .
....
~ ..
PROC()NTROL P
Transfer
Station Bus Coupling Module
coupling the PROCONTROl
station to the remote bus
88TK0!5- E/R121 0
Design of the module
The module comprises the following functions:
- remote bus coupling
- control of the station protocol
- setting the module, station and system addresses
- RS485 intelface
- module dala interface
- monitoring interface
- interface for dual-channel station bus coupling
- diagnostics and annunciation functions
Remote bus coupling
Transmitting data from the station
Two main opl~rating modes are available for transmittal data
communication which are controlled by the master station:
- cyclic mode
- event mod'3.
In the cyclic mode the master station (MS) polls the stations
one by one. B8TK05 evaluates this call to tmnsmit data tele-
grams and forwards it to the station.
In the event mode 88TK05 signals the presence of events in
the station cy activating the noise channel. Then the MS
identifies the requesting station and generates an event call
which is evaluated by 88TK05 and forwarded to the station.
88TK05 transmits the cyclic or event telegrams, provided by
the station rrodules after polling, via the 88FT05 module to
the remote bJs.
All telegrams are checked for formal correctness and correct
contents. If an error is detected the telegram will be retained
and 88TK05 Nill transmit a diagnostic telegram instead.
In case the master station does not receive a telegram which
has been trc::nsmitted or receives it incorrectly 88TK05 will
buffer each clock of telegrams transmitted by the station until
the next call so that it can be repeated if required.
88TK05/R1210
Transmitting data to the station
The module receives all telegrams which are transmitted to
the PROCONTROl remote bus and checks them for formal
correctness and correct contents.
Source-location addressed and destination-addressed
telegrams are distinguished. Source-location addressed
telegrams are checked for formal correctness and if they are
valid they will be transmitted to the station.
Destination-addressed telegrams are checked for formal
correctness and correct contents and will be transmitted to
the station only if the system and station addresses match.
Formal correctness is checked by means of test marks with
which the contents of the telegram (operation code,
addresses, data) is protected (hamming distance: 6).
Special destination-oriented telegrams can be transmitted
via the PROCONTROl bus system which are destined exclu-
sively for the station bus coupling module. These are mainly
telegrams to control the remote bus coupling module
88FT05. These telegrams are identified by comparing the
addresses (station, system, module), but are not forwarded
to the station bus.
If an error is detected in those telegrams destined for the
station the module will not input these telegrams into the
station. Instead the module outputs a signal via the noise
channel to make the master station retransmit the incorrect
telegrams.
Control of the station protocol
Station bus communication
Data communication with the station follows a defined proto-
col, which is controlled by 88TK05.
All PROCONTROl station modules follow this protocol, i.e.
no module of the station may participate actively in data
communication without permission by the protocol.
Protocol control comprises the following functions:
- Identifying those modules requesting the permit to trans-
mit data telegrams to the station bus,
- Granting one module of the station at a time the permit to
transmit data telegrams to the station bus
- Enabling or inhibiting a transmitted or received data tele-
grams on checking its contents and formal validity
- Controlling cyclic operation in the station:
In the cyclic mode all the modules of a station are per-
mitted to transmit their cyclic data one by one starting with
the highest module address. The permit remains valid until
all data have been transmitted.
2
- Controlling the ev,:mt mode in the station:
In the event modH each module of the station which has
output an event signal is permitted to transmit a data tele-
gram. Transmission begins with the highest module
address.
Then, in descend ng order, all other modules with events
are permitted to transmit a data telegram. This process is
repeated until all event messages have been transmitted
(rotating priority).
- Controlling the lis1 mode in a station:
List transmission is used to transmit big volumes of data.
Depending on thH type of list transmission (writing/read-
ing) either the lis1 master or the list slave is granted the
permit to transmit a telegram block of list data. List trans-
mission is performed in the cyclic mode.
- Event mode:
When the station is receiving a data telegram from the
remote bus both the cyclic and the event modes are inter-
rupted in the stati:m and the station bus couplin!J module
is granted acces~; to the bus to .transmit a recleive tele-
gram.
- Autonomous mode:
The autonomous mode will be selected automatic:ally if the
station is not connected to the remote bus or no telegram
has been received over the remote bus for l1'ore than
100 ms. The aut010mous mode is terminated by the first
telegram received from the remote bus.
In the autonomou, mode the station bus couplin!J module
generates all calls required thereby taking over the control
function of the mC.ster station within the station.
- Telegram monitoring:
Each telegram contains a number of test marks (hamming
distance= 6), by means of which the contents 01 the tele-
gram (operation c:Jde, addresses, data) are protected. The
station bus coupling module lists in on all telegrams trans-
mitted over the station bus and checks the teleHrams for
errors by means I)f these test marks. In case of error the
telegram will be inhibited. If no error is detected the mod-
ule outputs an enable signal. A telegram may be trans-
mitted from the s1ation to the PROCONTROl bus system
or the output and processing modules of the station may
resume processing of this telegram only if the enable
Signal is available
These processes en,ure that only one module at a time out-
puts data to the serial station bus and that data Elxchange
within the station and to the remote bus is undisturbed.
Address transmission
The system and station addresses of a PROCONTROl
station are set on B8TK05. 88TK05 transmits this address
information in a special telegram to the station bus when the
station is initialized 8.nd once per system cycle. This ensures
that all modules of a PROCONTROl station get the same
station and system addresses set on 88TK05.
 88TK05/R1210

•••::'7.",,:••

.Jetting the station, system and
addresses and the operating mode
The station and system addresses, the module addresses 60
or 61, and the operating mode are set on 88TK05. Module
address 62 is set automatically. The settings are performed
with two switches (S1 and S2) on the module.
Switch S1 sets the station address (STA).
Switch S1:
Assignment S1 \ STA
Contacts S1
Significance I 1 ! 2 ! 4 I 8
module When the module is used in a distributed system (with a re-
mote bus), the S2/2 contact must be set to 'Not ON'.
The station and ~;ystem address settings are transmitted in a
telegram to all nodules of the PROCONTROL station (see
"Address transmission" in the section "Control of the station
protocol") .
An incorrect setting of the switches S1 or S2 will produce the
fault messages "Incorrect operating mode setting" (62/246/
bit 7) in single-channel operation, or "Partner module dis-
turbed" (62/246/ bit 11) in dual-channel operation and will
result in perman,mt activation of the ST light-emitting diode.
The exact caUSE: of the fault can be determined by reading
the background diagnostic registers 235 and 231 (see Figs.
16 I 32 i 64 i 128 I 3 and 4).

Example ION
I STA 129 • I
RS485 interface
I •
.... ..
~:-:-
In this interface the Signals to be transmitted to the remote
Switch S2 sets the module addresses (GA) 60 or 61 of the bus coupling module 88FT05 are conditioned and adapted.
module, the system addresses (SYS) 0, 1, 2, or 3, and the
operating modes (BA) autonomous station (AS) or remote All signals of this interface are transmitted with their true and
bus control (FB). inverted values.

Switch S2: This RS485 interface handles the following signals:

Assignment S2 GA JBA not assigned I

SYS i SE1+,SE1- controlling the telegram transmitter and trans-
i
mitter monitoring remote bus channel A On
Contacts S2 1 i 2 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I7 I 8 I
SE2+, SE2- controlling the telegram transmitter and trans-
Significance I I i I 1 ! 2 i mitter monitoring remote bus channel B On
RE+, RE- noise transmitter On
DA+, DA- tE~legram data
IExample iON •
GA60
I I I• i • •I•I ! I
RA+, RA- tE~legram frame
TA+, TA- telegram clock pulse
SP+, SP- checkback signal of the transmission level of
IExample ION
t'1e active remote bus channel
RP+, RP- c:heckback signal of the noise le:vel of the
!GA61 ,
I• I I• ! • i • ! • I I· I active remote bus channel
FS+, FS- annunciation remote bus coupling disturbed

.·7·0;-0;··.
IExample iON I I•
as general disturbance annunciation of 88FT05
to the RS485 interface
SYS01
I I I I i I• i
• • • • I
I I ESP + , ESP - disconnect signals for the 24 V supply of the
high-level stages of the telegram and noise
transmitters
IExample iON • I I .• . !</ • j ANB+,ANB- annunciation active remote bus channel
I BAAS I
I ! I•I•!• !• (channel A = 1, channel B = 01
SGD, SGD ~eference conductor interface RS485
US, US +24 V for 88FT05
IExample
I!
,ON
,
Z, Z reference conductor for +24 V
BAFB
I I•I•I •I•i•I
The contacts which are not assigned shall be set to 'Not ON'. Module data interface
If station coupling is single-channel, module address 60
shall be set. The data identifying the module are transmitted to the remote
bus coupling module 88FT05 via this interface.
If station coupling is dual-channel the station and system
address settings as well as the operating mode setting shall If several 88TK05 modules are connected to one 88FT05
be identical on either 88TK05 module but the setting of the remote bus coupling module this interface may be connec-
module address (60, 61) shall be different. ted to the first 88TK05 station bus coupling module only.

.....:'"""""•...

. .~
.....~
. . . . .."",
... ~==......=.....=......=.....~
......=.....",""",
.....~ .... =~=-
............ .....=.... =
..... =
.....=....
~ ~~~~~

=·..=...=...=...=...=...=....... c.=.,~=.~.~...~~~
 88TK05/R1210

Monitoring interface In the active phase the active module is monitored by the
passive partner for proper function in addition to sellf-diag-
The module is equipped with three isolated signal inputs nosis.
G12, G22 and G32 to which external disturbance annuncia- For this purpose data are exchanged cyclically between the
tion signals can be connected. The monitoring module redundant modules Clver the interface for dual-channel sta-
89NU01 can be connected to the binary signal output MST. tion bus coupling to Imsure that both modules are available.
Input G12 uses the closed-circuit principle to monitor of the The following criteria are monitored:
cabinet supply. Thereby it is possible to detect whether the
power supply of the modules has failed in the station. If - Proper function of the interface for the dual-channel sta-
88TK05 is used without 89NU01 the input shall be connected tion bus coupling
externally. This requires the contacts b08/d08 and d06/z06 of - Response of the watchdog function of a module
connector X21 to be connected (assignment see function
- Failure of the bus protocol communication within the sta-
diagram). tion
Input G22 uses the open-circuit principle and is intended to - Failure of data communication on the station bus
monitor the temperature in the cabinet.
- The system and station addresses of either module are
Input G32 uses the open-circuit principle. This input may be identical.
used to monitor the door if one is mounted.
If a malfunction is detected the partner module will switch off
These three signals are provided by the monitoring module the bus drivers of the defective module.
89NU01 (see Fig. 1). The disconnected module shall be replaced to re-I~stablish
If these disturbance annunciations are present this fact will dual-channel communication.
be input in the diagnostic register and the cabinet distur- The fault condition is signalled to the system by an input in
bance lamp will be activated via output MST and the module the diagnostic register of the active module and indicated by
89NU01. the LEDs ST (red) and SG (red) on the front panl~1 of the
disturbed module.

Interface for dual-channel station bus coup-

ling 88TK05 - Replacement of modules with
dual-channel station coupling
The 88TK05 module is provided with an interface which
allows dual-channel coupling of a station to the remote bus.
Bumpless replacement of 88TKOS modules with dual-chan-
The interface for the dual-channel station bus coupling is nel station coupling i~; possible even while the module is on-
connected by means of a 15-pole cable plugged in the front line, without causing any disruption in the operation of the
panel with the interface of the partner module (see function station concerned.
diagram).
To replace the module, separate the connection of the inter-
The interface for dual-channel station bus coupling handles faces for dual-chanrel station coupling by pulling the front-
the following signals: panel connector, then replace the module.
PAKTN input signal partner-station bus coupling module The 88TKOS module must D.Q1 be removed prior to pulling the
active on the remote bus front-panel connector and the front-panel connector must
KONFIG Dual-channel station bus coupling to the remote D.Q1 be plugged in before the 88TKOS module is installed.
bus available
Non-compliance with these instructions may result in the
SDO transmittal data line for communication with the failure of the entire station.
partner
ST transmit clock line for communication with the
partner
GSAO control module transmitter OFF
KGAKTN output signal station bus coupling module active
on the remote bus
SDI received-data line for communication with the
partner
ET receiver clock line for communication with the
partner
GSAI control input module transmitter OFF
In case of dual-channel station bus coupling both 88TK05
modules control protocol execution and data exchange
within the station and data transmission to the remote bus in
turn.
When two system cycles are completed the active module
changes over to the partner-module which has been
passive for far.

. .. =... =... =...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=

~ ...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=...=....=
.....=......=.. ..=...=...=.. ........................
=====~-====~~--~ , .
 88TK05/R1210

.... ..
~

Diagnostic and annunciation functions The followin~! types of disturbance are recorded:

1. internal disturbances of the module

Disturbance annunciation signals to the annunciation
system 2. disturbance in data communication on thl3 station and the
remote bus
The annunciation system and/or the control diagnostic sys-
tem (CDS) receives the disturbance annunciation signals of 3. disturbance annunciations of other modues of the station
the module via the PROCONTROl bus. (as "general disturbance annunciation - station detected")

They also include all disturbances which are detected by the 4. disturbance annunciations from the remote bus coupling
transmission monitor on the remote bus coupling module module 8CiFT05
88FT05 and the "general disturbance annunciation - station
detected" generated from the signals of the modules. 5. disturbance annunciations from the monitoring interface

88TK05 transmits its disturbance annunciations and diagnos-

All types of disturbance (1 ... 5) lead to the activation of the
tic results to 2 diagnostic registers with register address 246.
binary signal output MST.
Seven additional background diagnostic registers with the
register addresses 225, 227, 228, 231, 232,235 and 237 are The types 01 disturbance (1 ... 4) are indicated on the front
used for error localization. They are only transmitted on re- panel of the module (see chapter Disturban:;e annunciations
quest under the module address 60 or 61. For a description on the module).
"':~"
of the registers, refer to Figs. 3 to 6.
As an option, disturbance type 5 is indicated by means of
The contents of either diagnostic register with register 89NU01 by activation of the cabinet disturbance lamp.
address 246 is transmitted to the remote bus at the begin-
ning of each cyclic call of the processing station. The contents of the diagnostic registers, the annunciations of
Sequence: the general disturbance line, the annunciations on the CDS
and the indications ST and SG are shown in the Figs. 1 ... 5.
- Diagnostic register module address 60
in case of single-channel coupling and/or
diagnostic register module address 60 or 61
in case of dual-channel station bus coupling
- diagnostic register module address 62

In the event mode each time the station is called the first time
merely the diagnostic register module address 60 (single-
channel mode) or the diagnostic register module address 60
or 61 (dual-channel mode) is the first data telegram to be
transmitted to the remote bus.

............................................ ................................................................................................ .
~
88TK05/R1210
Disturbance annunciations on the module
The following disturbances are indicated on the front panel of
the module by red LEOs:
Designation of the LED
- Disturbance general ST
types of disturbance 1 '" 4
- disturbance module 88TK05 SG
type of disturbance 1
- disturbance transmission path 88TK05/88FT05 SG1
type of disturbance 4
- Acknowledgement error OF
type of disturbance 2 (remote bus only)
The LED ST indicates all the disturbances of the module and
of the data communication with the module. When three
cycles of the master station have been performed without
disturbance the red LED ST is switched off. Moreover ST is
activated for about 3 s when the module is being initialized or
when 88TK05 has disconnected a disturbed module from the
station bus.
The LED SG indicates module disturbances only. Moreover
SG is activated for about 3 s when the module is being initial-
ized.
The LED SG1 indicates disturbances of the transmission path
on the data channel and the noise channel.
The LED OF indicates telegrams received incorrectly from
the remote bus. For this purpose the error pulse is prolonged
to appr. 100 ms.
Status signals on the module
The following operating states are indicated by green LEDs
on the front panel:
Designation of the LED
- Telegram transmit to remote bus FS
- Telegram receive from remote bus FE
- Station bus communication SV
- Station bus modules with events ER
The LED FS will be activated if telegrams of 88TK05 or tele-
grams from the station bus are transmitted to the remote
bus.
The LED FE will be activated if telegrams are transmitted
from the remote bus to the station bus.
The LED SV will be activated if telegrams are transmitted
from the station bus to the remote bus.
The LED ER is switched on from the moment when events
are detected until the event telegrams are transmitted.
6
Reception monltorl1g on 88TK05 and 88FT05
Reception monitorinq on 88FT05 monitors the received tele-
grams for character distortion.
If the reception monitor responds the transmission of frames,
data and the clock pulse (RA, DA, TA) from 813FT05 to
88TK05 via the RS4B5 interface will be interrupted until the
next, valid SYN character is received.
As a result the abortion detector of the reception monitor of
88TK05 responds. 8BTK05 signals the disturbance by means
of the input "remote bus acknowledgement error" (bit 8) in its
diagnostic register (GA60/61) and the LED OF on the front
panel of the module is activated.
Transmitter monitoring on 88TK05 and 88FT05
The station bus coupling module 88TK05 which controls the
telegram and noise lransmitters of 88FT05 monitors the tele-
gram transmitters on the active remote bus channel for the
absence of the transmission level and excessive transmission
telegrams i.e. the telegram frame is longer than 6~1 !1S, and
also monitors the noise transmitters on the active remote bus
channel for the absence of the noise level.
Transmitter monitoring on 88FT05 monitors the telegram
transmitter of the active remote bus channel for an Elxcessive
telegram "transmit", i.e. transmission of more then 64 tele-
grams without interruption by the reception of a complete
telegram, and the noise transmitter of the active remote bus
channel for an excessive noise signal, i.e. the noise transmit-
ters are switched on for more than 10 ms incessantly.
In case of excessive transmission telegrams, an excessive
telegram"transmit" or and excessive noise signal the drivers
of the disturbed tele£lram transmitter on 88FT05 are switched
off by the signals SE1 or SE2 until the end of the cycle.
The drivers will be switched on again by 88TK05 with the sig-
nals SE1 or SE2 when the telegram "start cycle VS" has
been received.
If transmission monitoring of the telegram transmitters re-
spond three times in succession the drivers of the disturbed
telegram transmitter remain switched off.
Each of the above-mentioned disturbances is signalled by
the input "Transmit path fault" (bit 9) in the diagnostic: register
(GA60/61) of 88TKO:i.
Monitoring of modlile arrangement In the PROCONTROL
station
In order to ensure fast detection of changes in the station's
module arrangemenl due to the removal or insertion of mod-
ules, the 88TK05 polls the modules at time intervalE; < 3 ms
over the station's internal parallel bus. The current arrange-
ment determined in Ihis way is compared to the previous ar-
rangement. If the same changes are consistently detected in
three polling cycles, ':he diagnostic message "Station module
arrangement changed" is generated in the diagnostic regis-
ter of module address 62 (see Fig. 2). This message is trans-
ferred to the PROCONTROL system and is canceliEld > 1 s
after occurrence of the disturbance.
This monitoring fun:tion is available in software versions
P0004 and later of the 88TK05 module. It is only effective
with new PROCONT=tOL modules with redundant 2'.4 V sup-
ply.
 'l >~
.:I )

~
CD
Transmitter monitoring
excessive telegram
88FT05
,-------
Transmitter monitoring

~ "transmit"
6c.n FS
excessive noise ~1 transmission level missing -. ~1 88TK05-E/R1210
signal
a.
iii' Voltage noise level missing
(Q
::l monitoring L _ __
'---
oen
(ii' r-
Reception
3(!) monitoring Diagnostic register 246
en with module addresses 60. 61 CDS
en Character distortion Reception
annunciations 2)
~
(!)
aborts reception I I monitoring
of telegrams
en
::E RA
station coupling fault 1) 4400 -~
;::+ frame firmware of partner module different 1) ~- 4408 ~- --

-
:J"
: J"
(!)

3
data
DA abortion
detector module restart executed 4404-----/
TA el test event
o clock pulse noise chann . •station detected
a. -- group malfunction 4405
c
ii) 't path fault - - - - - 3401 ,-
III
a. transml nowledgement error
l 4406

~
a. remote bus ack, 'ssing
I telegram transmit allocation
d tected

~_
ro
en --------. --1 M§T.. abortion __ d,,'-"''''''''
In AS ml
checksum errorcoopl"'9'
e, )
4407
en
(!)
en r -optlo",'
- - I
I
1"'9"'"' d
00: opeo ______ I

: ~;tl ote ~l
.- 10,,'1d S "biDet 1,"11 ~1
OJ 4401

~ ::: ~I ~
9
OJ
...... II 89NU., ir-:---=-II =.§12 G32 3 -S
2 S
powe;,:::;:: ;"0011",", ,,'pond,d
tel'9"m tr""m,",d I
4402
4403

i I II ! -.§gg - L 1 0 - AS restart executed I :~~---tt1

I € ?I ,I """0 =-1
bee''''''d,;e Ih,-;;;;l
~1
! bo"oopl" SG SST
6<) MSP.
I - -, -
II ,.,Iort by ""I
wel'hdog ""pood,d
!XI I
l . ,--
MTE II pow" 00
voltage monitoring responde d ~1
I
MST = disturb, annunc, fr 0 m the station I

~1 t---~ ~
Bvo ,oopl;o, modol' opl "mo;o, ~
MTK = door open disturbed I
MSP = power supply the cubicle
MTE = temperature In I
I incorrect firmware PROM ~1
hardware defect '---
too high _ _ _ _ _ _ ~
1.---
S = Static annunciations disappear automatically 1) In case of dual-channel station bus coupling only 2) The control diagnostic station provides a description for each CD
upon deactivation message number, ~
o = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after
This description may include: 6
c.n
- Explanation of the cause and effect of the disturbance --..
transmission of the diagnostic register :II
......
-- Recommened remedies I\)
-...j
o = not assigned
This ensures the quick elimination of the disturbance,
......
o
 88TK05/R1210

Module runninQ
Diagnostic register 246
with module address 62
CDS
Bit Type! annunciations
15 S module address code (A = 0 = 60, B = 1 = 61)
14 S I signal simulated ------------------------------------------------ 4430
13 D protocol error AS detected 1 4412
12 S channel code, 0 = single-channel, 1 = dual-channel
11 S partner module fault @ 4424
10 0
9 D module restart executed 4415
8 S module from AS bus disconnected <D 4416
7 S operating mode setting (D) wrong @ 4423
6 S checksum error detected 4419
5 S >-- station module arrangement changed 4425
4 D ~ telegram error in AS detected <D 4417
3 D cycle abortion detected <D 4428
2 D I - protocol error remote bus detected 4427
1 D -;- response from module missing <D 4418
o 0 ,.--
'---
-

ST

Module can nQt b!il ~QQ!illlll!ilQ via th~ bUll

watchdog re sponded
;;1 f SST
-c=I

power ON ,
voltage mon ito ring responded

Modyle not runnjnQ

I
i
incorrect firm ware PROM
hardware defect
--
j
I
SG SSG
- --
f ;;1 -c=I

'--- ;;1 ® ;;1

®
'---
--
;;1

S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after transmission of the diagnostic register
o = not assigned
<D = for cause and associated module address, see background diagnostic register:, in Figs. 3 to 6
@ = for cause, see background diagnostic registers in Figs. 3 to 6
® = also triggers the output of the CDS annunciation "AS restart executed" - - - - - - 4410
® = also triggers the output of the CDS annunciation "response from AS invalid" ---- 4202

.Eig,.2;, 88TK05 diagnostic messages with module address 62

.........................................................................................................
 88TK05/R1210

Background
diagnostic register 225 Cause of "Response from module missing' (62/246/1)

Bit Type
15 0
14 0
13 0
12 0
11 0
10 0
9 0
8 0
7 D c-
6 D r--
5 D I--
4 D I-- module address (decimal) of the last allocation
3 D r--
2 D I-
1 D
0 D !-

Background
diagnostic register 227 Cause of "Cycle abortion detected" (62/241;/3)

Bit Type
15 D r--
14 D I--
13 D r--
12 D I--
counter for number of cycle abortions
11 D f-
10 D r--
9 D :-
8 I D i-
7 D -
I 6 D -
...-;;-....... 5 D -
4 D - module address (decimal) of the module,
3 D - which fails to respond after two allocations
,
2 D -
1 D r--
0 D '--

S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled aTter transmission of the registl~r
o = not assigned

..-7'"'"'-.

~ Background diagnostic registers 225 and 227.

9
88TK05/R1210

Background
diagnostic register 228 Cause of "Telegram error In AS detected" (62/246/4)

Bit IType[
I 15 I D , -
I 14 I D r--
I 13! D
! 12 D
counter for number of telegram faults
11 i D
~ 10 i D
9 D
8 D!
7 D
6 D ~
5 D
4 !I D
module address (decimal) of the last allocation
3 D -
2 D f..-
1 D
0 D 1-

Background
diagnostic register 231 Cause of "Operating mode setting wrong" (62/246/71

Bit Type
! 15 0 !
I
14 0 I
13 0
12 0
11 0
10 0
9 0
8 0
7 0
6 0
5 0
4 D i-- no cyclic polling 1.8
3 D I - different P version of firmware PROMs
2 D i-- autonomous station, remote bus reception
1 0
0 0

S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after transmission of the register
o = not assigned

~ Background diagnostic registers 228 and 231.

10
 88TK05/R 121 0

..·T·~·.

Background
diagnostic register 232 Cause of "Module from AS bus dlsconnectE!d" (62/246/8)

Bit I Type'
15 0
14 0
13 I 0
12 I o '
11 0
10 0
9 0
8 0
,
7 D r--
! 6 D I--
I
5 D I--
I
4 D -
3 D r--
> module address (decimal) of the disconnected module

••;?;"•••
2 D I--
1 D I--
0 D I--

Background
diagnostic register 235 Cause of "Partner module faulf' (62/246/11)

Bit Type
15 0
14 0
13 0
12 0
11 0
10 0
9 0
8 0
7 0
6 0
...
~ •...
5 0
4 0 r-- different operating mode
3 0 I-- 88FT05 defective
2 S - hardware defect 1 interface for dual-channel station coupling removed
1 S r-- wrong station/system address setting
0 S
L...C"'-..L....::::........Jr-- wrong module address setting 60, 61

S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation

D = Dynam ic annunciations are cancelled after transmission of the registe r
o = not assigned

..... ..
~

~ Background diagnostic registers 232 and 235 .

........................................................... ....................................................................................... ................................................................ . ... ... ... ...

~~~~~.-----~
88TK05/R 121 0

Background
diagnostic register 237

Bit Type
15
14
13
0
0
0
Cause of "Protocol error AS detected" (62/246/13)

l
12 0 !
11 0 !
10 0
9 D - contents of telegram not plausible
8 i D - protocol violation
7 i D -
6 i D -
5 D 1-
4 D I--
module address (decimal) of the last allocation
3 D I--
2 D I--
1 D I--
0 D I--

S = Static annunciations disappear automatically upon deactivation

D = Dynamic annunciations are cancelled after transmission of the register
o = not assigned

~-------------------------------~
'~"

fuL....6.;. Background diagnostic register 237.

12
 88TK05/R 1210

"'~"

Function diagram Connector )(11 includes the standard interface to the station
bus.
Terminal designations Connector X21 includes the RS485 interface, the module
The p.c.b. is equipped with the connectors X1, X11 and X21. data interface to the remote bus coupling module 88FT05,
Connector X1 includes the interface for the dual-channel the power supply US for 88FT05 and the interface to the
station bus coupling. monitoring and the flasher module 89NUO·I.

-ESP
-
+24V
1X21
X21
d02
-
-
~
- - -

.----
---- -
0
.,.....
-l I
"'''' C\I
~ ~ ffi
-
RA+ b10 Q)o
Cl~ T""
RA- b12 .;gil..
",co
0
a::
OA+ b14 ~co

~[f
:> 0
0._ ~ UJ
OA- b16 lO :5- c I
TA+ b18
0
~
o a.
:> .2 LO
~ii; I
u.. ~c c 0
TA- b20 co Q).- 0
~
~~E
co ~
ANB+ b22 Q) ·0 t-
~~
:; c CO
ANB- b24 -0
II)
C 0>
01 :> CO
SP+ b26 0 ~ ~ £ E[>
E
~tJ
SP- b28 01 '--- C. ctl
:> -0
SE2+ I b30 .~ 0 c I
C. u ctl
SE2- b32
FS+ z10
o 0
:>
-Q) II)
u .a
II)
:>
II)
.~
(jj
---®g X1
u :> .l!l 0 -I
FS- z12
ESP+ z14
~.o
22
0
E
c
01
ctl
---®g ,...--
13 GNO
c 0 ~ 10 • GNO
ESP-lz16
RE+ z18
.-
lO
~ ~
E
Q) 'C ---® bi Qi
c 06 GNO
RE- z20 rn Q) I....--- COl
ctl
c
03 GNO
a:£ ~.-
SGO z22 u- 14 GSAI
I§- 12 ET
SGD z24
~8 11 SOl
RP+ z26 -0",
RP- z28 ~
0.0
:> 09 I KGAKTN
SE1+ z30 ~c 07 GASO
u.Q 05 ST
SE1- z32 ctl-
't:1l
0> II) 04 SOO
i..---
~ 02 KONFIG
1X21 01 I PAKTN
US
US
z02
z04
-
US z06 X11 /'.
US z08
Sld30 USB
....
~ .... I :t: ~r d32' USA
Z b02 b32 Z
Z b04 t- z32 Z
Z b06 , b02 ZO
Z bOS , b14 ZO
I ,..- -r r---- d261 ZD

'--
rn
>-
rn
r"'- co
r---
1--...- co
.----
X21 ~...- 1--...- r---
ZM d16
- '"
II)
0>
'"
0
f-...- <0 1--...- <0 1!t:i::
ZM d121 '"01 ~...-
01-0
£16 1-...-
- co I
ZM d081
C
:a0> f-...- v
lO
~
:t::c
1--...- v
'" .sco
0>"0
Cl Q) 0 u
UM
G32
d18
d14
c
"§ ~
0>
- '" r-"'- C') "'"".l!I 1--...- C') ~
0

0>--'
E
Q)
urn
~rn
G22 d10
:::'t:
c
Oc Q)
'----
<1;-
CD_ f-...-
N '" 1--...- N :£§- 2 ~ '":>
.a
E .- f-. 1--_ ctl 0
_u (5
u .~ .a t> c
G12 d06 <1; ~ ~
""""---
MST d04 C!J N
..
(jj
ctl '"
-0 :>
0
o- ~§<l 0
il
'--- rn '--- 0>.0
: ; 0>
-0-
o
E 0>
E
0
-- ~
0.'::-
c c
o
0

0
:0::: U
-
-0:0:::
c
jgtn
'"
ctl (jj

.;g
--,--~..- II)

_J
I

L_ - - -
,...
~!ci
--
0

UCl
N
C')
-0
I-1 - - - -
. ,.
SdSd

13

...=
~.= ...=...=.. =...=...=...=.. =...=...=...=.'.'.='.'.. ..
~.'.'.~==~== ..=.. ...=...=...=.. =...=...=............................................. .
~
88TK05/R1210

Block diagram 'Connection of stations'

Single-channel station bus coupling

remote bus A remote bus B

in- out- in- out-
coming going coming going

88FK05/R0100 88FK05/R0100

remote bus branch line

88FT05/R1200

RS485 CD
,- - - ... - ...... - - - - - - - - - - - ...... - ... - .,

r------,
88TKOS/R1210 I 88TK05/R1210 I
.-----..
L. _ _ _. - _ _ J

station bus station bus

Dual-channel station bus coupling

remote bus A out- remote bus B

in- in- out-
coming rgOing coming going

....---'-------'--,

88FK05/R0100 88FK05/R0100

remote bus brancr line

88FT05/R 1200 88FT05/R1200

RS485 RS485
,,---------------------------------------.,
,..--- -- . . ----- . . --1'----- . . --------.,
,
I' ,
r·------, r------,
88TKOS/R1210
891K02
88TKOS/R1210 I H
:a8TKOS/R1210
L.. _ _ _. - _ _ J
I
88TKOS/R121 0
L. _ _ _ ..- _ _ J

I 1 . ....-_11-._-----_. _-......
, ,

station bus station bus

CD Max. 4 stations can be connected

in two adjacent cubicles.

14
 88TK05/R1210

Mechanical design Contact aS~iignment of connector X21

View of contact side:
Board size: 6 units, 1 division, 160 mm deep
I
Connector: X11, X21 acc. to DIN 41612 I d b z I

2 x 48-pole, edge connector type F 02 ESP Z US

I
X1 acc. to MIL-C-24308 04 MST II Z US
I
1 x 15-pole, female connector type HDP 20 06 G12 Z US
Weight: appro 0.5 kg 08 ZM Z US
10 G22 RA+ FS+ !

View of connector side: 12 ZM RA- FS-

14 'G32 DA+ ESP+
16 ZM I DA- ESP-
I

X
18 UM i
I
TA+ RE+
I
11 20 TA- RE-
22 ANB+ SGD+
...
~ ..
24 I ANB- SGD-
26 i SP+ RP+
I I
28 i I SP- RP-
I
30 ICC I
SE2+ SE1+
32 ICD
I
SE2- SE1-

X
21
Contact aSlilgnment of connector X1
View of con':act side:

01 PAKTN
02 KONFIG
03 GND
04 i
SDO
05 ST
06 GND
i
07 GSAO
08
09 KGAKTN
!
10 I
GND
11 SDI
12 ET
13 GND
14 GSAI
15

15
88TK05/R1210

Side view and view of the front panel of the module

r::P
ASS

OJ 0 0 ST disturbance
ST SG SG module disturbance
W 0 0 QF acknowledgement error
QF SG1 SG1dlsturbance transmission
W path 88TK05/88FT05
X11
G.J
W
[§J J

0 0 FE remote bus recl3ive

I O,N Is
.:.-.._---:6:..J 2
1.....
FE SV SV station bus communi-
cation
0 0
FS ER FS remote bus trar.lsmit
ER event

'70
00
00

X1
0
X21 00
00
.::::::::
X1

llJ [E @] [Q] [j] [j]]

ASS
88TK05
0

Memory modules: Order number: Remark on PROMs;

(EPROM programmed)
Under the order No. of the complete module the complete
OJ = A101 GJR2393241 Pxxxx set of the memory mJdules required for the basic program is
[Il = A102 GJR2393242Pxxxx included in the delivery.
W = A103 GJ R2393243 Pxxxx
LI: = A104 GJR2393244Pxxxx
[I = A105 GJR2393245Pxxxx The number include~; the position of the components on the
[§J p.c.b.
= A106 GJR2393246Pxxxx
[IJ = A401 GJR2393247Pxxxx xxxx = position number depending on applicable version.
[§J = A402 GJR2393248Pxxxx
[g] = A403 GJR2393249Pxxxx
[Q] = A404 GJR2393250Pxxxx
[j] = A405 GJR2393251Pxxxx
[j]] = A406 GJR2393252Pxxxx

16
 88TKOS/R1210

Technical data

The following values apply in addition to the system data:

Power supply (on the module)

Operating voltage 24 V +/ - :~5 %
Current consumption IS for appro 166 mA
Power dissipation typo 4W

Monitoring Interface

Input values
G12 - disturbance power supply of cabinet Ie = 5 mA
The input uses the closed -circuit principle. Ue = 24 V
G22 - thermostat responded Ie = 5 mA
Ue = 24 V
G32 - cabinet door open Ie = 5 mA
Ue = 24 V
.•• -:-?:"••••
UM - annunciation voltage UM = 24 V

Output values
MST - general disturbance station la = 6 mA
Ua = 24 V

RS485 interface to the remote bus coupling module 88FT05

RS485 standard
transmission rate 1 MBaud
Termination resistor 100 Ohm
Passive differential signal voltage 400 mV
max. length of connection between 88TKOS/88TK05 10 m (total)
type of cable RO- Y (ST) Y 16 x 2 x 0.22 mm
or standard wiring
max. length of connection between 88TK05/88FT05 1 m, cable B91K01
max. number of stations 4
in max. 2 mechanically interconnected
cabinets
.... ..
~
input ESP Ie = 5 mA
Ue = 24 V

Noise immunity (of station bus coupling)

in case of proper installation

ESO acc. to IEC 801/2 8 kV to fron: panel

EMV acc. to IEC 801/4 2 kV burst included in remote bus cable

ORDER DATA

Order No. complete module:

Type designation: 88TK05-E/R1210 Order No: GJR2393200R1210

Accessories:
Cable 891K02 for dual-channel station bus coupling Order No: GKWE 602380R0090
....:.-:-.-•....

Technical data subject to change without notice!

17
88TK05/R1210

All
1IIl1_
ABB Kraftwerksleittechnik GmbH
p. O. Box 100351, D-68128 Mannheim
Phone (0621) 381 2712, Telefax (0621) 3814372
Telex 462 411 107 ab d

Printed in Germany (KWUE69 894 0.3 BID)